Manual Dslan

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V100
Web LCT Operation Guide
Issue 31
Date 2010-04-08
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 WDM Network Management Process....................................................................................1-1
2 Getting Started............................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs...................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Starting the Web LCT.....................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT............................................................................................................................2-3
3 Creating a Network....................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Network Creation Procedure...........................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Creating NEs...................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2.1 Creating NEs in Batches........................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2 Creating a Single NE..............................................................................................................................3-5
3.3 Configuring Master/Slave Shelf......................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.1 Master/Slave Shelf Configuration..........................................................................................................3-7
3.3.2 Adding a Slave Shelf..............................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.3 Changing a Shelf Name..........................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Shelf......................................................................................................3-8
3.3.5 Deleting a Slave Shelf............................................................................................................................3-8
3.4 Creating an NE User.......................................................................................................................................3-9
3.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User...................................................................................................................3-11
3.6 Configuring Boards.......................................................................................................................................3-11
3.6.1 Adding Boards......................................................................................................................................3-11
3.6.2 Checking Board Parameters.................................................................................................................3-12
3.7 Creating Fibers..............................................................................................................................................3-23
3.8 Configuring NE Clock Sources.....................................................................................................................3-23
3.8.1 Adding Clock Sources..........................................................................................................................3-24
3.8.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE..............................................................................3-24
3.9 Configuring Orderwire..................................................................................................................................3-25
3.9.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................3-26
3.9.2 Configuring Orderwire.........................................................................................................................3-27
3.9.3 Configuring Conference Calls..............................................................................................................3-28
3.9.4 Configuring Express Orderwire...........................................................................................................3-28
3.9.5 Dividing Orderwire Subnets.................................................................................................................3-29
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Contents Web LCT Operation Guide
3.10 Configuring the NE Time............................................................................................................................3-30

3.10.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the Web LCT and NEs..............................................................3-30
3.10.2 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web LCT Server Automatically.............................................3-31
3.10.3 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web LCT Server Manually....................................................3-31
3.11 Parameters...................................................................................................................................................3-32
3.11.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis................................................................................................3-32
3.11.2 Parameters: Orderwire Board Settings...............................................................................................3-34
3.11.3 Parameters: General...........................................................................................................................3-34
3.11.4 Parameters: Conference Call..............................................................................................................3-35
3.11.5 Parameters: Auxiliary.........................................................................................................................3-36
3.11.6 Parameters: Attributes of NEs............................................................................................................3-37
3.11.7 Parameters: Attributes of NE Users...................................................................................................3-37
3.11.8 Parameters: NE Time Synchronization..............................................................................................3-40
3.11.9 Parameters: Path Binding...................................................................................................................3-43
3.12 Parameters: WDM Interface........................................................................................................................3-44
3.12.1 Parameters:Optical Transponder Board.............................................................................................3-45
3.12.2 Parameters:Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.............................................................................3-48
3.12.3 Parameters:Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board..........................................................................3-50
3.12.4 Parameters:Tributary and Line Boards...............................................................................................3-51
3.12.5 Parameters:Optical Amplifier Board..................................................................................................3-53
3.12.6 Parameters:Optical Supervisory Channel Board................................................................................3-55
3.12.7 Parameters:Protection Board..............................................................................................................3-56
3.12.8 Parameters:Spectrum Analysis Board................................................................................................3-57
3.12.9 Parameters:Variable Optical Attenuation Board................................................................................3-58
3.12.10 Parameters:Dispersion Compensation Board...................................................................................3-59
4 Performance Management........................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold......................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters..................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board.......................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE..........................................................................4-3
4.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port...................................................................4-3
4.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers..........................................................................................................4-4
5 Configuring Wavelength Grooming......................................................................................5-1

5.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow...................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Configuring the ROADM................................................................................................................................5-3
5.3.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation..................................................................................5-5
5.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 Parameters.....................................................................................................................................................5-12
5.4.1 Parameters: Edge Port..........................................................................................................................5-12
5.4.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................5-12
ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection..........................................................................5-14
6 Configuring WDM Services.....................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Service Type....................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.3 WDM Service Configuration Flow.................................................................................................................6-9
6.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service.....................................................................6-11
6.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram....................................................................................................6-11
6.4.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation................................................................................6-12
6.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................6-13
6.5 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services.................................................................6-15
6.6 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service..................................................................6-18
6.7 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services.................................................................6-22
6.8 Parameters.....................................................................................................................................................6-25
6.8.1 Parameters: Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration.....................................................................6-25
6.8.2 Parameters: WDM Service Configuration...........................................................................................6-28
7 Configuring the 11TOM Board...............................................................................................7-1

7.1 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 Electrical
Signals...................................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1
Electrical Signals...................................................................................................................................................7-6
7.2.1 Configuration Networking Diagram......................................................................................................7-7
7.2.2 Service Signal Flow...............................................................................................................................7-7
7.3 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals
.............................................................................................................................................................................7-10
7.3.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................7-11
7.4 Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal
.............................................................................................................................................................................7-14
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

7.5 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal and
Realizes the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side.....................................................7-19
8 Configuring the 52TOM Board...............................................................................................8-1

8.1 About the Working Modes..............................................................................................................................8-4
8.2 Configuration Rules........................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.3 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or One ODU1
Electrical Signals...................................................................................................................................................8-6
8.3.1 Configuration Networking Diagram...................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.2 Service Signal Flow............................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4 Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal
(with ODU0 mapping)........................................................................................................................................8-12
8.5 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 Electrical Signal
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-18
8.6 Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal
(with ODU1 mapping)........................................................................................................................................8-22
8.7 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1
Electrical Signals.................................................................................................................................................8-28
8.8 Application Scenario 6: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 Optical Signals
.............................................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.9 Application Scenario 7: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1
Electrical Signals.................................................................................................................................................8-40
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.10 Application Scenario 8: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical
Signals.................................................................................................................................................................8-45
8.10.1 Configuration Networking Diagram..................................................................................................8-45
8.10.2 Service Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................8-46
8.10.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................8-47
8.11 Application Scenario 9: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0
Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)..........................................................................................8-49
8.12 Application Scenario 10: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1
Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)..........................................................................................8-54
8.13 Application Scenario 11: Realizes the Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1
Optical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)..............................................................................................8-59
8.14 Application Scenario 12: Realizes the Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical Signals.................................8-64
8.15 Working Mode............................................................................................................................................8-68
9 Configuring SDH Services....................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Configuring SDH Services..............................................................................................................................9-3
9.2 SDH Service Overhead...................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 Trace Byte..............................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.2 Signal Label Byte...................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring.........................................................................................9-4
9.3.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.....................................................................................................9-5
9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services.........................................................................................................9-10
9.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................9-10
9.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................9-11
9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services.....................................................................9-20
9.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................9-20
9.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................9-21
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services.............................................................................................9-27

9.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation......................................................................................9-29
9.7 Parameter.......................................................................................................................................................9-35
9.7.1 Parameter: SDH Service Configuration...............................................................................................9-36
9.7.2 Parameter: SNCP Service Control.......................................................................................................9-39
9.7.3 Parameter: VC4 Path Overhead...........................................................................................................9-41
9.7.4 Parameter: VC3 Path Overhead...........................................................................................................9-44
10 Configuring Ethernet Services............................................................................................10-1

10.1 Ethernet Service Types................................................................................................................................10-4
10.1.1 Ethernet Private Line Service.............................................................................................................10-4
10.1.2 Ethernet LAN Service........................................................................................................................10-6
10.1.3 QinQ...................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.2 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.1 Tag Attributes.....................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.2 VLAN Group....................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.3 MAC Address Filtering....................................................................................................................10-11
10.3 Configuring Ethernet Boards....................................................................................................................10-12
10.3.1 Configuring Internal Ports................................................................................................................10-12
10.3.2 Configuring External Ports...............................................................................................................10-14
10.4 Configuring an EPL Service on a WDM Network...................................................................................10-16
10.4.1 EPL Service Configuration Process.................................................................................................10-16
10.4.2 Configuring Port Attribute for an Ethernet Board...........................................................................10-17
10.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections on an Ethernet Board..........................................................................10-18
10.4.4 Creating EPL Services.....................................................................................................................10-18
10.4.5 Verifying Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................10-20
10.5 Configuring an EPL Service on an SDH Network....................................................................................10-20
10.5.1 EPL Service Configuration Process.................................................................................................10-21
10.5.3 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board and a Line Board...................................10-22
10.5.4 Creating EPL Services.....................................................................................................................10-23
10.5.6 Deleting EPL Services.....................................................................................................................10-25
10.6 Configuring EPLAN Services on a WDM Network.................................................................................10-25
10.6.1 EPLAN Service Configuration Process...........................................................................................10-26
10.6.4 Creating EPLAN Services................................................................................................................10-28
10.6.5 Creating VLANs Filtering................................................................................................................10-30
10.6.6 Creating VLAN Unicast...................................................................................................................10-31
10.6.7 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses...........................................................................10-32
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10.6.9 Deleting EPLAN Services................................................................................................................10-33
10.7 Configuring an EPLAN Service on an SDH Network..............................................................................10-34
10.7.1 EPLAN Service Configuration Process...........................................................................................10-35
10.7.4 Creating EPLAN Services................................................................................................................10-37
10.7.5 Creating VLANs Filtering................................................................................................................10-39
10.7.6 Creating VLAN Unicast...................................................................................................................10-39
10.7.7 Disabling an MAC Address.............................................................................................................10-40
10.7.8 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses...........................................................................10-41
10.7.10 Deleting EPLAN Services..............................................................................................................10-42
10.8 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network.......................................................................10-43
10.8.1 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process..................................................................................10-43
10.8.4 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services......................................................................................................10-45
10.8.6 Deleting EVPL(QinQ) Services.......................................................................................................10-47
10.9 Configuring an EVPL (QinQ) Service on an SDH Network....................................................................10-48
10.9.1 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process..................................................................................10-48
10.9.4 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services......................................................................................................10-50
10.10 Configuring VLAN Groups....................................................................................................................10-53
10.10.1 Creating a VLAN Group................................................................................................................10-53
10.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering......................................................................................................10-54
10.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite Router........................................................................10-54
10.11.2 Deleting the Opposite Router MAC Address.................................................................................10-55
10.12 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP Services..............................................10-56
10.12.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service...................................................10-56
10.12.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet Service...................................................10-57
10.13 Configuring Port Mirroring.....................................................................................................................10-58
10.14 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults.......................................................................................................10-59
10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services...............................................................................10-59
10.15.1 Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................10-60
10.15.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation..........................................................................10-61
10.15.3 Configuration Process....................................................................................................................10-62
10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL(QinQ) Services................................................................10-67
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10.16.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation..........................................................................10-68
10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Service...........................................................................10-74
10.17.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation.........................................................................10-75
10.17.3 Configuring Process.......................................................................................................................10-77
10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH Network...............................................10-83
10.18.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.............................................................................................10-85
10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network......10-96
10.19.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.............................................................................................10-98
10.19.3 Configuration Process..................................................................................................................10-100
10.20 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDH Network..........10-109
10.20.1 Networking Diagram....................................................................................................................10-109
10.20.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...........................................................................................10-110
10.21 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH Network..............................10-120
10.22 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network...10-132
10.23 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network
.........................................................................................................................................................................10-144
10.24 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network
.........................................................................................................................................................................10-162
10.25 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH
Network...........................................................................................................................................................10-176
10.26 Parameters.............................................................................................................................................10-181
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.26.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port)...............................................................................10-182

10.26.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port)....................................................................................10-184
10.26.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port)........................................................................10-184
10.26.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port).........................................................................10-185
10.26.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.........................................................................................................10-186
10.26.6 Parameters: Network Attributes...................................................................................................10-188
10.26.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service...............................................................................................10-188
10.26.8 Parameters: VLAN SNCP Service Management.........................................................................10-191
10.26.9 Parameters: VLAN Group............................................................................................................10-195
10.26.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................................10-196
10.26.11 Parameters: Aging Time.............................................................................................................10-202
10.26.12 Parameters: VLAN Unicast........................................................................................................10-203
10.26.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring.........................................................................................................10-203
10.26.14 Parameters: Protocol Fault Management...................................................................................10-203
10.26.15 Parameters: Port MAC Address Filtering..................................................................................10-204
11 Configuring PRBS Test.........................................................................................................11-1

11.1 Application of PRBS...................................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board.........................................................................11-3
11.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board .............................................................................................11-4
12 Modifying the Configuration Data.....................................................................................12-1

12.1 Modifying the Attributes of NEs.................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.1 Modifying the NE Name....................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 Deleting an NE...................................................................................................................................12-2
12.2 Modifying the Boards Configuration..........................................................................................................12-3
12.2.1 Deleting Boards..................................................................................................................................12-3
12.2.2 Modifying Board Parameters.............................................................................................................12-3
12.2.3 Modifying Port...................................................................................................................................12-5
12.3 Modifying the Fibers Configuration...........................................................................................................12-6
12.3.1 Deleting Fibers...................................................................................................................................12-6
12.4 Modifying the Services Configuration........................................................................................................12-7
12.4.1 Deleting Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................12-8
12.4.2 Modifying SDH Services...................................................................................................................12-8
12.4.3 Deleting SDH Services.....................................................................................................................12-10
12.4.4 Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service...............................................................12-10
12.4.5 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service...............................................................12-14
12.4.6 Deleting EPL Services.....................................................................................................................12-16
12.4.8 Deleting EPLAN Services................................................................................................................12-17
12.4.9 Modifying a VLAN Group...............................................................................................................12-18
12.4.10 Deleting a VLAN Group................................................................................................................12-19
13 Tasks.........................................................................................................................................13-1
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
13.1 Configuring the ROADM............................................................................................................................13-4

13.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port..................................................................................................................13-4
13.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection............................................................................13-5
13.1.3 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection.........................................................................................13-6
13.2 Configuring Common Cross-Connections..................................................................................................13-8
13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections...............................................................................................................13-8
13.3 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections.........................................................................................................13-9
13.3.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity....................................................................13-9
13.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections......................................................................................................13-9
13.4 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services.........................................................................................13-10
13.4.1 Configuring Trace Byte....................................................................................................................13-10
13.4.2 Configuring C2 Byte........................................................................................................................13-11
13.5 Configuring Service Timeslots..................................................................................................................13-12
13.6 Configuring the Service Type...................................................................................................................13-13
13.7 Testing Ethernet Service Paths..................................................................................................................13-14
13.8 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes.........................................................................................13-15
13.9 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes...........................................................................................13-16
13.10 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the MCA Board..............................................................................13-16
13.11 Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board.......................................................................................13-17
13.12 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board.........................................................................................13-18
13.13 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters........................................................................................13-18
13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board...........................................................................13-20
13.15 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs..............................................................................13-21
13.16 Configuring the Service Mode................................................................................................................13-21
13.17 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)....................................................................................................13-22
13.18 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board........................................................................13-23
13.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board..........................................................................13-23
13.20 Configuring Protection Trigger Conditions............................................................................................13-24
13.21 Configuring Path Binding.......................................................................................................................13-25
13.22 Configuring the FEC Function................................................................................................................13-26
A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment management process............................................................................1-1

Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 8800 equipment management process............................................................................1-2
Figure 5-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow..........................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Networking diagram of Project R.......................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Service allocation of Project R...........................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 Services at station A of Project R.......................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 Services at station C of Project R.......................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R......................................................................................5-7
Figure 6-1 Straight-through mode........................................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 Cross-connect mode........................................................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-3 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 6800/3800...................................... 6-5
Figure 6-4 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 8800 OTN...................................... 6-6
Figure 6-5 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 8800 SDH.......................................6-6
Figure 6-6 WDM service configuration flow.....................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-7 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service......................................................................6-12
Figure 6-8 Unidirectional service on each NE...................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-9 Wavelength allocation diagram........................................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service.................................................................6-15
Figure 6-11 Unidirectional service on each NE.................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-12 Wavelength allocation diagram......................................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-13 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service.................................................................6-19
Figure 6-16 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service.................................................................6-22
Figure 7-1 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario
1.............................................................................................................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 Bidirectional service on station A...................................................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-3 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in application scenario
2.............................................................................................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-4 Bidirectional service on station A...................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-5 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in non-cascading mode) in application
scenario 3.............................................................................................................................................................7-11
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figures Web LCT Operation Guide
Figure 7-6 Bidirectional service on station A....................................................................................................7-12

Figure 7-7 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in cascading mode) in application
scenario 4.............................................................................................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-9 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in cascading mode) in application
scenario 5.............................................................................................................................................................7-20
Figure 7-10 Bidirectional service on station A..................................................................................................7-21
Figure 8-1 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary mode in cascading mode) in application
scenario 1...............................................................................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-2 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board.........................8-8
Figure 8-3 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board........................................8-8
Figure 8-4 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary & line mode in cascading mode) in
application scenario 2..........................................................................................................................................8-13
Figure 8-6 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary mode in cascading mode) in application
scenario 3.............................................................................................................................................................8-19
Figure 8-8 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary & line mode in cascading mode) in
Figure 8-10 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary mode in non-cascading mode) in
Figure 8-11 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board.....................8-30
Figure 8-12 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board....................................8-30
Figure 8-13 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary & line mode in non-cascading mode) in
Figure 8-15 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary mode application 1 in non-cascading
mode) in application scenario 7..........................................................................................................................8-41
Figure 8-18 Bidirectional service on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board......8-47
mode) in application scenario 10........................................................................................................................8-55
Figure 8-23 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary&line mode application 1 in non-cascading
mode) in application scenario 11........................................................................................................................8-60
Figure 8-25 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary & line mode application 2 in non-
cascading mode) in application scenario 12........................................................................................................8-65
Figure 9-1 SDH service configuration process....................................................................................................9-3
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide Figures
Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of a non-protection...........................................................................................9-5

Figure 9-3 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the services on the non-protection ring.................................9-6
Figure 9-4 Networking diagram of the 1+1 linear MSP....................................................................................9-11
Figure 9-5 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the 1+1 linear MSP service.................................................9-12
Figure 9-6 Networking of two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.............................................................................9-21
Figure 9-7 Signal flow and timeslot allocation..................................................................................................9-22
Figure 9-8 SNCP tangent ring networking.........................................................................................................9-29
Figure 9-9 Signal flow and timeslot allocation..................................................................................................9-30
Figure 10-1 EPL services...................................................................................................................................10-4
Figure 10-2 PORT-shared EVPL services.........................................................................................................10-5
Figure 10-3 VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services................................................10-5
Figure 10-4 EPLAN services.............................................................................................................................10-6
Figure 10-5 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) ......................................................................................10-7
Figure 10-6 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).....................................................................................10-8
Figure 10-7 Principle and function of MAC address filtering.........................................................................10-12
Figure 10-8 EPL service configuration process...............................................................................................10-17
Figure 10-9 EPL service configuration process...............................................................................................10-21
Figure 10-10 EPLAN service configuration process........................................................................................10-27
Figure 10-11 EPLAN service configuration process........................................................................................10-35
Figure 10-12 EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process..............................................................................10-44
Figure 10-13 EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process..............................................................................10-49
Figure 10-14 Networking diagram for configuring EPL services ...................................................................10-60
Figure 10-15 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EPL service..................................................................10-61
Figure 10-16 Wavelength allocation diagram..................................................................................................10-61
Figure 10-17 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL(QinQ) service.......................................................10-68
Figure 10-18 Service signal flow of EVPL(QinQ) service..............................................................................10-69
Figure 10-20 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services .............................................................10-75
Figure 10-21 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service.................................................................................10-76
Figure 10-23 Networking diagram of the EPL services...................................................................................10-85
Figure 10-24 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board) ...............................................10-85
Figure 10-25 Networking diagram for configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services ..........................10-97
Figure 10-26 Signal flow and timeslot allocation............................................................................................10-98
Figure 10-27 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services ...............10-110
Figure 10-28 Signal flow and timeslot allocation..........................................................................................10-111
Figure 10-29 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services.................................................................10-122
Figure 10-30 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.......................................................................................10-123
Figure 10-31 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) .......................10-133
Figure 10-32 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation .....................................................................................10-134
Figure 10-33 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) .....................10-145
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figures Web LCT Operation Guide
Figure 10-35 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) ...................10-163
Figure 10-37 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services.......................................10-177
Figure 10-38 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation......................................................................................10-178
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the client side..................................................................11-2
Figure 11-2 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the WDM side................................................................ 11-2
Figure 12-1 Project L networking design.........................................................................................................12-12
Figure 12-2 SNCP service after conversion.....................................................................................................12-13
Figure 12-3 Project J networking design..........................................................................................................12-15
Figure 12-4 SNCP service before conversion..................................................................................................12-15
Figure 13-1 Connection for testing Ethernet service paths .............................................................................13-14
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide Tables
Tables
Table 3-1 Configuration procedure......................................................................................................................3-3

Table 3-2 List of parameters for an optical transponder and Ethernet unit........................................................3-12
Table 3-3 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit.........................................................................3-17
Table 3-4 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit...............................................................................3-20
Table 3-5 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit.................................................................................3-21
Table 3-6 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit................................................................3-21
Table 3-7 List of parameters for SDH unit.........................................................................................................3-21
Table 3-8 NE user parameters............................................................................................................................3-37
Table 5-1 Optical cross-connection parameters.................................................................................................5-13
Table 6-1 Service access types.............................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-2 Service access types (OTN).................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-3 Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration.......................................................................................6-26
Table 6-4 Create SNCP......................................................................................................................................6-27
Table 6-5 Timeslot service parameters...............................................................................................................6-29
Table 8-1 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the 52TOM board....................................8-4
Table 10-1 EVPL(QinQ) services......................................................................................................................10-9
Table 10-2 Processing policy at ingress...........................................................................................................10-10
Table 10-3 Processing policy at egress.............................................................................................................10-10
Table 10-4 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards......................................................................10-62
Table 10-5 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards......................................................................10-62
Table 10-6 Parameters of the EPL services......................................................................................................10-62
Table 10-7 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards......................................................................10-69
Table 10-8 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards......................................................................10-70
Table 10-9 Parameters of the EVPL(QinQ) service.........................................................................................10-70
Table 10-10 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards....................................................................10-76
Table 10-11 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards....................................................................10-77
Table 10-12 Parameters of the EPLAN services..............................................................................................10-77
Table 10-13 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...............................................................10-86
Table 10-14 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...............................................................10-86
Table 10-15 Parameters of the EPL services....................................................................................................10-87
Table 10-16 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...............................................................10-99
Table 10-17 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...............................................................10-99
Table 10-18 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services...........................................................10-99
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tables Web LCT Operation Guide
Table 10-19 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards.............................................................10-111

Table 10-20 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards.............................................................10-112
Table 10-21 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services................................................10-112
Table 10-24 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) services..................................................................................10-124
Table 10-27 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).....................................................10-135
Table 10-30 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).....................................................10-148
Table 10-33 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)...................................................10-165
Table 10-36 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).....................................................10-180
Table 10-37 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services................................................10-180
Table 10-38 Ethernet Service Parameters.......................................................................................................10-189
Table 10-39 VLAN SNCP parameters...........................................................................................................10-192
Table 10-40 Service Mount............................................................................................................................10-198
Table 10-41 VLAN Filtering..........................................................................................................................10-200
Table 10-42 VLAN Unicast...........................................................................................................................10-201
Table 10-43 Disable MAC Address...............................................................................................................10-201
Table 10-44 Bound Path.................................................................................................................................10-201
Table 10-45 Self-learning MAC address........................................................................................................10-202
Table 12-1 List of parameters for optical transponder and Ethernet unit...........................................................12-4
Table 12-2 List of parameters for Tributary unit and line unit...........................................................................12-4
Table 12-3 List of parameters for Optical amplifying unit.................................................................................12-5
Table 12-4 List of parameters for Spectrum analyzer unit.................................................................................12-5
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02
OptiX iManager T2000 Web V200R008C00

LCT
iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R001C00
NOTE
This document is prepared based on the U2000 Web LCT. The operations on the T2000 Web LCTare
similar to those on the U2000 Web LCT.
Intended Audience
This document describes the guides to configure the services on the Web LCT. This document
describes how to configure optical network element and ROADM.
This document is intended for:
l Installation and Commissioning Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
About This Document Web LCT Operation Guide
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Based on Product Version

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100
Fixed several bugs in the manual of the previous version.
2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide About This Document

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100
Chapter Configuring IP over DCC is deleted in this document, added in the Feature Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100
The updated contents are as follows.
l Chapter 9 Configuring the 52TOM Board
The configuration of the 52TOM board is added.
l Chapter 10 Configuring the SDH Services
The configuration of the SDH services is added.
l Chapter 11 Configuring Ethernet Services
The configuration of the ethernet services based on an SDH network is added.
l Chapter 12 Managing NE Power Consumption
The configuration of the NE power consumption managing is added.
l Chapter 14 Modifying the Configuration Data
The configuration of modifying SDH services is added.
l Chapter 15 Tasks
The configuration of creating SDH services is added.
The configuration of path overhead for SDH services is added.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
About This Document Web LCT Operation Guide

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100
The updated contents are as follows.
l Chapter 8 Configuring the 11TOM Board
The configuration of the 11TOM board is added.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100
The first commercial release of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100.
4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 1 WDM Network Management Process
1 WDM Network Management Process
The WDM network management process describes the operation tasks of managing a WDM
network by using the Web LCT, and the relations between the operation tasks.
For the detailed process for managing the OptiX OSN 6800, refer to Figure 1-1.
NOTE
The procedure for managing the OptiX OSN 3800 is similar to the procedure for managing the OptiX OSN
6800.
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment management process
Configuring WDM ASON

Deploying a Maintaining a Feature
Configuring Services WDM
Network Network Note 2 Management Note3
Features Note 1
Configuring Configuring
Creating a Configuring Managing the Configuring WDM
Services on a Per- End-to-End
Network Protection Optical Power ASON Networks
NE Basis Services Note 4
Routine
Configuring Configuring Customer Alarm
ROADM Configuring IPA Management Maintenance for an
DCNNote 5 Management ASON Network
Configuring the Configuring WDM Manage WDM Performance

Configuring Handling ASON
NE Time Services Protection Management Network Failures
Subnet ALC
Configuration
Configuring Configuring Manage WDM Configuring Data
Clocks OverheadNote 6 Trail APE Management
Configuring Configuring Configuring Report

Orderwire Ethernet Services EAPE Management
Configuring
Board
Parameters
Configuring
ProtectionNote1
Note 1: See the Feature Description.

Note 2: See the Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Note 3: See the ASON User Guide.
Note 4: See the iManager U2000 LCT Product DocumentationHuawei iManager T2000 LCT Product
Documentation.
Note 5: See the Feature Description DCN chapter.
Note 6: See the Feature Description OTN Overheads.
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1 WDM Network Management Process Web LCT Operation Guide
Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 8800 equipment management process

Configuring WDM ASON
Deploying a Configuring Maintaining a SDH ASON Feature
Configuring WDM Services WDM Feature
Network SDH Features Network Note 2 ManagementNote 4
Features Note 1 ManagementNote 3
Creating a Services on a Per- End-to-End Configuring Configuring Managing the Configuring WDM Configuring SDH
Network Protection Optical Power ASON Networks ASON Networks
NE Basis Services Note 5 SDH Services
Configuring Alarm Routine Routine

Configuring Customer Configuring IPA Configuring
ROADM Management Management Maintenance for an Maintenance for an
DCN Note 6 Overhead
ASON Network ASON Network
Manage WDM Performance
Configuring the Configuring WDM Configuring Configuring Handling ASON Handling ASON
Services Protection Management
NE Time ALC Ethernet Services Network Failures Network Failures
Subnet
Configuration
Configuring Configuring Manage WDM Configuring Data
Clocks OverheadNote 7 Trail APE Management
Configuring Configuring Configuring Report

Orderwire Ethernet Services EAPE Management
Configuring
Board
Parameters
Configuring
Configuring WDM
SDH
ProtectionNote 1
ProtectionNote 1
Note 1: See the Feature Description.

Note 2: See the Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Note 5: See the iManager U2000 LCT Product DocumentationHuawei iManager T2000 LCT Product
Documentation.
Note 6: See the Feature Description DCN chapter.
Note 7: See the Feature Description OTN Overheads.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002 or a later version supports the SDH-related functions, including
configuring SDH protection, SDH features, and SDH-ASON feature management.
The landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart shows the main phases of managing
the WDM network by using the Web LCT. The phases include network deployment, service
configuration, WDM feature configuration, network maintenance, and WDM ASON feature
management. In the case of the service configuration, the end-to-end service configuration mode
requires a license that supports the end-to-end WDM management, and the WDM ASON feature
management requires a license that supports the WDM ASON feature. The WDM ASON feature
is unique to the NG WDM. An NG WDM NE can use the WDM ASON feature management
function only after the WDM ASON feature is enabled.
The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each
phase.
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 2 Getting Started
2 Getting Started
About This Chapter
The following topics describes the operations that ensure a smooth, trouble-free launch of the
Web LCT.
2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs

To configure and manage NEs by using the Web LCT, you need to connect the Web LCT to the
NEs with Ethernet cables or serial port cables.
2.2 Starting the Web LCT
You need to start the Web LCT before logging in to configure and manage NEs.
2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT
You can log in to the Web LCT server through the Internet Explorer without installing the server
on the local computer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2 Getting Started Web LCT Operation Guide
2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs

To configure and manage NEs by using the Web LCT, you need to connect the Web LCT to the
NEs with Ethernet cables or serial port cables.
Procedure
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs with Ethernet cables.
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Web LCT computer.
2. Route the cable to the equipment side and connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet
cable to the NMS interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE
The IP address of the NMS and the IP address of the equipment must belong to the same network
segment.
l Connect through the DCN.
1. Connect the Web LCT computer to the DCN using an Ethernet cable.
2. Connect one end of another Ethernet cable to the NMS interface of the equipment
panel and connect the other end of the line to the DCN.
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs with the RS 232 serial port cable.
1. Connect the serial port cable to the Web LCT computer.
2. Route the cable to the equipment side and connect the RS 232 connector of the serial
port cable to the RS 232 interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE
For the location of the RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet interface on the equipment, see the
equipment-specific Hardware Description.
----End
2.2 Starting the Web LCT

You need to start the Web LCT before logging in to configure and manage NEs.
Prerequisite
The Web LCT computer and equipment must be correctly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Start the Web LCT computer.
Step 2 Double-click the shortcut icon Start Web LCT on the desktop. The Web LCT is properly started
and the login page for the Web LCT is displayed.
Step 3 Enter the Password.

NOTE
By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is T2000. To protect the Web LCT from
illegal logins, you need to instantly change this password and keep the new one.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 2 Getting Started
Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.
----End
2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT

You can log in to the Web LCT server through the Internet Explorer without installing the server
on the local computer.
Prerequisite
l The Web LCT server must be started correctly.
l The pop-up blocker of Internet Explorer must be turned off.
Procedure
Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer.
Step 2 Enter the IP address of the Web LCT server in the address field. The Web LCT Login dialog
box is displayed.
NOTE
Enter the IP address of the server, for example, http://10.70.73.1:11080/WebLCT. The four octets
10.70.73.1 is the IP address of the server computer and 11080 is the port number.
NOTE
The IP address of the Web LCT server is case-sensitive, make sure that WebLCT is entered correctly.
Step 3 Enter the Password.

NOTE
By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is T2000. To protect the Web LCT from
illegal logins, you need to instantly change this password and keep the new one.
If five consecutive logins through the same user account are performed with incorrect passwords, the user
account will be locked and it will be unlocked 15 minutes after the last failed login. (When the interval
between two logins is within three minutes, the two logins are considered as two consecutive logins.)
The unlocking operation cannot be performed through the NMS. Only the system can (automatically)
unlock the user account.
Here the locking indicates that the user account of a specified NE is locked and the other NEs are not
affected.
Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.

NOTE
An NE supports the login of a single Web LCT user at a time. No concurrent logins of several Web LCT
users is supported on an NE.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 3 Creating a Network
3 Creating a Network
About This Chapter
You can use the Web LCT to create a subnet, an NE, and the topology of fibers or cables, and
to configure NE data, check or modify board parameters. You can also use the Web LCT to
manage the subnet, NE, and fibers or cables.
3.1 Network Creation Procedure

You can refer to the following procedure to create a network.
3.2 Creating NEs
Each actual OptiX series equipment is represented as an NE on the Web LCT. Before the Web
LCT manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the Web LCT.
There are two ways of creating NEs: creating a single NE (including a single subrack) and
creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large number of NEs, for example, during
deployment, it is recommended to create NEs in batches. When you need to create just a few
NEs, it is recommended to create the NEs one by one. In special situations, for example, when
the communication between the Web LCT and the NE is interrupted, you can only choose the
mode of creating a single NE.
3.3 Configuring Master/Slave Shelf
The OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 support the management of master/slave shelves.
When multiple shelves are required for an NE, the master/slave shelf mode must be adopted for
centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the Web
LCT.
3.4 Creating an NE User
To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE
user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The Web
LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.
3.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User
During a new deployment, after the lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create another NE
user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
3.6 Configuring Boards
In the , you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
3.7 Creating Fibers

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3 Creating a Network Web LCT Operation Guide
You must create fibers on a per-NE basis before you configure services.
3.8 Configuring NE Clock Sources
The time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. To
synchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board according
to the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directions
and termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.
3.9 Configuring Orderwire
You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the Web LCT.
3.10 Configuring the NE Time
Time consistency between the Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshooting and
network monitoring. You should set the Web LCT time and NE time before service
configuration.
3.11 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.
3.12 Parameters: WDM Interface
In this window, you can configure the WDM interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.1 Network Creation Procedure

You can refer to the following procedure to create a network.
Table 3-1 Configuration procedure

Phase Configuration Mode
Creating NEs Creating NEs in Batches/Creating a Single

NE.
Configuring Master/Slave Subrack Master/Slave Subrack Configuration.
Adding a Slave Subrack.
Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack
Deleting a Slave Subrack
Creating an NE User Creating an NE User.
Switching a Logged-In NE User Switching a Logged-In NE User.
Configuring Boards Adding Boards.
Checking Board Parameters.
Creating Fibers Creating Fibers.
Configuring NE Clock Sources Adding Clock Sources.
Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an

NE.
Configuring Orderwire Setting the Orderwire Board.
Configuring Orderwire.
Configuring Express Orderwire.
Dividing Orderwire Subnets.
Configuring the NE Time Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web

LCT Server Automatically/Synchronizing
the NE Time with the Web LCT Server
Manually.
3.2 Creating NEs

Each actual OptiX series equipment is represented as an NE on the Web LCT. Before the Web
LCT manages the actual equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the Web LCT.
There are two ways of creating NEs: creating a single NE (including a single subrack) and
creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large number of NEs, for example, during
deployment, it is recommended to create NEs in batches. When you need to create just a few

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NEs, it is recommended to create the NEs one by one. In special situations, for example, when
the communication between the Web LCT and the NE is interrupted, you can only choose the
mode of creating a single NE.
3.2.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the Web LCT communicates with the GNE properly, you can create NEs in batches by
searching for all NEs that communicate with the GNE, through the IP address of the GNE or
the network segment the IP address is associated to. This method is quicker and more accurate
than manual creation.
3.2.2 Creating a Single NE
Creating NEs one by one is not as quick and precise as the batch creation. However, creating
NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs
that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create
them one by one.
3.2.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the Web LCT communicates with the GNE properly, you can create NEs in batches by
searching for all NEs that communicate with the GNE, through the IP address of the GNE or
the network segment the IP address is associated to. This method is quicker and more accurate
than manual creation.
Prerequisite
Only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.
Procedure
Step 1 Click NE Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Add, and the New Domain dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE
You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.
Step 6 Click Cancel to close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
Step 7 Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment.
l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
Step 8 After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt message
is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added.
Step 9 Click OK.
----End
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
3.2.2 Creating a Single NE

Creating NEs one by one is not as quick and precise as the batch creation. However, creating
NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs
that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE search function and you must create
them one by one.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Add NE in the NE list.
The Add NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter an NE ID and an Extended ID.
Step 3 Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.
l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Enter the User Name and the Password.

The default user name is lct and the default password is password.
Step 5 Click OK.

One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally and is in the Logged
In state.
----End
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The communication between the Web LCT and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of
communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
3.3 Configuring Master/Slave Shelf

The OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 support the management of master/slave shelves.
When multiple shelves are required for an NE, the master/slave shelf mode must be adopted for
centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the Web
LCT.
3.3.1 Master/Slave Shelf Configuration

In the master/slave shelf mode, the master shelf and its multiple slave shelves are displayed as
one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.
3.3.2 Adding a Slave Shelf
After slave shelves are added, multiple slave shelves can communicate with the Web LCT
through a master shelf. Thus, the service grooming capability of the equipment is enhanced.
After a single NE is created manually, logic slave subracks must be added.
3.3.3 Changing a Shelf Name
You can set the attributes of the master or slave shelf to change the name of the master or slave
shelf.
3.3.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Shelf
This section describes how to query the status of a slave shelf. The status includes Physical
Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.3.5 Deleting a Slave Shelf

The slave shelf that need not be managed by the Web LCT can be deleted.
3.3.1 Master/Slave Shelf Configuration

In the master/slave shelf mode, the master shelf and its multiple slave shelves are displayed as
one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.
Generally, the shelf where the optical amplifier board, optical supervisory channel (OSC) board,
and fiber interface unit (FIU) exist is selected as the master shelf.
3.3.2 Adding a Slave Shelf

After slave shelves are added, multiple slave shelves can communicate with the Web LCT
through a master shelf. Thus, the service grooming capability of the equipment is enhanced.
After a single NE is created manually, logic slave subracks must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the upper side of the right pane and choose Add Slave Shelf from the shortcut
menu. The Add Slave Shelf dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the Add Slave Shelf dialog box, set parameters and then click OK.
Step 3 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
NOTE
After the slave subrack is added, the system automatically configures the system boards, such as the AUX,
SCC, PIU, EFI, and FAN.
----End
3.3.3 Changing a Shelf Name

You can set the attributes of the master or slave shelf to change the name of the master or slave
shelf.
Prerequisite
The master or slave shelf has been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the required master or slave shelf from the upper side of the slot layout in the right pane.
Right-click the shelf and then choose Modify Shelf Attribute from the shortcut menu to display
the Modify Shelf Attribute dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Change the Shelf name and click OK.
----End
3.3.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Shelf

This section describes how to query the status of a slave shelf. The status includes Physical
Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.
Prerequisite
The master or slave shelf has been created.
Procedure
Step 1 Click to refresh the state of the . On the , you can query the status of the slave shelf and
compare the status with the legends.
Step 2 Optional: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the shelf.
----End
3.3.5 Deleting a Slave Shelf

The slave shelf that need not be managed by the Web LCT can be deleted.
Prerequisite
All boards that are manually created on the slave shelf are deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the required slave shelf from the upper side of the slot layout in the right pane. Right-
click the shelf and then choose Delete the Shelf from the shortcut menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

NOTE
l When the slave subrack is deleted, the system automatically deletes the system boards, such as the
AUX, SCC, PIU, EFI, and FAN.
l If you need to re-add the deleted slave subrack, you must manually delete and then add the SCC board
to ensure that the SCC board normally reports alarms.
----End
3.4 Creating an NE User

To ensure NE data security, only the users with NE user authority can log in to the NEs. An NE
user is able to perform operations on the NEs according to the assigned authority. The Web
LCT administrator is advised to create NE users before configuring services.
Context
The default NE user has the monitor level authority. To ensure NE data security, it is
recommended that you assign NE users with different authorities as required.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create and the Add NE User dialog box is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Enter the NE user name in the NE User field.

NOTE
The NE user name must contain letters, or it can be a combination of letters, symbols and numerals. The
NE user name contains at least 4, but not more than 16 characters.
Step 4 Select the User Level as needed.
Step 5 Enter the password in the New Password field and enter it again in the Confirm Password
field.
NOTE
You also need to set the Whether the password is allowed to be modified immediately parameter.
The password is a string of 6-16 characters. It can consist of letters, symbols and numerals, and must contain
at least one letter and one numeral.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. All created users
of the NE are displayed in NE User Management Table.
Step 8 In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Security Management > NE Login
Management from the Main Menu.
Step 9 Step 11 In the NE list on the left, select an NE and click .
Step 10 Click Switch NE User, and the Switch Current NE User dialog box is displayed.
Step 11 Enter the user name that is created in the User field and the password in the Password field.
Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Step 12 Repeat Step 8 through Step 11to switch back to the original NE user.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.5 Switching a Logged-In NE User

During a new deployment, after the lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create another NE
user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
Prerequisite
The NE user must be created.
Background Information
An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an NE user to log
in to an NE through a Web LCT server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the same NE
through another Web LCT server, the NE user is forced to log out from the first Web LCT server.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE status
becomes Not Logged In.
Step 2 Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Enter the User Name and the Password.
Step 4 Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.
----End
3.6 Configuring Boards

In the , you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
3.6.1 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the Slot Layout. You can
either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do
not exist on the actual equipment.
3.6.2 Checking Board Parameters
You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you
configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of
board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements.
3.6.1 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the Slot Layout. You can
either add the physical boards that actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do
not exist on the actual equipment.
Prerequisite
l The NE must be created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l There must be idle slot on the Slot Layout.
Context
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the shelf. A logical board refers to a board
that is created on the Web LCT. After a logical board is created, you can configure the relevant
services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can be available.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.
Step 2 Select the shelf, right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the list.
NOTE
Click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured, and the system
automatically creates corresponding logical boards.
----End
3.6.2 Checking Board Parameters

You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you
configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of
board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check the relevant board parameters.
1. Check the parameters for an optical transponder or Ethernet unit. Table 3-2 lists the
parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.
Table 3-2 List of parameters for an optical transponder and Ethernet unit
Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario
Laser Status a. In the NE Explorer, You can turn on or shut

select the corresponding down a laser by setting the
board. laser status.
b. Choose Configuration
> WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
c. Click By Board/Port
(Channel) and choose
Channel from the drop-
down list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Automatic Laser Shutdown a. In the NE Explorer, When no light is input, a

select the corresponding laser is automatically shut
board. down and stops
b. Choose Configuration transmitting optical signals.
> WDM Interface from The laser life can be
the Function Tree. prolonged by decreasing
the working time of the
c. Click By Board/Port laser. In addition, this
(Channel) and choose function prevents
Channel from the drop- hazardous laser radiation
down list. exposure from causing
d. Click the Basic permanent eye damage.
Attributes tab.
Actual Wavelength N0./ a. In the NE Explorer, Used to query the operating

Wavelength (nm)/ select the corresponding wavelength at the WDM-
Frequency (THz) board. side optical interface of a
b. Choose Configuration board.
the Function Tree.
down list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
Configure Wavelength a. In the NE Explorer, Used to set the wavelength

N0./Wavelength (nm)/ select the corresponding No, wavelength and
Frequency (THz) board. frequency of the current
b. Choose Configuration optical interface on the
> WDM Interface from WDM side of a board.
the Function Tree.
down list.
d. Click the Advanced
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
LPT Enabled a. In the NE Explorer, You can add the overhead

select the corresponding byte that supports the LPT
board. protocol to the frame
b. Choose Configuration format of a WDM-side
> WDM Interface from signal, to monitor the
the Function Tree. running status of the
network access point or the
c. Click By Board/Port service network.
down list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
NULL Mapping Status a. In the NE Explorer, You can set NULL

select the corresponding Mapping Status to
board. Enabled for a path that has
b. Choose Configuration no signal, and check or
> WDM Interface from view OTN overhead by
the Function Tree. using an instrument, to
monitor the status of paths
c. Click By Board/Port in a network.
down list.
d. Click the Advanced
Attributes tab.
OFC Enabled a. In the NE Explorer, The OFC function is used to

select the corresponding control the transmit optical
board. power of a laser when a
b. Choose Configuration fiber is cut, and check
> WDM Interface from whether the fiber recovers
the Function Tree. by sending a short laser
pulse.
down list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
TAG a. In the NE Explorer, Set the port type of the

select the corresponding internal port on an Ethernet
board. board on an NE based on
b. Choose Configuration the tag attribute of packets
> Ethernet Interface that are transmitted by the
Management > user-side equipment.
Ethernet Interface
from the Function Tree.
c. Select Internal Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Network Attribute a. In the NE Explorer, l If the port is of the UNI

select the corresponding type, the port processes
board. the tag attributes
b. Choose Configuration specified in 802.1Q and
> Ethernet Interface the port has the tag,
Management > access and hybrid
Ethernet Interface attributes.
from the Function Tree. l If the port is of the C-
c. Select Internal Port. Aware type, the port
does not process the tag
attributes in 802.1Q. The
port determines that the
data packet carries a C-
VLAN tag and processes
only the data packet that
has the C-VLAN tag.
l If the port is of the S-
Aware type, the port
attributes specified in
802.1Q. The port
determines that the data
packet carries a S-
has the S-VLAN tag.
Port Enabled a. In the NE Explorer, When you configure a

select the corresponding service for the port on an
board. Ethernet board, enable the
b. Choose Configuration external port (that is, PORT
> Ethernet Interface port).
Management >
Ethernet Interface
c. Select External Port.
Working Mode a. In the NE Explorer, Set the transmit end and

select the corresponding receive end to have the
board. same setting of working
b. Choose Configuration mode.
> Ethernet Interface
Management >
Ethernet Interface

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MAC/PHY LoopBack a. In the NE Explorer, MAC loopback and PHY

select the corresponding loopback are used to locate
board. a fault, but they can
b. Choose Configuration interrupt services. In
> Ethernet Interface addition, they are mutually
Management > exclusive. When you set
Ethernet Interface MAC LoopBack to
from the Function Tree. Inloop, PHY LoopBack is
automatically set to Non-
c. Select External Port. Loopback. When you set
PHY LoopBack to Inloop,
MAC LoopBack is
automatically set to Non-
Loopback.
Autonegotiation Flow a. In the NE Explorer, When the Working Mode

Control Mode select the corresponding of the port is Auto-
board. Negotiation, select the
b. Choose Configuration autonegotiation flow
> Ethernet Interface control mode.
Management >
Ethernet Interface
Click the Flow Control
tab.
Non-Autonegotiation Flow a. In the NE Explorer, When the Working Mode

Control Mode select the corresponding of the port is not Auto-
board. Negotiation, select the
b. Choose Configuration non-autonegotiation flow
> Ethernet Interface control mode.
Management >
Ethernet Interface
Click the Flow Control
tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TAG a. In the NE Explorer, Set the port type of the

select the corresponding external port on an Ethernet
board. board on an NE based on
b. Choose Configuration the tag attribute of packets
> Ethernet Interface that are transmitted by the
Management > user-side equipment.
Ethernet Interface
Click the TAG
Attributes tab.
Network Attribute a. In the NE Explorer, The Port Attribute

select the corresponding (Ethernet Port) parameter
board. specifies the position of a
b. Choose Configuration port in the network.
> Ethernet Interface Different port attributes
Management > support different packets.
Ethernet Interface
2. Check the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 3-3 lists the parameters for
the tributary unit and the line unit.
Table 3-3 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit

Automatic Laser Shutdown When no light is input, a
laser is automatically shut
the Function Tree.
down and stops
c. Click By Board/Port transmitting optical signals.
(Channel) and choose The laser life can be
Channel from the drop- prolonged by decreasing
down menu. the on time of the laser. In
addition, this function
prevents hazardous laser
radiation exposure from
causing permanent eye
damage.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
LPT Enabled You can add the overhead

byte that supports the LPT
protocol to the frame
format of a WDM-side
signal, to monitor the
running status of the
network access point or the
service network.
NULL Mapping Status You can set NULL

Mapping Status to
Enabled for a path that has
no signal, and check or
view OTN overhead by
using an instrument, to
monitor the status of paths
in a network.
OFC Enabled The OFC function is used to

control the transmit optical
power of a laser when a
fiber is cut, and check
whether the fiber recovers
by sending a short laser
pulse.
Enabled/Disabled a. In the NE Explorer, When you configure a

select the corresponding service for the port on an
board. Ethernet board, enable the
b. Choose Configuration port.
TAG > Ethernet Interface Set the port type of the

Management > internal port on an Ethernet
Ethernet Interface board on an NE based on
from the Function Tree. the tag attribute of packets
c. Select External Port or that are transmitted by the
Internal Port. user-side equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Network Attribute l If a port is of the UNI

type, the port processes
the tag attributes
specified in 802.1Q and
the port has the tag
aware, access and hybrid
attributes.
l If the port is of the C-
802.1Q. The port
packet carries a C-
has the C-VLAN tag.
l If the port is of the S-
802.1Q. The port
packet carries an S-
has the S-VLAN tag.
Entry Detection Entry detection identifies

the tag of data packets.
When you configure a
VLAN, you can set the
Entry Detection parameter
of a service to Enabled.
Enabling Broadcast Packet Broadcast packet

Suppressing suppression functions
according to the ratio of
broadcast packets to all
packets. The value is 110 in
increments of 1.
Working Mode Set the transmit end and

receive end to have the
same setting of working
mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Path Binding a. In the NE Explorer, Configure path binding to

select the corresponding realize inverse
board. multiplexing of client-side
b. Choose Configuration signals. The higher order
> Ethernet Interface signals that are accessed on
Management > the client side are inversely
Ethernet Interface multiplexed into several
from the Function Tree. lower order signals, to
decrease the bandwidth of
c. Select Internal Port. an optical interface.
Click Bound Path tab.
3. Check the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 3-4 lists the parameters for the
optical amplifying unit.
Table 3-4 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit


the Function Tree.
down menu.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
4. Check the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 3-5 lists the parameters for the
spectrum analyzer unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 3-5 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit
Wavelength Monitor Status a. In the NE Explorer, Enable wavelength

select the corresponding monitoring.
board.
the Function Tree.
Monitor Wavelength
from the drop-down
menu.
5. Check the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 3-6 lists the parameters
for the optical supervisory channel unit.
Table 3-6 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit

the Function Tree.
down menu.
6. Check the parameters for SDH units. Table 3-7 lists the parameters for the SDH units.
Table 3-7 List of parameters for SDH unit
Laser Switch a. In the NE Explorer, You can open or close a

select the corresponding laser by setting the laser
board. switch.
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
Port from the drop-
down menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Optical (Electrical) a. In the NE Explorer, Sets loopback according to

Interface Loopback select the corresponding the path.
board.
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
Port from the drop-
down menu.
Automatic Laser Shutdown a. In the NE Explorer, When no light is input, a

select the corresponding laser is automatically shut
board. down and stops
b. Choose Configuration transmitting optical signals.
from the Function Tree. The laser life can be
prolonged by decreasing
the on time of the laser. In
addition, this function
prevents hazardous laser
radiation exposure from
causing permanent eye
damage.
VC4 Path Overhead a. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the corresponding overhead bytes of the VC4
board. path, including J1 and C2.
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.
VC3 Path Overhead a. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the corresponding overhead bytes of the VC3
board. path, including J1 and C2.
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.
PRBS Test a. In the NE Explorer, You can set PRBS test of

select the corresponding the interfaces on the board,
board. and perform the bit error
b. Choose Configuration test of the transmission link
from the Function Tree. without attaching a meter to
the equipment during the
deployment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If you select an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing board, a static optical add/drop multiplexing board, a
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator
board, you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or set
parameters.
Step 2 Change the board parameters based on service planning and actual board configuration. For
instructions on how to change board parameters, see 12.2.2 Modifying Board Parameters.
----End
3.7 Creating Fibers

You must create fibers on a per-NE basis before you configure services.
Prerequisite
The required board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE. Choose Configuration > Fiber Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to view the created fibers.
Step 3 Click New, and the Create Fiber dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select the source and sink ports for the fiber.
Step 5 Click OK. The fiber is displayed in the list.
----End
3.8 Configuring NE Clock Sources

The time source for a WDM NE is determined by the clock used by the SCC board. To
synchronize networkwide clocks, you need to modify the clock used by the SCC board according
to the specific network configuration. The selection of clock sources determines the directions
and termination points for networkwide clock synchronization.
3.8.1 Adding Clock Sources

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, you can add clock sources to provide
different reference clocks. You can select different clock sources to decide the direction of clock
synchronization in the network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.8.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, clock sources are arranged in a descending
order according to their priorities. The clock source with the highest priority is chosen for
synchronization. You can set clock source priorities to adjust the direction of clock
3.8.1 Adding Clock Sources

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, you can add clock sources to provide
different reference clocks. You can select different clock sources to decide the direction of clock
Prerequisite
Applies to the SCC board.
The NE must be configured with the OSC board.
The equipment does not allows you to set the clock source priority of an NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.
NOTE
Clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.
Step 3 Click New, or in the clock source list, right-click and choose Add Clock Source from the
shortcut menu. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 In the Add Clock Source dialog box, select a clock source and click OK. The selected clock
source appears in the clock source list.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
3.8.2 Setting the Clock Source Priority Table for an NE

When configuring the clock used by the SCC board, clock sources are arranged in a descending
order according to their priorities. The clock source with the highest priority is chosen for
synchronization. You can set clock source priorities to adjust the direction of clock

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Applies to the SCC board.
The NE must be configured with the OSC board.
The equipment does not allows you to set the clock source priority of an NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC board and choose Configuration > Clock Priority from the
Function Tree.
NOTE
The clock sources are arranged in a descending order according to their priorities.
Step 2 Click Query to query clock source priorities.
Step 3 Select a clock source, and click or to adjust the clock source priority.
NOTE
The priority of the internal clock source is the lowest and cannot be adjusted.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query to display the current clock source priority of the NE.
----End
3.9 Configuring Orderwire

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the Web LCT.
3.9.1 Setting the Orderwire Board
Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.
3.9.2 Configuring Orderwire
To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
3.9.3 Configuring Conference Calls

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent
voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
3.9.4 Configuring Express Orderwire
In the case of two NEs without a fiber connection, you can configure the express orderwire to
provide the maintenance personnel with an express orderwire channel between the NEs.
3.9.5 Dividing Orderwire Subnets
When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are
configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference
calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
3.9.1 Setting the Orderwire Board

Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.
Prerequisite
l The NE must be the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 or the OptiX OSN 3800.
l The SC1 or SC2 boards must be created.
l For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the SC1 or SC2 boards on the main
subrack supports the orderwire function.
The orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the Orderwire Board Settings tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query the NE-side information.
Step 3 Select a board from the Available Boards pane in the Orderwire Board Settings group box
and click .
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.9.2 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the General tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.
Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.
NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.
When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.
l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is
eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length
must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to 3.9.5 Dividing Orderwire
Subnets.
l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query to confirm that the parameter values are the same as the ones set previously.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.9.3 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent
voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
Procedure
Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.
Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a
conference call, and click .
NOTE
If the optical interfaces that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing
loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.
Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE
The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwire
phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommended
to be 9999.
Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
----End
3.9.4 Configuring Express Orderwire

In the case of two NEs without a fiber connection, you can configure the express orderwire to
provide the maintenance personnel with an express orderwire channel between the NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The SCC board must be created.
Two NEs must be connected through serial ports or by a telephone line.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the Auxiliary tab.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In the dialog box,
the value of SDH NNI Connection is the same as the value that is set.
----End
3.9.5 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are
configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference
calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l Conference calls must be configured.
Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one
or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call
number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For
example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference
call number of the subnet 1 is 199.
The optical interfaces with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
The different optical interfaces on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence,
an NE can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.
Procedure
Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.
NOTE
When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range
of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is
in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Click the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface tab.

Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and enter
a subnet number.
NOTE
The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter values
of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
3.10 Configuring the NE Time

Time consistency between the Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshooting and
network monitoring. You should set the Web LCT time and NE time before service
configuration.
3.10.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the Web LCT and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the
Web LCT server time. In this way, the Web LCT is able to record the correct time at which
alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
3.10.2 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web LCT Server Automatically
The NE time can be automatically synchronized with the Web LCT server time. In this way, the
time of alarms and logs can be correctly recorded in the Web LCT.
3.10.3 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web LCT Server Manually
In the case of NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, you need to check whether the
NE time is consistent with the Web LCT server time, so that the Web LCT can correctly record
the time of alarm generation. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the
Web LCT server.
3.10.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the Web LCT and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the
Web LCT server time. In this way, the Web LCT is able to record the correct time at which
alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the Web LCT, the time at which such alarms
and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with
regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the Web LCT. This may cause trouble in fault
location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the Web LCT provides one time
synchronization scheme: synchronizing with the Web LCT server.
In this scheme, all NEs use the Web LCT server time as the standard time. The NE time can be
synchronized with the Web LCT server time manually or automatically. The Web LCT server
time refers to the time of the computer system where the Web LCT server resides. This scheme
features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard
to time.
3.10.2 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web LCT Server

Automatically
The NE time can be automatically synchronized with the Web LCT server time. In this way, the
time of alarms and logs can be correctly recorded in the Web LCT.
Prerequisite
The NTP service should not be configured for the Web LCT and NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the Synchronous Mode to NM and click Apply.
Step 3 Set the Synchronization Starting Time and Synchronization Period (days) in the lower pane.
Click Apply.
NOTE
The Synchronization Starting Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
Step 4 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
----End
3.10.3 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Web LCT Server

Manually
In the case of NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, you need to check whether the
NE time is consistent with the Web LCT server time, so that the Web LCT can correctly record
the time of alarm generation. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the
Web LCT server.
Prerequisite
The synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify
that the system time on the Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the system time,
exit the Web LCT to reset the time and then start the Web LCT again.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Right-click the NE in the table and choose Synchronize with NM Time from the shortcut menu.
----End
3.11 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.
3.11.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis
The laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters such
as optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the optical
paths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current optical
signal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the optical
signal.
3.11.2 Parameters: Orderwire Board Settings
In this user interface, you can set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The setting
options contain orderwire board settings.
3.11.3 Parameters: General
In this user interface, you can set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can set
call waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, orderwire phone number, and orderwire
phone port.
3.11.4 Parameters: Conference Call
In this user interface, you can query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query and
set conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.
3.11.5 Parameters: Auxiliary
In this user interface, you can query and set auxiliary parameters.
3.11.6 Parameters: Attributes of NEs
In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and
IP address.
3.11.7 Parameters: Attributes of NE Users
In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete
and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.
3.11.8 Parameters: NE Time Synchronization
In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the Web LCT server
time.
3.11.9 Parameters: Path Binding
In this user interface, you can configure or query the path binding.
3.11.1 Parameters: Laser Spectrum Analysis

The laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters such
as optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the optical
paths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current optical

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
signal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the optical
signal.
Parameters
Field Value Description
Port Number For example: 1(IN1) Displays the port number of

each path of the spectrum
analysis board.
For MCA4, there are four
ports. For MCA8, there are
eight ports.
Compensation Power (dBm) Range: -10 to +30. For Due to the factors such as the
example: 20 coupling ratio and optical
board attenuation of the
spectrum analysis board, the
optical power value of each
path after analysis has a fixed
deviation from the actual
value. You can set this field
to keep consistency between
the analysis value and the
actual one.
Spectrum Data Wavelength No, Standard Displays the result of the

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency optical performance data
(THz), Central Wavelength after spectrum analysis.
(nm)/Frequency (THz), Wavelength No: indicates the
Wavelength Deviation (nm), wavelength No. of each
Optical Power (dBm), OSNR optical path.
(dB)
Standard Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz): indicates
the standard central
wavelength of the optical
path.
Central Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz): indicates
the actual central wavelength
of the optical path.
Wavelength Deviation (nm):
deviation between the
standard wavelength and the
actual wavelength.
Optical Power (dBm): the
optical power of the optical
path.
OSNR(dB): the optical signal
noise ratio of the optical path.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Spectrum Waveform None Displays spectrum data in

graphics.
Profile None Displays the spectrum profile

of the optical signal.
X-Axis Frequency Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis for

the Spectrum Data,
Spectrum Waveform, and
Profile represents the
frequency.
X-Axis Wavelength Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis for

the Spectrum Data,
Spectrum Waveform, and
Profile represents the
wavelength.
3.11.2 Parameters: Orderwire Board Settings

In this user interface, you can set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The setting
options contain orderwire board settings.
Parameters
Orderwire Board Available For example: The boards that can be set as the
Settings Boards SC1 orderwire board.
Selected Board For example: The board that is selected as the

SC1 orderwire board.
Settings for the Available For example: The boards that can be set as the first
First Orderwire Boards SC1 orderwire board.
Phone
Selected Board For example: The board that is selected as the first
SC1 orderwire board.
3.11.3 Parameters: General

In this user interface, you can set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can set
call waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, orderwire phone number, and orderwire
phone port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Call Waiting Time(s) 1-9 The Call Waiting Time(s)

Default: 9 parameter specifies the
timeout period of searching an
orderwire route. If the period
of searching an orderwire
route exceeds the specified
value, the orderwire phone
changes to the busy tone
status.
Dialing Mode Pulse, Dual-Tone Frequency Displays the orderwire dialing

Default: Dual-Tone mode.
Frequency
Conference Call 100-99999999 The Conference Call

Default: 999 parameter specifies the phone
numbers of networkwide
orderwire calls.
Phone 1, Phone 2, Phone 3 100-99999999 The Phone parameter

specifies the phone numbers
of orderwire addressing calls.
An addressing call refers to a
point-to-point call.
The overhead supports a
maximum of 3-channel
orderwire phone number. As
some of the equipments
support Phone1 only, Phone2
and Phone3 are not available.
When the value is null, after
the configuration is delivered,
the corresponding data on
NEs remains unchanged
instead of being cleared.
Selected Orderwire Port For example: 12-SC2-1 Selects the line board port for
orderwire transmission.
Available Orderwire Port Available Orderwire Port The Available Orderwire

Default: Bid-BidType-PortID Port parameter specifies
whether the optical interface
is used to make orderwire
calls.
3.11.4 Parameters: Conference Call

In this user interface, you can query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query and
set conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Conference Call Authorities Able to Listen and Speak, Displays or sets the
Able to Listen but not Speak conference call authorities.
Default: Able to Listen and NOTE
Speak
l Able to Listen and Speak:
The user of the conference
call can either hear the
voices from other phones in
the networkwide conference
call or let other phone users
hear his own voice.
l Able to Listen but not
Speak: The user of the
conference call can only
hear the voices from other
phones in the networkwide
conference call but cannot
let other phone users hear his
own voice.
Selected Conference Call For example: 12-SC2-1 The optical ports in this list
Port are used for conference call.
Available Conference Call Available Orderwire Port The Available Conference

Port Default: Bid-BidType- Call Port parameter
PortID specifies whether the optical
interface is used to make
conference calls.
3.11.5 Parameters: Auxiliary

In this user interface, you can query and set auxiliary parameters.
Parameters
Subnet No. Length 1, 2 The Subnet No. Length

Default: 1 parameter specifies the
length of the subnet number
of the orderwire subnets if the
entire network is divided into
multiple orderwire subnets.
First Communication Port RS232, RS422 Selects the first data

communication port for SDH
NNI connection to achieve
the communication with the
opposite end of the SDH NNI
orderwire.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
First Phone Port F1 port, Phone2, Phone3 Selects the first phone port
for the SDH NNI orderwire.
3.11.6 Parameters: Attributes of NEs

In this user interface, you can view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and
IP address.
Parameters
NE ID For example: 1 Displays the unique ID of an

NE on the NM for identifying
an NE, which is the basis of
communication between the
NM and an NE.
Extended ID 1 to 254 For NE ID extension.

Default: 9
Subrack Type Standard Subrack Displays the subrack type of

Shelf Type an NE.
Gateway Type IP Gateway, Serial Port The gateway type of an NE

decides the mode of
communication between the
NE and the NM.
3.11.7 Parameters: Attributes of NE Users

In this user interface, you can manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete
and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.
Parameters
Table 3-8 NE user parameters

NE For example: NE70 The operation object

selected.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE User For example: USER The name of the NE user. The

name consists of 4-16
characters. It can be a
combination of letters, digits,
spaces and underlines. Note
that at least one letter must be
included.
User Level Monitor level, Operation The operations carried out by

level, Maintenance level, the NE user are classified into
System level, Debug level. five levels, namely monitor
level, operation level,
maintenance level, system
level, debug level from the
lowest level to the highest.
Each user of higher level can
perform all the functions that
a lower level user can do. The
detailed right settings for
each level are:
l Monitor level: all query
commands, log in/out, and
modification of its own
password.
l Operation level: all
settings for fault and
performance, partial
security settings, and
partial configuration.
l Maintenance level: partial
security settings, partial
configuration,
communication settings,
and log management.
l System level: all security
settings, all configuration.
l Debug level: all security
settings, all configuration,
and all debug commands.
Debug level is the highest
level.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE User Flag LCT NE User, EMS NE Different NM systems log in

User, CMD NE User, to the NE using different NE
General NE User users.
LCT NE User: The LCT is
the local craft terminal of the
Web LCT. This user is the
one that the LCT uses for
managing the NE.
EMS NE User: The EMS is
the Web LCT. This user is the
one that the Web LCT uses
for managing the NE.
CMD NE User: CMD is the
command line NMS. This
user is the one that is used for
managing the NE by
command line.
General NE User: NE user
without partition NM.
New Password - New password of the user.

The password consists of
6-16 characters. It can be a
combination of English
characters, digits, space and
underlines. Note that the
password cannot be
composed all by digits or all
by letters. It cannot contain
special characters.
Confirm Password - The new password of the user

that you need to enter again.
User Group Belonged For example: Administrator Displays the belonged user
User Group group name.
Login Allowed Yes, No Sets whether the NE user is

allowed to log in.
Permanently Valid or not Yes, No Sets whether the NE user is

permanently valid or not.
Valid From For example: 2005-05-07 The start time of user

10:18:07 validity.
Valid Till For example: 2005-05-07 The expiration time of user

10:18:07 validity.
Whether the password is Yes, No Sets whether the password is

allowed to be modified allowed to be modified
immediately immediately.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Records of all Logins Yes, No Sets whether the NE user is

valid permanently.
Allowable Login Start Date For example: Sunday Sets the allowable login start
date. The parameter is valid
when Records of all Logins
is set to No.
Allowable Login Start Time For example: 00:00:00 Time format is hour: min:
second.
Sets the allowable login start
time. The parameter is valid
is set to No.
Allowable Login End Date For example: Saturday Sets the allowable login end
is set to No.
Allowable Login End Time For example: 23:59:59 Time format is hour: min:
second.
Sets the allowable login end
is set to No.
Time to Lock User for No 0-255 Sets the time to lock the NE
Activities (Day) user for no activities.
Maximum Password 25-999 Sets the maximum password

Validity (Day) validity.
Password Modification Time For example: 2007-01-23 Displays the password

10:28:26 modification time.
Last Login Time For example: 2007-01-23 Displays the last login time of
10:28:00 the NE user.
3.11.8 Parameters: NE Time Synchronization

In this user interface, you can set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the Web LCT server
time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
NM Time For example: Displays the time of the

2006-11-04 20:30:00 Web LCT server in real
time.
NE Name For example: NE1 Displays the name of the

NE.
NE ID Format: Extended ID-ID Displays the ID of the

NE.
Synchronous Mode NM, NULL Displays the

synchronization mode of
NE Time.
Standard NTP Authentication Enabled, Disabled Displays or sets whether

the standard NTP
authentication is
enabled.
Server Enabled ECC Server, Disabled Displays or sets whether

to set it to the NTP server
and the type of the NTP
server.
When the ECC protocol
is used for
communication between
NEs, the gateway NE is
an ECC server. So, the
Server Enabled
parameter is set to ECC
Server. While non-
gateway NEs are ECC
clients and the Server
Enabled parameter is set
to Disabled.
When the IP protocol is
used for communication
between NEs, all NEs
are IP clients and the
Server Enabled
parameter is set to
Disabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Client Enabled ECC Client, IP Client, Displays or sets whether

Disabled to set it to the NTP client
and the type of the NTP
client.
When the IP protocol is
used for communication
between the NE and the
NTP server, the NE is an
IP client and the Client
Enabled parameter are
set to IP Client.
Synchronous Server NE ID, IP address Displays or sets the IP

address or NE ID of the
NTP synchronous
server.
If the client type is ECC
Client, set it to the NE ID
of the synchronous
server.
If the client type is IP
Client, set it to the IP
address of the
synchronous server.
Polling Period(min) 2 to 1440 Minutes Displays the period of

synchronizing the NE
time with the NTP server
time.
The Number of Sampling 1 to 8 It indicates how many

times the NTP server
time will be sampled in a
querying cycle. The NTP
server time is the average
of that sampled.
NE Current Time For example: Displays the current time

2006-11-04 20:30:00 of the NE.
Daylight Saving Time Yes, No Displays whether to save

the time in the daytime or
not.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Recent NE Synchronization Time For example: The latest time when the
2006-11-04 20:30:00 NE was synchronized.
If the difference between
the current NE time and
the latest time when the
NE was synchronized is
within two querying
cycles, it indicates the
NTP server is running
normally. Otherwise, it
indicates the NTP server
is not running normally,
and the color of the
parameter box will
change to the one that is
for "Major Alarm".
Synchronization Synchronizati For example: Sets the start time of

Starting Time on Starting 2006-11-04 20:30:00 synchronizing the NE
Time time with the NM time.
Applied only when the
NE time is synchronized
with the NM time.
Synchronizati 1 to 300 Sets the cycle of

on Period Default: 1 automatically
(days) synchronizing the NE
time with the NM time.
Applied only when the
NE time is synchronized
with the NM time.
3.11.9 Parameters: Path Binding

In this user interface, you can configure or query the path binding.
Parameters
Port For example, NE832-12- Displays available optical

TDX-151(IMP1/IMP1) interfaces.
Direction Uplink, Downlink Displays the sink of Ethernet

services.
Path Binding ODU1 (1, 2, 3, 4) Displays the bound paths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Binding Path Count 1, 2, 3, 4 Displays the number of

bound paths.
Slot ID For example, 12-TDX Displays the board that

realizes path binding.
Port ID For example, 151(IMP1/ Displays ports available for

IMP1) the board.
Available Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays available paths.
Selected Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays the selected paths.
NOTE
The bound path ODU1-1 is
required.
3.12 Parameters: WDM Interface

In this window, you can configure the WDM interface.
On the right side of the WDM interface, there are four domains from the top down:
l The first field provides two option buttons (By Board/Port (Channel) and By Function)
that are used to select the attribute classification mode.
l The second field specifies the object that needs to be set after the classification, which
varies with the first field.
l The third field specifies attributes, which vary with the second field. Double-click or select
to set attributes (for attribute description, refer to the parameter descriptions of different
boards).
l The last field provides two buttons at the bottom: Query and Apply. Before setting, you
can click Query to query the board attribute from the NE and after setting you need to click
Apply to send the configurations.
3.12.1 Parameters:Optical Transponder Board
In this user interface, you can set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters are
laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use
status.
3.12.2 Parameters:Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board
In this user interface, you can set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, and
the parity of the working band.
3.12.3 Parameters:Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board
In this user interface, you can set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add and
drop multiplex boards.
3.12.4 Parameters:Tributary and Line Boards
In this user interface, you can set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laser
status, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.
3.12.5 Parameters:Optical Amplifier Board
In this user interface, you can set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3.12.6 Parameters:Optical Supervisory Channel Board

In this user interface, you can set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of an
optical port.
3.12.7 Parameters:Protection Board
In this user interface, you can set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laser
status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.
3.12.8 Parameters:Spectrum Analysis Board
In this user interface, you can set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. For
example, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.
3.12.9 Parameters:Variable Optical Attenuation Board
In this user interface, you can set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical ports
and path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, including
fixed band and the parity of working band.
3.12.10 Parameters:Dispersion Compensation Board
In this user interface, you can query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.
3.12.1 Parameters:Optical Transponder Board

In this user interface, you can set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters are
laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use
status.
Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- Slot Displays the position of this
No.- Board name- Optical optical interface.
interface number (Optical
interface name)
Optical Interface Name For example: RX1/TX1 Displays the default names.
Do not modify this field.
Channel Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the path
or not.
Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the port of the OTU board.
Loopback may interrupt
services and can be used only
for testing or
troubleshooting.
Service Type For example: GE Sets the service type of the

client side.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable the

OFC function.
This parameter can be edited
only when you set Service
Type of 13LQM or 12LOM
board to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping Displays the flow control

(11.1G), MAC Transparent mode of the mapped trail of
Mapping (10.7G), Bit the service that passes the
Transparent Mapping port.
(11.1G)
Client Service Bearer Rate The transmission rate of the Displays the range of client
(M) client-side service varies service rates that the
according to different OTU equipment can bear.
boards as follows:
l 100 to 2500 (applicable to
the LDMS, LDMD,
12LDM, 12LQMS,
12LQMD, 13LQM, and
TOM boards)
the 12LOM board)
other OTU boards)
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the status of a laser.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut down the
laser automatically or not. If
auto-shutdown is set, when
the received signal is lost, the
laser shuts down
automatically, so that the
laser service life is extended
and body injury is avoided.
Service Mode For example: OTN Selects the service mode of

the port.
Board Mode For example: ITL Mode A board-level attribute of

general configuration. You
can manage boards by
switching the mode.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPT

pass-through function of the
service.
FC Internal Working Mode Normal Mode, Special Mode Sets the FC internal working
mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Current Bearer Rate (M) For example: 50 Displays the rate of the client
service that is currently
accessed.
FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Sets whether the board

performs FEC processing on
data.
FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.
Non-Intrusive Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Sets the non-intrusive

Status monitoring status.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic 0s to 2s, the increments is Specifies the time between
Laser Shutdown 100ms the point when the system
Default: 0s detects an interruption of the
services and the point when
the ALS is started when the
ALS function is enabled.
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the actual working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength of the optical
(THz) port.
An actual wavelength is the
optical wavelength emitted
by a laser.
Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of the

actual working wavelength.
Configure Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength configured for
(THz) the optical port.
An configuration wavelength
is a logical wavelength.
During the optical cross-
connection configuration, if
temporarily no required
actual wavelength is
available, you can use the
logical wavelength to
configure the optical cross-
connection.
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Configures the band for the

working wavelength.
Maximum Packet Length 1518-9600 Sets the maximum packet

length of the data. Packets
that exceed this length are
discarded.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Ethernet Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Displays the working modes

Half-Duplex, 10M Full- of the Ethernet port. Auto-
Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, Negotiation can
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M automatically detect the
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full- optimized combination of
Duplex, working modes of the
opposite port. This mode is
easy to maintain and is
recommended.
Make sure that the working
modes of this port and the
opposite port are consistent.
If the port modes are
different, services are down.
OTN Overhead Transparent Disabled, Enabled Enables or disables the

Transmission function of OTN Overhead
Transparent Transmission.
SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, Sets the SD switching

ODUk_PM_DEG, condition.
ODUk_TCM1_DEG,
ODUk_TCM2_DEG,
ODUk_TCM3_DEG,
ODUk_TCM4_DEG,
ODUk_TCM5_DEG,
ODUk_TCM6_DEG
FC Distance Extension Enabled, Disabled Displays whether the FC

distance extension is
enabled.
NOTE
In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to
the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters
in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware
Description for each type of equipment.
3.12.2 Parameters:Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

In this user interface, you can set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, and
the parity of the working band.
Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1- Displays the position of this

M40-1(OUT) optical interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Optical Interface Name For example: OUT Displays default names. Do

not modify this field.
Optical Interface Attenuation For example: 20 Sets the actual attenuation

Rate (dB) ratio of the optical port.
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 40 Displays the maximum

attenuation ratio allowed.
When this ratio is exceeded,
the output optical power is
too low, causing the signal-
to-noise ratio of the receive
end to fall.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 0 Displays the minimum

attenuation ratio allowed.
When this ratio is exceeded,
the output optical power is
too high, causing the signal-
to-noise ratio of the receive
end to fall.
Actual Band C Displays the actual working

band of the multiplexing or
demultiplexing board.
Configure Band C Displays the working band

that you configure.
Threshold of Input Power -35.0 to -10.0 Input power that is smaller

Loss (dBm) than this value cannot be
determined.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of the
current working band of the
port. Currently only even
band is supported.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Configures the parity of the

Parity current working band of the
band is supported.
PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT 0.00 to 1.00 Sets PMD coefficient.

(km))
Chromatic Dispersion -15.00 to 30.00 Sets chromatic dispersion

Coefficient (ps/(nm*km)) coefficient.
Channel Number Mode C40 Mode, C80 Mode, Sets and queries the channel
CWDM Mode number mode for the
calculation of the resource
utilization.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
DCM Dispersion Send, Receive Set DCM dispersion

Compensation Direction compensation direction.
DCM Dispersion 1.0 to 6500.0 Set DCM dispersion

Compensation Value(ps/nm) compensation value.
NOTE
3.12.3 Parameters:Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board

In this user interface, you can set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add and
drop multiplex boards.
Parameters

CMR2-1(A1/D1) optical interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: A1/D1 Displays default names. Do

Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Queries the added/dropped

Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1529.56/196.00 wavelength of the board. It is
Frequency(THz) applicable to CMR2 and
CMR4.
Actual Band Type C, CWDM Queries the actual waveband

type.
Configure Wavelength No./ For example: Configures the added/

Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1529.56/196.00 dropped wavelength of the
Frequency(THz) board.
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Configures the waveband

type of the board.
Actual Working Band Parity Odd, Even, All Displays the parity of the
actual working band.
Configure Working Band Odd, Even, All Sets the parity of the working
Parity band.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
3.12.4 Parameters:Tributary and Line Boards

In this user interface, you can set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laser
status, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.
Parameters

NS2-1(IN/OUT)-2 optical interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names.
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the status of a laser.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut down

the laser automatically or
not. If auto-shutdown is set,
when the received signal is
lost, the laser will shut down
automatically, so that the
laser service life is extended
and body injury is avoided.
Service Type For example: STM-64 Sets the service type of the
client side.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPT

function for an EPL service.
Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the path
or not.
Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the port of the board.
FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Sets whether the board

performs FEC processing on
data.
FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.
Wavelength No./Optical For example: Working wavelength of the

Interface Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1560.61/192.10 optical port.
Frequency (THz)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Max. Packet Length 1518 to 65535 Sets the maximum packet

length of the data, and any
packet exceeding this length
will be discarded.
Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the path.
Optical Interface Status IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS- Displays the status of this
MA, OOS-AUMA, IS-NR, optical interface.
LPBK, OOS-AU, LPBK,
OOS-MA, LPBK, OOS-
AUMA, LPBK
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the actual working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength, wavelength
(Thz) number and frequency of a
port.

current working wavelength.
Configure Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength, wavelength
(THz) number and frequency of a
port that you configure.
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Set the band of the working

wavelength. If the board
supports the band that you
configure, the actual band
type is the same as the
configured band type.
OTN Overhead Transparent Enabled, Disabled Sets whether performs OTN

Transmission overhead transparent
transmission for the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Working Mode Autosensing, 10 Mbit/s half- Working modes of the

duplex, 10 Mbit/s full- Ethernet port. The
duplex, 100 Mbit/s half- autosensing mode is
duplex, 100 Mbit/s full- recommended, because it
duplex,1000 Mbit/s half- can automatically find out
duplex, 1000 Mbit/s full- the best working mode to
duplex0 combine a port and its
interconnected port and thus
is convenient for
maintenance. and thus is
convenient for maintenance.
The port and its
interconnected port must
have the same settings of
working mode. Otherwise,
this results in the failure of
services.
Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Sets the rate of the line-side
Mode port on the board.
SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, Sets SD trigger condition.

ODUk_PM_DEG
PMD Threshold(ps) For example: 50 Displays the PMD threshold

of the board.
OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable the

OFC function. This
parameter can be edited only
when you set Service Type
to ISC 1G or ISC 2G, and set
Automatic Laser
Shutdown and LPT
Enabled to Disabled.
3.12.5 Parameters:Optical Amplifier Board

In this user interface, you can set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.
Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- Slot Displays the position of this
No.- Board name- Optical optical interface.
interface number (Optical
interface name)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Optical Interface Name For example: IN1 Displays default names. Do

Optical Amplifier Gain (dB) 20 to 40 The gain of the optical

booster amplifier is the ratio
of output power to input
power.
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the on/off status of a

laser.
Optical Interface Attenuation 0 to 20 Set the attenuation ratio of

Ratio (dB) the optical port.
Gain (dB) For example: 20 Displays the actual gain of

the optical booster amplifier.
It is the ratio of output power
to input power.
Fixed Band C, CWDM The default is usually used.
Nominal Gain For example: 25 Sets the nominal gain of this

optical amplifier.
Threshold of Input Power -35.0 to -10.0 Sets the threshold of the input
Loss (dBm) optical power loss. When the
input optical power is below
this value, loss of input signal
is considered to occur.
Board Work Type C, L, C+L Queries and sets the board

work type.
Actual Band For example: C Displays the actual working

band.
Nominal Gain Upper For example: 35 Displays the upper threshold

Threshold (dB) of the nominal gain of the
optical amplifier unit.
Nominal Gain Lower For example: 10 Displays the lower threshold

Threshold (dB) of the nominal gain of the
Upper Threshold of Actual For example: 35 Displays the upper threshold

Gain (dB) of the actual gain of the
Lower Threshold of Actual For example: 10 Displays the lower threshold

Gain (dB) of the actual gain of the
Actual Working Band Parity Even Displays the parity of the

actual working band.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configure Working Band Even Sets the parity of the working

Parity band.
Rated Optical Power(dBm) -30.0 to 30.0 Sets the rated optical power
Default: of the input or output port of
an optical amplifier board.
l Input interface: -19
l Output interface: 4
Fixed Pump Optical Power 5.0 to 30.0 Displays the fixed pump
(dBm) optical power. The value is in
the range of Minimum Fixed
Pump Optical Power and
Maximum Fixed Pump
Optical Power.
Minimum Fixed Pump For example: 6.0 Displays the minimum fixed
Optical Power(dBm) pump optical power that is
queried from the NE.
Maximum Fixed Pump For example: 28.0 Displays the maximum fixed
Optical Power(dBm) pump optical power that is
queried from the NE.
NOTE
3.12.6 Parameters:Optical Supervisory Channel Board

In this user interface, you can set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of an
optical port.
Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-16- Displays current optical port/

SC1-1(RM/TM)-1 channel number.
Optical Interface Name For example: RM/TM Sets/displays the optical port
name.
Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, You can set optical port

Outloop loopback for troubleshooting
Default: Non-Loopback or testing.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the laser status.

Applicable boards: HSC1,
SC1 and SC2.
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1510.00/198.54 wavelength of the optical
(THz) port.

current working wavelength.
NOTE
3.12.7 Parameters:Protection Board

In this user interface, you can set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laser
status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.
Parameters

OLP-2(RI1/TO1) optical interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: RI1/TO1 Displays the default names.
Threshold of Input Power Values of parameters vary Sets the threshold of the
Loss (dBm) with different boards and optical power loss. When the
products. input optical power is below
this value, the loss of input
signals occurs.
Initial Variance Value -10.0 to 10.0 Sets the initial variance value
Between Primary and between primary and
Secondary Input Power (dB) secondary input power.
Variance Threshold Between 3.0 to 8.0 Sets the variance threshold

Primary and Secondary Input between primary and
Power (dB) secondary input power.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
3.12.8 Parameters:Spectrum Analysis Board

In this user interface, you can set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. For
example, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.
Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-12- Displays the current optical

MCA8-1(IN1) port/path location.
Optical Interface Name For example: RO1 Do not modify this field. Use
the default value.
Optical Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the

spectrum analysis of the path.
Actual Band C Displays the optical band that

the path is monitoring.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Currently only even band is
supported.
Configure Band C Configures the optical band

that the path monitors.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Displays the parity of the

Parity current working band of the
port. Currently only parity
band is supported.
Optical Switch No 1 to 8 The MCA board can access

eight optical signals. To
select one optical port to
perform spectrum analysis,
you need to know the
analyzed optical port No. of
the board, that is, the optical
switch status or the optical
switch number.
Monitor Interval (min) 5 to 49995 Sets the time interval of

Default: 10 performance monitoring on
the board.
Wavelength Monitor Status Monitor, No Monitor Sets whether to monitor the

Default: Unmonitored port.
Band For example: C Displays the band.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
WDM Type NRZ or DRZ, 100-GHz Sets the WDM type.

Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz
Spacing with CRZ
NOTE
3.12.9 Parameters:Variable Optical Attenuation Board

In this user interface, you can set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical ports
and path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, including
fixed band and the parity of working band.
Parameters

VA1-1(IN/OUT)-1 optical interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: IN1/OUT1 Displays default names. Do

Optical Interface Attenuation 0-40 Sets the attenuation ratio of

Ratio (dB) the optical port.
Max. Attenuation Ratio (dB) For example: 40 Displays the maximum

attenuation ratio. If the actual
attenuation ratio is greater
than this value, the output
power is so small that it may
cause decrease of the optical
signal noise ratio (OSNR) at
the receive end.
Min. Attenuation Ratio (dB) For example: 5 Displays the minimum

attenuation ratio. If the actual
attenuation ratio is smaller
than this value, the output
power is so large that it may
cause decrease of the optical
signal noise ratio (OSNR) at
the receive end.
Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether the path is being
Default: Used used.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Actual Band C Displays the current working

band of the path. Currently
only C band is supported.
Configure Band C Configures the working band

of the port.
Threshold of Input Power For example: -50 Input power that is smaller
Loss (dBm) than this value cannot be
determined.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of the
current working band of the
band is supported.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Configures the parity of the

Parity working band of the port.
Currently only even band is
supported.
NOTE
3.12.10 Parameters:Dispersion Compensation Board

In this user interface, you can query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.
Parameters

TDC-1(IN1/OUT1) optical interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 4 Performance Management
4 Performance Management
About This Chapter
To ensure the normal functioning of the network, the network management and maintenance
personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance
management measures.
4.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.
According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. If you
have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performance thresholds for
one or more boards at the same time.
4.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters
By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and starting
the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance record
during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring of
services and NEs.
4.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers
After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the
performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4 Performance Management Web LCT Operation Guide
4.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.
According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. If you
have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performance thresholds for
one or more boards at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance
Threshold.
Step 2 In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.
Step 3 Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.
Step 4 Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value that is set.
----End
4.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters

By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and starting
the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance record
during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring of
services and NEs.
4.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board
You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The
Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled
by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.
4.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.
4.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port
To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernet
port.
4.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board

You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The
Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature is disabled
by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 4 Performance Management
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor Status
Step 2 Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Condition drop-down list.
Step 3 Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click Apply.
Step 4 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
Step 5 Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.
----End
4.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.
Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the Web LCT server time.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor
Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters as required. Click Apply.
Step 3 Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.
Step 4 When the NE time is later than the monitoring time that is set, you can query the 15-minute and
24-hour performance monitoring of an NE normally.
----End
4.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernet
port.
Prerequisite
l The Ethernet service must be configured. Refer to 10 Configuring Ethernet Services.
l The performance monitoring parameters must be set.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON Performance.
Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4 Performance Management Web LCT Operation Guide
Step 3 Select a port from the Select port drop down list.
Step 4 Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions.
Step 5 Click Start.
----End
4.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers

After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the
performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance
Register from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the registers that you want to reset.
Step 3 Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.

NOTE
All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting the register.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 5 Configuring Wavelength Grooming
5 Configuring Wavelength Grooming
About This Chapter
5.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The
Web LCT is used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels, and thus the
remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization can be performed
on pass-through and adding wavelengths.
5.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow
This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before
configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic
configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
5.3 Configuring the ROADM
This section considers project R as an example to describe how to configure the ROADM on
the Web LCT when the WSS board is used.
5.4 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5 Configuring Wavelength Grooming Web LCT Operation Guide
5.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The
Web LCT is used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels, and thus the
remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization can be performed
on pass-through and adding wavelengths.
There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength allocation:
l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)
l Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements of service
development. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or cross-
connecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength allocation to a flexible and dynamic
operation. Making use of the ROADM technology, the Web LCT software adjusts the status of
wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic adjustment of
wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is supported.
Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by optical cross-
connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing the services at the optical
layer. Products provides flexible optical grooming. When there are changes in the services, users
need only to make configuration accordingly on the Web LCT.
Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main methods are listed
as follows:
l WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for
multidimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight dimensions.
l WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the grooming in no
more than four dimensions.
l ROAM (WSMD2): Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-dimensional grooming.
NOTE
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in

two transmission directions. Multidimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multiple
transmission directions.
For more details of optical grooming, refer to the Product Description.
5.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow

This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before
configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic
configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow
Start
Creating firbers
Creating the
board optical
cross-connections
Creating the
Single-Station optical
cross-connections
End
Task Name Task Description
3.7 Creating Required

Fibers If the single-station cross-connection is configured, the logic fiber
connection between NEs must be created on the NM and between boards
that are inside the NEs must be created on the Web LCT.
13.1.2 The inter-board service route can be established by creating the single-
Creating station optical cross-connection.
Single-Station
Optical
Cross-
Connection
NOTE
The intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-connection.

This section considers project R as an example to describe how to configure the ROADM on
the Web LCT when the WSS board is used.
5.3.1 Networking Diagram

Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical
layer.
5.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation
This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board
configuration of the project.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.3.3 Configuration Process

This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the
configuration of other stations, refer to the description for station C.

Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical
layer.
Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D, E, F and G.
All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 5-2 shows the networking diagram of Project R.
Figure 5-2 Networking diagram of Project R

C
D B
E G
: OADM
In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 5-3. There are two
services between station B and station C. Between station A and station B, station B and station
D, station C and station D, station D and station E, station D and station G there is one service
respectively. All of the services are STM-64 services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-3 Service allocation of Project R
C
E W
D B
A E
W
S N
E G

This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board
configuration of the project.
Service Signal Flow

Take station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the
optical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode. The wavelength route at station
A is shown in Figure 5-4, The wavelength route at station C is shown in Figure 5-5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-4 Services at station A of Project R
W DM1 DM1 E
IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 ROA
AM1
RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
O
OAA OA
AM7 AM7
AM8 AM8
S DM1 DM1 N
IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7

WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA
RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
AM7 AM7
AM8 AM8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-5 Services at station C of Project R
W
OD
DM
IN EXPO
OA
ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
M01 M02 M40
E OD
DM
IN EXPO
OA
ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
M01 M02 M40
Wavelength Allocation Diagram

Figure 5-6 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R.
Figure 5-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R
Wavelength(nm) B C D Wavelength(nm) A B
/Frequency(THz) E W E W /Frequency(THz) E W
1531.90/
1535.82/
195.70
195.20
1532.68/
195.60
1533.47/
195.50
Wavelength(nm) D A F
Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz) E W N W
D A E
/Frequency(THz) E W S W 1533.47/
1532.68/ 195.50
195.60

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the
configuration of other stations, refer to the description for station C.
Prerequisite
The related boards are configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Station A configuration process
1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
tab in the right-hand interface.
2. Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select the
corresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect service.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength
window. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click
to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west
to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection interface is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the pass-through service from west to south at station
A for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to station E.
7. Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the service added from the east at station A for the
service 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.
8. The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the interface.

9. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection interface. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed.
All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection interface. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the
physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the
Detailed Physical Route interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Station C configuration process

1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-
Connection tab in the right-hand interface.
2. Click Create. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is
displayed.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength
window. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click
to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west
to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection interface is displayed.
5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create two services dropped from the west at station C for
the services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from station B to station C.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create the service added from the east at station C for the
service 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.
8. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection interface. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed.
All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection interface. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the
physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the
Detailed Physical Route interface.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.4 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.
5.4.1 Parameters: Edge Port
Before creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of the
board as an edge port.
5.4.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical
cross-connection refers to the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created.
An optical cross-connection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is
classified into board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A
single-station optical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within
an NE.
5.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection
In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical cross-
connection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It can
implement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical cross-
connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is the
optical cross-connection operations on one board.
5.4.1 Parameters: Edge Port

Before creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of the
board as an edge port.
Parameters
Fixed Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. Displays the fixed edge port
(port name) of the NE. By default, the port
of the FIU and the port at the
OTU line side are fixed edge
port.
Available Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. Displays available edge port
(port name) of the NE.
Selected Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. Displays the selected edge
(port name) port of the NE.
5.4.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical
cross-connection refers to the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created.
An optical cross-connection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is
classified into board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
single-station optical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within

an NE.
Parameters
Table 5-1 Optical cross-connection parameters

Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot of

the optical cross-connection.
Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port of

Source Band C Currently the Metro

equipment supports C band.
Source Wavelength No. For example: 1 The Source Wavelength

No. parameter indicates the
number of the wavelength to
which the source port of the
single-station optical cross-
connect service corresponds.
Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of the

optical cross-connection.
Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of the
Sink Band C Currently the Metro

Sink Wavelength No. For example: 1 The Sink Wavelength No.

parameter indicates the
number of the wavelength to
which the sink port of the
single-station optical cross-
connect service corresponds.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
OPA Mode Manual, Auto Optical cross-connection

power adjustment mode. If
you select Auto, the dynamic
optical add/drop
multiplexing board
automatically adjusts the
attenuation range of the
optical attenuator in the
board. If you select Manual,
you need to manually adjust
the attenuation range of the
optical attenuator in the
dynamic optical add/drop
multiplexing board.
The Auto option is available
for the following types of
optical cross-connection
trails:
l Transparently transmitted
service, such as
FIU>OAU1>WSM9>OA
U1>FIU,
OAU1>WSM9>OAU1,
FIU>OAU1>WSM9>OA
U1 and
OAU1>WSM9>OAU1>F
IU.
l Add service, such as
OTU>WSM9>OAU1>FI
U, OTU>WSM9>OAU1
and OTU>RUM9>OAU1.
l Drop service, such as
FIU>OAU1>WSD9>OT
U,
OAU1>ROAM>D40>OT
U and
OAU1>WSD9>OTU.
For all the optical cross-
connections other than the
three types described above,
you can only select the
Manual mode.
5.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection

In this user interface, you can configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical cross-
connection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It can
implement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical cross-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is the

optical cross-connection operations on one board.
Parameters

Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port of

Source Band C Currently the Metro

Source Wavelength No. For example: Numbers wavelengths

2/1529.56/196.00 sequentially. The value is
expressed in the order of
"wavelength number/central
wavelength (nm)/frequency
(THz)"
Currently 80 wavelengths in
C band are supported.

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of the
Sink Band C Currently the Metro

Sink Wavelength No. For example: Numbers wavelengths

2/1529.56/196.00 sequentially. The value is
expressed in the order of
"wavelength number/central
wavelength (nm)/frequency
(THz)"
Currently 80 wavelengths in
C band are supported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 6 Configuring WDM Services
6 Configuring WDM Services
About This Chapter
This chapter describes methods of configuring the WDM transparent transmission services.
6.1 Overview
This topic describes the basic concepts of the WDM service configuration.
6.2 Service Type
This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.
6.3 WDM Service Configuration Flow
This topic describes the configuration process of services. Before configuring the WDM
services, complete the basic configurations on the NE following the network creation process.
6.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service
through configuration of the cross-connect service.
6.5 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through
an example.
6.6 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service
6.7 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through
an example.
6.8 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6 Configuring WDM Services Web LCT Operation Guide
6.1 Overview
This topic describes the basic concepts of the WDM service configuration.
Overview of Cross-Connections
The grooming function of electrical cross-connections of WDM equipment helps WDM
networks to change from static networks to dynamic networks. Operations, such as pass-through,
adding, dropping, loopback, can be performed on each sub-service on any station independently,
without affecting the services in other channels. The electrical cross-connection realizes
automatic configuration through remote management. No fiber jumper needs to be performed
manually. In this manner, the operation cost and the possibility of misoperation are reduced.
The MUX/DMUX of the traditional WDM equipment supports only the point-to-point
multiplexing scheme, whereas the MUX/DMUX of the NG WDM eqiupment supports the end-
to-end management capability. In addition, the NG WDM equipment supports GE and ODUk
cross-connections. In addition, the electrical cross-connection scheme is different from the ADM
scheme that is based on wavelengths. It allows the cross-connection of services between
wavelengths, providing service convergence and grooming of different wavelengths.
Electrical cross-connections are classified as follows:
l According to the cross-connection level and granularity, electrical cross-connections are
classified into, for example, GE, Any, and ODUk cross-connections.
l According to the grooming mode, electrical cross-connections are classified into
centralized cross-connections and distributed cross-connections.
l According to the location of cross-connection, electrical cross-connections can be in
straight-through mode or cross-connect mode.
– Straight-through mode:
Optical signals received at the RXn port on the client side pass through the cross-connect
unit and directly travel to the corresponding channels on the WDM side. After
multiplexing, signal processing and optical wavelength conversion, these signals are
output from the OUT port. After wavelength conversion and signal processing, signals
input from the IN port on the WDM side are demultiplexed into one or more channels
of electrical signals that pass through the cross-connect unit and directly travel to the
corresponding TXn on the client side.
Straight-through services are as shown in the Figure 6-1:
– 3 (RX1/TX1) (client-side optical interfaces) <-> 3 (channel number)
Figure 6-1 Straight-through mode

A B
3-1(RX1) 1-3 1-3 3-1(TX1)
4-1(RX2) 1-4 1(OUT) 4-1(TX2)
1(IN) 1-4
5-1(RX3) 1-5 1-5 5-1(TX3)
6-1(RX4) 1-6 1-6 6-1(TX4)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– Cross-connect mode:
Cross-connections in cross-connect mode are classified into intra-board cross-
connections and inter-board cross-connections.
– Intra-board cross-connection:
Optical signals received at the RXn port on the client side are cross-connected by
the cross-connect unit to the channels that correspond to other optical interfaces of
the same board on the WDM side. After multiplexing, signal processing and optical
wavelength conversion, these signals are output from the OUT port. After
wavelength conversion and signal processing, signals input from the IN port on the
WDM side are demultiplexed into multiple channels of electrical signals, one
channel of which is cross-connected by the cross-connect unit to the client-side TXn
port that corresponds to other channels of the same board.
The intra-board cross-connection service is as shown in the Figure 6-2: 5 (RX1/
TX1) (client-side optical interfaces) <->3 (channel number).
– Inter-board cross-connection:
Optical signals received at the RXn port on the client side are cross-connected by
the cross-connect unit to the channels that correspond to optical interfaces of another
board on the WDM side. After multiplexing, signal processing and optical
wavelength conversion, these signals are output from the OUT port. After
wavelength conversion and signal processing, signals input from the IN port on the
WDM side are demultiplexed into multiple channels of electrical signals, one
channel of which is cross-connected by the cross-connect unit to the client-side TXn
port that corresponds to other channels of another board.
The Inter-board cross-connection service is as shown in the Figure 6-2: 3 (RX1/
TX1) (client-side optical interfaces) <->6 (channel number).
Figure 6-2 Cross-connect mode

A B
3-1(RX1) 3-1(TX1)
1-3 1-3
4-1(RX2) 4-1(TX2)
1-4 1(OUT) 1(IN) 1-4
5-1(RX3) 5-1(TX3)
1-5 1-5
6-1(RX4) 6-1(TX4)
1-6 1-6
3-1(RX1)
1-3
4-1(RX2)
1-4
5-1(RX3)
1-5
6-1(RX4)
1-6
NOTE
The straight-through and cross-connect services should be configured on the Web LCT. That is,
create cross-connect services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Restrictions on Cross-Connection Configuration

l Earlier version NE software does not support cross-connection creation between boards of
different types.
l As the NE software imposes restrictions on backplane cross-connections, the boards
between which you want to create cross-connections must be in cross-connect slots. In the
case of different types of equipment, boards, and the corresponding NE software versions,
their cross-connect slots and cross-connect groups are different.
l If you configure a cross-connection between the two optical ports on the OTU board, the
source of a normal cross-connection can also serve as the source of other normal cross-
connections, but its sink cannot be the sink of other cross-connections. The two sources of
a SNCP cross-connection cannot be the source of other cross-connections, and its sinks
cannot be the sink of other cross-connections.
When configuring the electrical cross-connection for a service on the OptiX OSN 3800, OptiX
OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 8800, you must make sure that the WDM-side optical channel
numbers at the transmit and receive ends of the service in a direction must be the same.
Otherwise, the service fails.
The OptiX OSN 3800 provides mesh cross-connections in the four-slot group based on the GE
service, ODU1 signal, and Any service.
Normal cross-connections on the OptiX OSN 6800 are classified into centralized cross-
connections and distributed cross-connections.
l Centralized cross-connection: If the XCS board is configured during the cross-connection
creation, the cross-connection can be realized through the XCS. The boards where you want
to create cross-connections can be placed in any slots that support the boards. If you want
to delete the XCS board on the Web LCT, first delete the cross-connections that are related
to the XCS board.
l Distributed cross-connection: If no XCS board is configured during the cross-connection
creation, the boards where you want to create cross-connections can be placed in paired
slots.
NOTE
The paired slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 are as follows: 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8, 9 and 10, 11
and 12, 13 and 14, and 15 and 16. The XCS boards are placed in slots 9 and 10.
On the OptiX OSN 8800, normal cross-connections support centralized cross-connections only.
l OptiX OSN 1800 I chassis IU1 and IU3, IU1 and IU4 form the mesh cross-connection. IU3
and IU4 form a group of paired slots.
l OptiX OSN 1800 II chassis IU3 and IU4, IU3 and IU6, IU5 and IU6, IU5 and IU4 form
the mesh cross-connection. There are three groups of paired slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and
IU5, and IU4 and IU6.
Signal Flow of Electrical Cross-Connections

In the case of the WDM equipment, the OTU board, tributary board, and line board work together
to complete the cross-connect grooming of services. The client services are transmitted from the
client side of the WDM equipment, and then modulated to the WDM system for transmission
after service grooming and convergence. Figure 6-3 considers the OTU board with the GE/Any
and ODUk cross-connection function as an module to describe the signal flow of the electrical
cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 6800.Figure 6-4 considers
the OTU board with the ODUk cross-connection function as an module to describe the signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
flow of the OTN electrical cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 6-5
describes the signal flow of the SDH electrical cross-connection service of the OptiX OSN 8800.
Figure 6-3 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 6800/3800
Backplane Backplane
L2 bus bus
processing
TX1/RX1 ODUk
Optical GE/Any Optical
L2 cross- cross- OTN module IN/OUT
module
connection connection
TX2/RX2
Tributary board
Line board
OTU board (tributary-and-line-joint board)
The signals are cross-connected in the following process:

1. The optical signals are transmitted to the OTU board through the TX/RX interface and
become electrical signals. After the possible L2 processing, the electrical signals are
transmitted to the GE/Any cross-connect module through the AP interface and work with
the possible cross-connect signals from the backplane, to realize the GE/Any cross-
connections.
2. The electrical signals are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module through the LP
interface and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to realize the ODUk
cross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP
interface and then added to the WDM line for transmission.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the electrical signals that are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect module
through the LP interface and work with the possible ODUk signals from the backplane, to realize the ODUk
cross-connections. Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP interface and
added to the WDM line for transmission.
NOTE
The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both the external interfaces and
internal interfaces. These interfaces are classified into the following types:
l TX/RX interface: client-side optical interface of the board that receives and transmits signals.
l IP interface: internal interface that corresponds to the TX/RX interface. It can be regarded as a TX/
RX interface.
l AP interface: convergence interface that represents the internal interface of the L2 module. In this
case, the corresponding IP interface is an external interface.
l LP: logical interface that functions as the connection point of cross-connections.
l OP interface: internal interface that corresponds to the IN/OUT interface. It can be regarded as an
IN/OUT interface.
l IN/OUT interface: line-side optical interface of the board that receives and transmits signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-4 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 8800 OTN
Backplane
bus
TX1/RX1 ODUk
Optical Optical
module
cross- OTN module IN/OUT
connection
TX2/RX2
Tributary board
Line board
OTU board (tributary-and-line-joint board)

Signals are transmitted to an OTU board or a tributary board through the TX/RX interface and
become electrical signals. Then, the electrical signals are transmitted to the ODUk cross-connect
module, and work with the cross-connect signals that may come from the backplane to realize
ODUk cross-connections. After the electrical signals are transmitted to the OTN processing
module on the OTU board or a line board, the electrical signals are transmitted to a WDM-side
optical module and become the optical signals that have the DWDM standard wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, and then the optical signals are transmitted to the WDM line for
transmission.
Figure 6-5 Signal flow of electrical cross-connections for the OptiX OSN 8800 SDH
Backplane
bus
TX1/RX1 VC4/VC3/
Optical VC12 Optical
module cross- SDH module IN/OUT
TX2/RX2 connection
Tributary board
Line board

Signals are transmitted to an SDH board through the TX/RX interface and becomes electrical
signals. Then, the electrical signals are transmitted to the VC4/VC3/VC12 cross-connect

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
module, and work with the cross-connect signals that may come from the backplane to realize
VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. After being transmitted to the SDH processing module
on the SDH board, the electrical signals are transmitted to a WDM-side optical module and
become the optical signals that have the DWDM standard wavelengths compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
The optical signals are transmitted to the OTU board through the TX/RX interface and become
electrical signals. The electrical signals are transmitted to the GE cross-connect module work
with the possible cross-connect signals from the backplane, to realize the GE cross-connections.
Then, the signals are transmitted to the optical module through an OP interface and then added
to the WDM line for transmission.
NOTE
The boards that support the grooming of electrical cross-connections have both the external interfaces and
internal interfaces. These interfaces are classified into the following types:
l TX/RX interface: client-side optical interface of the board that receives and transmits signals.
l LP: logical interface that functions as the connection point of cross-connections.
l OP interface: internal interface that corresponds to the IN/OUT interface. It can be regarded as an
IN/OUT interface.
l IN/OUT interface: line-side optical interface of the board that receives and transmits signals.
6.2 Service Type

This topic describes the service types that are supported in the WDM service configuration.
Access Service
Table 6-1 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 3800/6800 supports.
Table 6-1 Service access types
Service Category Service Type Reference Standard
SDH/POS/ATM STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, ITU-T G.707

STM-64, STM-256 ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.693
SONET OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, GR-253-CORE

OC-768 GR-1377-CORE
ANSI T1.105
Ethernet service FE IEEE 802.3u

GE IEEE 802.3z
10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3ae

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SAN service ESCON ANSI X3.296

FICON, FICON Express, FICON ANSI X3.230
4G ANSI X3.303
FC100, FC200, FC400, FC1200 InfiniBandTM Architecture
ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO Release 1.2.1
InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G
OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU3 ITU-T G.709

ITU-T G.959.1
Video service and HD-SDI SMPTE 292M

others
DVB-ASI EN 50083-9
SDI SMPTE 259M
FDDI ISO 9314
FE: Fast Ethernet

GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise Systems Connection
FICON: Fiber Connection
FC: Fiber Channel
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems
DVB-ASI: Digital Video Broadcasting-Asynchronous Serial Interface
FDDI: Fiber Distributed Data Interface
SDI: Serial digital interface
NOTE
As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.
Table 6-2 lists the access services that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports.
Table 6-2 Service access types (OTN)

SDH/POS/ATM STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, STM-64, ITU-T G.707

STM-256 ITU-T G.691
ITU-T G.957
ITU-T G.693
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.825

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SONET OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, GR-253-CORE

OC-768 GR-1377-CORE
ANSI T1.105
Ethernet service FE, GE, 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
SAN service ESCON ANSI X3.296

ANSI X3.230
FICON, FICON Express, FC100,
FC200, FC400, FC1200, FICON4G ANSI X3.303
ISC 1G, ISC 2G, ETR, CLO
InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G InfiniBandTM Architecture

Release 1.2.1
OTN service OTU1, OTU2, OTU2e, OTU3 ITU-T G.709

ITU-T G.959.1
Video service and HD-SDI SMPTE 292M

others
DVB-ASI EN 50083-9
SDI SMPTE 259M
FDDI ISO 9314
FE: Fast Ethernet

GE: Gigabit Ethernet
ESCON: Enterprise systems connection
FICON: Fiber connection
FC: Fiber channel
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems
DVB-ASI: Digital video broadcasting-asynchronous serial interface
FDDI: Fiber distributed data interface
SDI: Serial digital interface
NOTE
As specified in the SMPTE-259M, SDI is also called SD-SDI.
6.3 WDM Service Configuration Flow

This topic describes the configuration process of services. Before configuring the WDM
services, complete the basic configurations on the NE following the network creation process.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Before configuring a WDM servie, ensure that you have finished checking board parameters.
For details on how to check board parameters, see 3.6.2 Checking Board Parameters. To learn
the information about the signal flow of each board, see the Hardware Description.
Figure 6-6 WDM service configuration flow
Start
Configure service type
Create cross- N
connections or not?
Y
Creating cross-connect
Non-cross-connect services
services
Start performance monitoring

on the NE
Back up the configuration data

of the NE
End
Task Name Description
13.6 Configuring the Service Mandatory

Type The services can be transmitted normally only when the
type of the services at the WDM interface of the board is
the same as the actual service type.
13.2.1 Creating Cross- Optional

Connections By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create
the intra-board or inter-board route for a single service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Task Name Description
Non-cross-connect services Optional

The services at the non-cross-connect port can be
available after the service type is configured correctly.
4.2.2 Setting Performance Mandatory

Monitoring Parameters of an Performance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the
NE operation of an NE, helping the maintenance engineer to
monitor and analyze the operation status of the NE.
6.4 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the GE

Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the GE service
6.4.1 Configuration Networking Diagram

This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.
This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and
how to plan the wavelength allocation.
This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes
only the configuration in one direction. The configuration in the other direction is similar.

This section describes how to configure the GE service in the ring network.
Service Requirement
In the network shown in Figure 6-7, optical NEs A, B, C, and D form a ring network. All the
NEs are OADM NEs. The service requirement is as follows:
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional GE service is available
between NE A and NE B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-7 Configuration networking diagram of the GE service

User1
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
NMS
A
B D
C
User2
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
:OADM
Board Configuration Information

In this example, two 12LQMS boards should be configured on each NE.

This section describes how to configure the GE service transparent transmission signal flow and
how to plan the wavelength allocation.
One GE service is available between NE A and NE B.
Figure 6-8 shows the service signal flow between NE A and NE B.
Figure 6-8 Unidirectional service on each NE
A B
12LQMS 12LQMS
3(RX1/TX1) 3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP/ 201(ClientLP/ 4(RX2/TX2)
ClientLP)
ClientLP) 5(RX5/TX5)
5(RX5/TX5)
1(IN1/OUT1) 1(IN1/OUT1) 6(RX6/TX6)
5(RX6/TX6)
: client-side services : WDM-side services : virtual channel
NOTE
The 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP) is the logical port. When it is connected to the WDM-side IN/OUT port, no
configuration is required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l GE service of station A:
The service is added by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on
optical NE A and 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE A.
l GE service of station B:
The service is dropped by using the 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP) logical port of the 12LQMS
on optical NE B and number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS on optical NE B.
Figure 6-9 shows the wavelength allocation of NE A and NE B.
Figure 6-9 Wavelength allocation diagram
Wavelength(nm) A B
/Frequency(THz) East West
1532.68/
195.60

This section describes how to configure the GE service on NEs A and B. This section describes
Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the add and drop services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the board according to the service planning. For detailed configuration method, see
13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Configure the add service on NE A.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-
Connection Service Management from the Function Tree.
2. In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab page, click New to display the
Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
3. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, select proper values for Service
Level etc. parameters according to the plan.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4. Click OK, and thus one cross-connect service route is created.

5. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
6. Optional: For details on how to configure service timeslots of a logic port, see 13.5
Configuring Service Timeslots.
Step 3 Configure the drop service on NE B.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End
6.5 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SAN

Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SAN services through
an example.
This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.
This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow
and how to plan the wavelength allocation.
This section describes how to configure the SAN service on NEs A and B. This section describes

This section describes how to configure the SAN service in the ring network.
Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SAN service is available
Figure 6-10 Configuration networking diagram of the SAN service

User1
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
NMS
A
B D
C
User2
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
:OADM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


This section describes how to configure the SAN service transparent transmission signal flow
One SAN service is available between NE A and NE B.
A B
12LQMS 12LQMS
3(RX1/TX1) 3(RX1/TX1)
ClientLP)
5(RX5/TX5)
5(RX6/TX6)
NOTE
l SAN service of station A:
l SAN service of station B:
Wavelength(nm) A B
1532.68/
195.60

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This section describes how to configure the SAN service on NEs A and B. This section describes
Procedure




OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

----End
6.6 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the OTN

Service
This configuration example describes the process of transparent transmission of the OTN service

This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.
This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow
This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes

This section describes how to configure the OTN service in the ring network.
Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional OTN service is available

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-13 Configuration networking diagram of the OTN service
User1
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
NMS
A
B D
C
User2
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
:OADM


This section describes how to configure the OTN service transparent transmission signal flow
One OTN service is available between NE A and NE B.
A B
12LQMS 12LQMS
3(RX1/TX1) 3(RX1/TX1)
ClientLP)
5(RX5/TX5)
5(RX6/TX6)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l OTN service of station A:
l OTN service of station B:
The service is dropped by using the number 3 optical interface Rx1/Tx1 of the 12LQMS
on optical NE B and 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP) logical port of the 12LQMS on optical NE
B is used.
Wavelength(nm) A B
1532.68/
195.60

This section describes how to configure the OTN service on NEs A and B. This section describes
Procedure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End
6.7 Configuring the Transparent Transmission of the SDH

Services
This topic describes how to configure the transparent transmission of the SDH services through
an example.
This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.
This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow
This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes

This section describes how to configure the SDH service in the ring network.
Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One unidirectional SDH service is available
Figure 6-16 Configuration networking diagram of the SDH service

User1
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
NMS
A
B D
C
User2
EAST 12LQMS
WEST 12LQMS
:OADM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


This section describes how to configure the SDH service transparent transmission signal flow
One SDH service is available between NE A and NE B.
A B
12LQMS 12LQMS
3(RX1/TX1) 3(RX1/TX1)
ClientLP)
5(RX5/TX5)
5(RX6/TX6)
NOTE
l SDH service of station A:

l SDH service of station B:
Wavelength(nm) A B
1532.68/
195.60

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This section describes how to configure the SDH service on NEs A and B. This section describes
Procedure


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

----End
6.8 Parameters
Describes the parameters involved in the WDM services configuration.
6.8.1 Parameters: Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration
In this user interface, you can create normal electrical cross-connections and SNCP services.
You can also perform conversion between these two types of services. If the created service is
not properly configured during configuration, the Web LCT does not send the new service data
to NEs and it automatically notifies the operator.
6.8.2 Parameters: WDM Service Configuration
In this user interface, you can query and configure the timeslots of an electrical cross-connection.
6.8.1 Parameters: Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration

In this user interface, you can create normal electrical cross-connections and SNCP services.
You can also perform conversion between these two types of services. If the created service is
not properly configured during configuration, the Web LCT does not send the new service data
to NEs and it automatically notifies the operator.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Table 6-3 Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration

Service Level GE, Any, OTU1, ODU1, Specifies the level of the new
ODU2, ODU3, ODU5G service.
ODU3 and ODU5G are only
applicable to the fixed cross-
connections of an Ethernet
board. For the newly created
cross-connections, you can
only select the following five
service levels: GE, Any,
OTU1, ODU1 and ODU2.
Direction Bidirectional, Unidirectional If the receive service and

transmit service have the
same route, they are regarded
as a bidirectional service. If
the receive service and
transmit service have
different routes, they are two
unidirectional services.
Source Path For example: 3-L4G-201 Displays the source path of

(LP/LP)-1 the service.
Sink Path For example: 3-L4G-101 Displays the sink path of the
(AP1/AP1)-1 service.
Service Type For GE, OTU1 and ODUk Specifies the type of the new
services, this value is default service.
to FE and cannot be
modified.
For Any services, FE,FC50,
STM-1, STM-4, STM-16,
OC3, OC12, OC48, FC100,
FC200, FICON,
FICONExpress, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON,
FDDI, ISC 1G, ISC 2G
Source Slot For example: 3-L4G Displays the source slot of

the service.
Source Port For example: 201(LP/LP) Displays the source port of

the service.
Source Optical Path (e.g. For example: 3-1 Displays the source optical
1,3-6) path of the service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Sink Slot For example: 3-L4G Displays the sink slot of the
service.
Sink Port For example: 101(AP1/AP1) Displays the sink port of the
service.
Sink Optical Path (e.g. 1,3-6) For example: 3-1 Displays the sink optical path
of the service.
Service Origin Create Manually, Displays the service origin.

Intelligently Generate
Table 6-4 Create SNCP

Protection Type SW SNCP, ODUk SNCP, Specifies the level of the new
MSSNCP service.
SNCP Type l For SW SNCP and Displays the protection type

MSSNCP: none of the service.
l For ODUk SNCP: SNC/I,
SNC/N, SNC/S
OTN Level For example: PM Sets the OTN level.
Service Type l For SW SNCP: GE, Specifies the service type of

FE,FC50, STM1, STM4, the new service.
STM16, OC3, OC12,
OC48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICONExpresss,
HDTV, DVBASI,
DVBSDI, ESCON, FDDI
l For ODUk SNCP: ODU1,
ODU2, ODU3, ODU5G
l For MSSNCP: GE
Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-Revertive Chooses whether the service

is switched to the original
working path after the failure
is eliminated. If you want the
service to be switched back to
the original working path
then, select Revertive. If you
do not want the service to be
switched back then, select
Non-Revertive.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
WTR Time (s) 300-720 Sets the wait-to-restore time.

It is the time interval between
the time when the working
service is detected to be
normal after switching and
the time when the service is
switched back to the working
path. You can modify the
Revertive Mode only when
the value is Revertive.
Delay Time(100ms) 0-100 Sets the time interval

between the time when the
system detects signal degrade
and the time when the service
switching occurs, in order to
avoid repeated switching
when the service status is not
stable. The switching delay
time is in 100 milliseconds.
For example, if you enter 5,
the delay time is 500
milliseconds.
SD Enabling Flag Enabled, Disabled Sets the SD enabling flag.

the cross-connection.
Source Port Port No. (Port name) Displays the source port of
the cross-connection.
Source Path (e.g.1,3-6) Slot-Optical port No.-Optical Displays the source path of
path No. the cross-connection.

cross-connection.
Sink Port Port No. (Port name) Displays the sink port of the
cross-connection.
Sink Path (e.g.1,3-6) Slot-Optical port No.-Optical Displays the sink path of the
path No. cross-connection.
6.8.2 Parameters: WDM Service Configuration

In this user interface, you can query and configure the timeslots of an electrical cross-connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Table 6-5 Timeslot service parameters

Field Description
Port Displays the port the WDM services

occupied.
Service Type Displays the cross-connection type.
Service Rate(0.1M) Displays the cross-connection rate.
Send Timeslots Sets the send timeslots of the cross-

connection.
Receive Timeslots Sets the receive timeslots of the cross-

connection.
Timeslot Configuration Mode Set the timeslot configuration mode.

l Manual: Manually set the transmit and
receive timeslots.
l Automatic: The system automatically
allocates the transmit and receive timeslots
that cannot be changed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 7 Configuring the 11TOM Board
7 Configuring the 11TOM Board
About This Chapter
Only OptiX OSN 6800/3800 support 11TOM board.
7.1 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Four
ODU1 Electrical Signals
This configuration example shows how the TOM board is configured to realize the conversion
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four
channels of ODU1 electrical signals.
7.2 Application Scenario 2: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and
Four ODU1 Electrical Signals
between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.
7.3 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Four
OTU1 Optical Signals
between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four
channels of OTU1 optical signals.
7.4 Application Scenario 4: Realizes the Conversion Between Seven Any Services and One
OTU1 Optical Signal
between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one
channel of OTU1 optical signals.
7.5 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Six Any Services and One OTU1
Optical Signal and Realizes the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function on the WDM Side
between six channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one channel
of OTU1 optical signals, and how to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function on the
WDM side.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7 Configuring the 11TOM Board Web LCT Operation Guide
7.1 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion

Between Eight Any Services and Four ODU1 Electrical
Signals
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four
channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

This section describes how to configure the service for a ring network.
7.1.2 Service Signal Flow
This section provides the signal flow diagram of station A.
This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the TOM
board.

Service Requirement
Refer to Figure 7-1, the optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the
ONEs function as OADM stations.
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU2 service is available
between station A and station B. On station A, the TOM board accesses eight Any services (100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The ODU1 services are
then sent to the NS2 board on the station A, where they are converted into one OTU2 service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-1 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in
application scenario 1
User1
SLOT212 12NS2
SLOT215 11TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
A
User2
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT212 12NS2
SLOT215 11TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, a TOM board and an NS2 board should be configured on station A and station
B.

One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B.
Figure 7-2 shows the service signal flow on station A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 7-2 Bidirectional service on station A
A A
11TOM 12NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: Client-side services
: WDM-side services
: Working service direction
: Virtual channel

board.
Precautions
NOTE
The value of Board Mode is Non-cascading mode by default. In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)
and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/
ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.
NOTE
A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service can be
configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.
The total rate of services accessed to a ClientLP port must be equal to or lower than 2.5 Gbit/s.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The client-side interfaces can be grouped as required.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM according to the service planning.
For details, refer to 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
Step 2 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board.
2. In the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click New to display the Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box.
Level, and Service Type and set other parameters for the service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The service type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOM board
6. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.4 to configure the remaining seven Any services.
Step 3 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TOM and NS2 boards.
1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Set the parameters
for the cross-connect service between the TOM and NS2 boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4. Repeat Step 3.1 to Step 3.2 to configure the remaining cross-connect services between the
TOM and NS2 boards.
----End

Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1
Electrical Signals
between four channels of OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.

board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
User1, User2, and User3 communicate with each other through one OTU2 service separately.
On station A, the TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into four
ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are then sent to two NS2 boards on the station A
according to the actual service requirement. Each NS2 board converges the received ODU1
services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service.
Figure 7-3 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary board in non-cascading mode) in
application scenario 2
User1
SLOT212 12NS2
SLOT213 12NS2
SLOT215 11TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST A EAST
User2 User3
D
B
C WEST
EAST
SLOT213 12NS2
SLOT213 12NS2
SLOT215 11TOM
SLOT215 11TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, a TOM board and two NS2 boards should be configured on station A, a TOM
board and an NS2 board should be configured on station B and station C.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
One OTU2 service is available between station A and station B. Another OTU2 service is
available between station A and station C.

A
12NS2
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
1(IN/OUT)
A
11TOM 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
A
12NS2
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
1(IN/OUT)
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

board.
Precautions
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.

NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Set Service Mode of the TOM board to OTN Mode.
NOTE
When the TOM board accesses OTU1 services on the client side, you first need to set the Service Mode
of the TOM board to OTN Mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel), choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Click the Service Mode and select OTN Mode from the drop-down list.
4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the TOM as OTU1. For details, refer to
Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TOM board.
Level and set other parameters for the service.
NOTE
The service type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the TOM board.
6. Repeat Step 3.2 to Step 3.4 to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.
Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the TOM and NS2 boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Click New to display the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box. Select
corresponding values for Level and set other parameters for the service.

4. Repeat Step 4.1 to Step 4.2 to configure the remaining cross-connect services between the
TOM and NS2 boards.
----End

Between Four Any Services and Four OTU1 Optical Signals
between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four
channels of OTU1 optical signals.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
board.

Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. One bidirectional OTU1 services are available
between station A and station B. On station A, the TOM board accesses four GE services and
then converts them into four OTU1 services.
Figure 7-5 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in non-cascading
mode) in application scenario 3
User1
SLOT214 11TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
EAST
WEST A
User2
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT214 11TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, a TOM board should be configured on station A and station B.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Four OTU1 service is available between station A and station B.

A
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(RX5/TX5)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

board.
Precautions
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.
NOTE
NOTE
When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOM
board also can regenerates the OTU1 service.
l When the TOM board functions as a regeneration board, you need to change the Type of the client-
side optical interface to Client Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to 12.2.3 Modifying
Port.
l In cascading mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal, only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
l In non-cascading mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal.
Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7), and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line
Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to 12.2.3 Modifying Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When the TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module must
be inserted in the WDM-side optical interface, and the Type of this optical interface must be changed to
Line Side Color Optical Port.
Step 3 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board.
Level and set other parameters for the service.
NOTE
6. Repeat Step 3.2 to Step 3.4 to configure the remaining three Any services.
Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TOM board.
corresponding values for Service Level and set other parameters for the service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4. Repeat Step 4.1 to Step 4.2 to configure the remaining three OTU1 services.
----End

Between Seven Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal
between seven channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one
channel of OTU1 optical signals.

board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. On station A, the TOM board accesses seven Any services (100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service.
Figure 7-7 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in cascading mode)
in application scenario 4
User1
SLOT215 11TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
EAST
WEST A
User2
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT215 11TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM



OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
A
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

board.
Precautions
NOTE
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured
in only the first ClientLP port.
NOTE
The client-side seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
NOTE
When the service type on both the client side and the WDM side of the TOM board is OTU1, the TOM
board also can regenerates the OTU1 service.
l When the TOM board functions as a regeneration board, you need to change the Type of the client-
side optical interface to Client Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to 12.2.3 Modifying
Port.
l In cascading mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal, only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
l In non-cascading mode, the TOM realizes the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal.
Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode.
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel), choose Board from the drop-down list.
3. Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list.
NOTE
If the Board Mode of the board is changed, the default port configuration data and service
configuration data will be restored, and as a result the services will be interrupted.
4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Set the type of ports 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, refer to 12.2.3
Modifying Port.
NOTE
Step 4 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
6. Repeat Step 4.2 to Step 4.4substep d to configure the remaining six Any services.
Step 5 Configure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of OTU1 services for the TOM board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

----End

Between Six Any Services and One OTU1 Optical Signal
and Realizes the Dual Fed and Selective Receiving Function
on the WDM Side
of OTU1 optical signals, and how to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function on the
WDM side.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
board.

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. At station A, the TOM board accesses six Any services (100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one OTU1 service. On the WDM side, the
TOM board performs dual fed and selective receiving.
Figure 7-9 Networking diagram for the TOM board (tributary & line board in cascading mode)
in application scenario 5
User1
SLOT214 11TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
EAST
WEST A
User2
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT214 11TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM



OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
A
11TOM
5(RX3/TX3) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 9(RX7/TX7)

51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

board.
Precautions
NOTE
For the client services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express,
HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. And this service can be configured
in only the first ClientLP port.
NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Board Mode to Cascading mode.
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel), choose Board from the drop-down list.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Click the Board Mode and select Cascading mode from the drop-down list.
NOTE
If the Board Mode of the board is changed, the default port configuration data and service
configuration data will be restored, and as a result the services will be interrupted.
4. Click Apply.
Step 2 Set the type of ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For
details, refer to 12.2.3 Modifying Port.
NOTE
Step 4 onfigure the intra-board electrical cross-connections of Any services for the TOM board.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6. Repeat Step 4.2 to Step 4.4 to configure the remaining five Any services.
Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/TX7)
and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the TOM board to achieve dual feeding.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The
service in the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service in the protection channel
must be set as unidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) is the working channel port, and
port 10 (RX8/TX8) is the protection channel port.
Step 6 Configure the selective receiving feature for the WDM side of the TOM board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection from the
Function Tree.
2. In the Port Protection user interface, click New. In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click
OK. The Create Protection Group dialog box displayed. Select Intra-Board 1+1
Protection from the Protection Type. Enter the other parameters of the protection group.
For details of parameters, refer to Feature Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Click OK. In the window that is displayed, click Close. The created protection group is
displayed in the window.
4. Confirm that the values of the parameters for the protection group are the same as the values
that are set.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
8 Configuring the 52TOM Board
About This Chapter
8.1 About the Working Modes

This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signal
flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set to
specific values.
8.2 Configuration Rules
This section describes the rules for configuring the TN52TOM board.
8.3 Application Scenario 1: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Two
ODU0 or One ODU1 Electrical Signals
This configuration example shows how the 52TOM board is configured to realize the conversion
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two
ODU0 or one ODU1 (with ODU0 mapping) electrical signals.
Optical Signal (with ODU0 mapping)
of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping), and how to realize the dual fed and selective
receiving function on the WDM side. If only set one of optical interfaces 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10
(RX8/TX8) as a WDM-side optical interface, the 52TOM board can implement the conversion
between seven Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signals (with ODU0 mapping),
and the other configuration can be performed by referring to the following steps.
8.5 Application Scenario 3: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and One
ODU1 Electrical Signal
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one
ODU1 electrical signal.
Optical Signal (with ODU1 mapping)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
8.7 Application Scenario 5: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any Services and Eight
ODU0 or Four ODU1 Electrical Signals
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and eight
channels of ODU0 electrical signals or four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.
8.8 Application Scenario 6: Realizes the Conversion Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1
Optical Signals
between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two
channels of OTU1 optical signals, and how to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function
on the WDM side. If only set two of optical interfaces 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/
TX7), or 10 (RX8/TX8) as WDM-side optical interfaces, the 52TOM can implement the
conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals, and the other
configuration can be performed by referring to the following steps.
8.9 Application Scenario 7: Realizes the Conversion Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services
and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals
between eight channels of Any or four channels of OTU1 services and four channels ODU1
electrical signals.
8.10 Application Scenario 8: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight
ODU0 Electrical Signals
between four channels of OTU1 services and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals.
8.11 Application Scenario 9: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and
Eight ODU0 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)
between four channels OTU1 optical signals and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals
through Any re-encapsulation.
8.12 Application Scenario 10: Realizes the Conversion Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals
and Four ODU1 Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)
between four channels OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals
8.13 Application Scenario 11: Realizes the Conversion Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals
and Two OTU1 Optical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)
between two channels OTU1 optical signals and two channels OTU1 optical signals through
Any re-encapsulation.
8.14 Application Scenario 12: Realizes the Regeneration of Four OTU1 Optical Signals
This configuration example shows how the 52TOM board is configured to implement electrical
regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. If you set only two of the 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6),
9(RX7/TX7), and 10(RX8/TX8) optical interfaces as WDM-side optical interfaces, the 52TOM
board can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical
signals. If the 7(RX5/TX5) and 8(RX6/TX6) optical interfaces are configured as one protection
group and the 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) optical interfaces are configured are another

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
protection group, the 52TOM board can implement conversion between four Any services and
two channels of OTU1 opticalsignals and the dual-fed and selective receiving function on the
WDM side.
8.15 Working Mode
In this user interface, you can set working modes of the 52TOM board and ports on the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
8.1 About the Working Modes

This section describes the board working mode and port working mode. A specific service signal
flow of a board is available when the board working mode and port working mode are set to
specific values.
Board Working mode

The Web LCT supports four board working modes: NS1 Mode, LQM Mode, Cascading, and
Non-Cascading.
The 12LQMS board supports NS1 Mode and LQM Mode.

l In NS1 Mode, the 12LQMS board functions as a line board that performs the mutual
conversion between the ODUk electrical signals and the optical signals at a WDM system-
compliant standard wavelength.
l In LQM Mode, the 12LQMS board functions as a tributary-line board that performs the
mutual conversion between the client-side signals and the optical signals at a WDM system-
compliant standard wavelength.
The 11TOM and 52TOM boards support the Cascading and Non-Cascading modes.
l In Cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can be
input to the 11TOM or 52TOM board through the client side. The services are then
multiplexed into different timeslots of one or two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.
Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-8 ports, can access a maximum of eight Any services.
l In Non-Cascading mode, a maximum of eight multi-rate (< 2.5 Gbit/s) Any services can
be input to the 11TOM or 52TOM board through the SFP module on the client side. The
services are then multiplexed into different timeslots of one to eight ODU0 services or one
to four ODU1 services. Each group of ClientLP ports, for example, 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 ports, can access a maximum of four Any
services.
NOTE
A specific service signal flow of the 52TOM board is available only when both the board working mode and
port working mode are set to specific values.
Port Working Mode

The 52TOM board should be set to the cascading or non-cascading mode. In addition, application
scenarios such as the ODU0 or ODU1 mapping mode and tributary or tributary-line mode of the
ports on the board should be set. As shown in Table 8-1, the 52TOM board supports 14 working
modes.
Table 8-1 Mapping between the working modes and signal flows of the 52TOM board
Board Working Port Working Signal Flow Flow Chart

mode Mode
ODU0 Tributary Any->ODU0[- 8.3.2 Service Signal

Cascading
Mode >ODU1] Flow

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board Working Port Working Signal Flow Flow Chart

mode Mode
ODU0 Tributary- Any->ODU0- 8.4.2 Service Signal

Line Mode >ODU1->OTU1 Flow
ODU1 Tributary Any->ODU1 8.5.2 Service Signal

Mode Flow

Line Mode >OTU1 Flow
NONE Mode - -
ODU0 Tributary Any->ODU0[- 8.7.2 Service Signal

Mode >ODU1] Flow

Line Mode >ODU1->OTU1 Flow
Application 1 of OTU1/Any->ODU1 8.9.2 Service Signal

ODU1 Tributary Flow
Mode
Application 2 of OTU1->ODU1- 8.10.2 Service

ODU1 Tributary >ODU0 Signal Flow
Mode

Non-Cascading ODU1 Tributary >Any->ODU0 Signal Flow
Mode

ODU1 Tributary >Any->ODU0- Signal Flow
Mode >ODU1

ODU1 Tributary- >Any->ODU0- Signal Flow
Line Mode >ODU1->OTU1
Application 2 of OTU1/Any- 8.14.2 Service

ODU1 Tributary- >ODU1->OTU1 Signal Flow
Line Mode
NONE Mode - -
NOTE
[->**]: indicates that "**" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode, there are
two service signal flows: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.
NONE Mode: indicates that the resources at this port are not used and are released to other ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
8.2 Configuration Rules

This section describes the rules for configuring the TN52TOM board.
The rules for configuring the TN52TOM board are as follows:
l The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support distributed cross-connection.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800,
– The TN52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane.
– The TN52TOM board can groom Any services on the opposite board.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800,
– The TN52TOM board can groom a maximum of six Any services through the backplane.
– The TN52TOM board cannot groom Any services throughout the full-mesh network.
– Inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the TN52TOM and TN52NS2 boards, if
required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the
TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the TN52NS2 board,
the ClientLP5-1 port on the TN52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2
port on the TN52NS2 board.
l In non-cascading board working mode, the ports on the board can be set to different port
working modes.
l In tributary-line mode, the ODU1 service does not support centralized cross-connection.
l When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the ODU0 scheduling is not supported
and thus the following port working mode application scenarios are not supported:
– Application Scenario 8: Non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode application scenario 2
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
l When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the following port working mode
application scenario is not supported:
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)

Between Eight Any Services and Two ODU0 or One ODU1
Electrical Signals
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two
ODU0 or one ODU1 (with ODU0 mapping) electrical signals.

This section describes how to configure the 52TOM board in a ring network.
This section describes the service signal flow on station A.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This section considers station A as an example to describe the configuration process of the
52TOM board.

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses eight Any services
(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service.
The two ODU0 services or one ODU1 service is accessed to the 52NS2 board on station A, and
is then converged with other accessed services as one OTU2 service.
Figure 8-1 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary mode in cascading
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE

l The OptiX OSN 6800/3800 does not support the ODU0 cross-connection.
l When the board is in the cascading mode, and the port is in the ODU0 tributary mode, the OptiX OSN
8800 does not support the grooming in ODU1 granularities.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In this example, a 52TOM board and a 52NS2 board should be configured on both station A and
station B.

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the signal flow on station A is as
shown in Figure 8-2. When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the signal flow on station
A is as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-2 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board
A A
52TOM 52NS2
3(RX1/TX1) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel
Figure 8-3 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board
A A
52TOM 52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, cannot groom the ODU1 service in Cascading
ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode.
l When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 cannot groom the ODU0
service in Cascading ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode.
NOTE
The client-side optical interface can not be set to Client Side Color Optical Port.
NOTE
Services can be input through each client-side optical port at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.
NOTE
Services can be input through the eight pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
NOTE
l The total rate of services that are input through each group of ClientLP ports, such as 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)–1 to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP)–8, must not be higher than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l Only one GE service can be input through each group of ClientLP ports.
NOTE
If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by a same number,
these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1 channel.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the 52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Cascading and
then set Port Working Mode to ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). For details,
see 13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board.
Step 2 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the 52TOM according to the service
planning. For details, see 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
Step 3 Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the 52TOM
board for the Any services of the board.
1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports on the 52TOM
board for the Any services that are input to the board. For details, see 13.2.1 Creating
Cross-Connections.
NOTE
In this scenario, If you set the Level to ANY, the Service Type can only be set to FE, GE, FC100,
FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON and FDDI.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The service type must be the same as the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the 52TOM board.
2. Repeat Step 3.1 to configure the remaining Any services.
Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the two ODU0 services between the 52TOM and
52NS2 boards.
NOTE
In Cascading ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1) mode, only when the cross-connect board
is the XCM or XCH board supports this scenario.
1. Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the 52TOM and 52NS2
boards. For details, see 13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the
52TOM and 52NS2 boards.
Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the 52TOM and 52NS2
NOTE
In Cascading ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1)] mode, only when the cross-connect board
is the XCS board supports this scenario.
When an ODU1 cross-connection is created, an intra-board ODU0 cross-connection is created
automatcially from the ClientIP port to the ODU0LP port on the 52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End

(with ODU0 mapping)

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. At station A, the 52TOM board accesses six Any services (100
52TOM board performs dual transmitting and selective receiving.
Figure 8-4 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary & line mode in
cascading mode) in application scenario 2
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE

In this example, a 52TOM board should be configured on both station A and station B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


A
52TOM
4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 9(RX7/TX7)
5(RX3/TX3)
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
6(RX4/TX4) 10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must
not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is
configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.
l Services can be input through the six pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/
s.
l Services can be input through each client-side optical port at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.
l In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Procedure
then set Port Working Mode to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1). For details, refer to 13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When the 52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, the Type of this optical interface must be
changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.
planning. For details, refer to 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
board for the Any services of the board. For details, see 13.2.1 Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
NOTE
and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the 52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.
1. Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/
TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the 52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, refer
to 13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The service
in the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service in the protection channel must be set
as unidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) in the working channel port, and port 10 (RX8/TX8)
is the protection channel port.
Step 6 Configure the selective receiving feature for the WDM side of the 52TOM board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Port Protection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End

Between Eight Any Services and One ODU1 Electrical
Signal
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and one
ODU1 electrical signal.

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses eight Any services
(100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and then converts them into one ODU1 service. The ODU1 service
is accessed to the 52NS2 board on station A, and is then converged with other accessed services
as one OTU2 service.
Figure 8-6 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary mode in cascading
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, a 52TOM board and a 52NS2 board should be configured on both station A and
station B.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 8-7 shows the service signal flow on station A.

A A
52TOM 52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
The client-side optical interface can not be set to Client Side Color Optical Port.
NOTE
NOTE
Services can be input through the eight pairs of client-side optical ports at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
Procedure
then set Port Working Mode to ODU1 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU1). For details, see 13.14
Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Cross-Connections.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 4 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 services between the 52TOM and 52NS2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End

(with ODU1 mapping)

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. At station A, the 52TOM board accesses six Any services (100
52TOM board performs dual transmitting and selective receiving.
Figure 8-8 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary & line mode in
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE

In this example, a 52TOM board should be configured on both station A and station B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


A
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3) 9(RX7/TX7)
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
6(RX4/TX4) 10(RX8/TX8)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
l For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, the client-side interfaces can access up to
only one channel. And this service can be configured in only the first ClientLP port.
l In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Procedure
then set Port Working Mode to ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode(Any->ODU1->OTU1). For
details, refer to 13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When the 52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, the Type of this optical interface must be
changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.
planning. For details, refer to 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
board for the Any services of the board. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the 52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.
1. Configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port to ports 9 (RX7/
TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the 52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, refer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The service
in the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service in the protection channel must be set
as unidirectional. In this example, port 9 (RX7/TX7) in the working channel port, and port 10 (RX8/TX8)
is the protection channel port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
that are set.
----End

Between Eight Any Services and Eight ODU0 or Four ODU1
Electrical Signals
between eight channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and eight
channels of ODU0 electrical signals or four channels of ODU1 electrical signals.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
52TOM board.

Service Requirement
On station A, the 52TOM board accesses eight Any services and then converts them into eight
ODU0 or four ODU1 services. The eight ODU0 or four ODU1 services are then sent to two
52NS2 boards on station A according to the actual service requirement. Each 52NS2 board
converges the received ODU0 or ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2
service.
Figure 8-10 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary mode in non-cascading
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT213 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A User3
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT212 52NS2 SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT215 52TOM SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE


In this example, a 52TOM board and two 52NS2 boards should be configured on station A. A
52TOM board and a 52NS2 board should be configured on station B and station D.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, the signal flow on station A is as
shown in Figure 8-11. When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, the signal flow on station
A is as shown in Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-11 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board
A A
52TOM 52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2

204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 1(IN/OUT)

207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
10(RX8/TX8) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2

: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel
Figure 8-12 Signal flow on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCS board
A A
52TOM 52NS2
4(RX2/TX2) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1

6(RX4/TX4)
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, cannot groom the ODU1 service in Non-
Cascading ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode.
l When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, cannot groom the ODU0 service in Non-Cascading
ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode.
NOTE
NOTE
l If a channel of the ClientLP1 port and a channel of the ClientLP2 port are identified by a same number,
these two channels cannot be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
channel is configured with a service type, you cannot configure a service type for the 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1 channel. ClentLP3 and ClientLP4, ClientLP5 and ClientLP6, and ClientLP7 and
ClientLP8 are also under this restriction.
l The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the 52TOM board: Set Board Working mode to Non-Cascading
and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP interfaces to ODU0 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). For details, see 13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the
52TOM Board.
Step 3 Configure the cross-connections for the eight Any services that are input to the 52TOM board.
Cross-Connections.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Step 4 Configure cross-connections for the eight ODU0 services between the 52TOM and 52NS2
boards.
NOTE
In Non-Cascading ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode, only when the cross-connect

board is the XCM or XCH board supports this scenario.
1. Configure a cross-connection for one ODU0 service between the 52TOM and 52NS2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure a cross-connection for the other ODU0 service between the
52TOM and 52NS2 boards.
Step 5 Configure cross-connections for the four ODU1 services between the 52TOM and 52NS2
NOTE
In Non-Cascading ODU0 Tributary Mode(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) mode, only when the cross-connect

board is the XCS board supports this scenario.
When an ODU1 cross-connection is created, an intra-board ODU0 cross-connection is created
automatcially from the ClientIP port to the ODU0LP port on the 52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End

Between Four Any Services and Two OTU1 Optical Signals
between four channels of optical signals of any rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and two
channels of OTU1 optical signals, and how to realize the dual fed and selective receiving function
on the WDM side. If only set two of optical interfaces 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/
TX7), or 10 (RX8/TX8) as WDM-side optical interfaces, the 52TOM can implement the
conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical signals, and the other
configuration can be performed by referring to the following steps.

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Two bidirectional OTU1 services are available
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses four Any services
and then converts them into two OTU2 services.
Figure 8-13 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU0 tributary & line mode in non-
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE


In this example, a 52TOM board should be configured on station A and station B.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Two OTU1 service is available between station A and station B.

A
52TOM
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 9(RX7/TX7)
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l The client-side optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
l When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 or ClientLP3 port is the same as that of a route of the
ClientLP2 or ClientLP4 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same
time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/
ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.
l The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as you like.
NOTE
l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 do not support the Non-Cascading ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode(Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode.
l Before the working modes of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports are set to ODU0 Tributary-Line
Mode(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1), the working modes of the ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 ports must
be set to NONE Mode(Not for Port).
Procedure
and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP interfaces to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode
(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of
the 52TOM Board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) to Line Side
Color Optical Port. For details, see 12.2.3 Modifying Port.
NOTE
When the 52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, the Type of the optical interface used as WDM
side interface must be changed to Line Side Color Optical Port.
Step 4 Configure the cross-connections for the four Any services that are input to the 52TOM board.
NOTE
Cross-Connections.
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Configure two separate cross-connections from the ODU1LP port to WDM side ports on the
52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.
1. Configure two separate cross-connections from the ODU1LP port to ports 7 (RX5/TX5)
and 8 (RX6/TX6) for the 52TOM board to achieve dual feeding. For details, see 13.2.1
Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The working channel port and the protection channel port are the two ports for dual feeding. The
service in the working channel must be set as bidirectional, and the service in the protection channel
must be set as unidirectional. In this example, port 7 (RX5/TX5) in the working channel port, and
port 8 (RX6/TX6) is the protection channel port.
2. Repeat Step 5.1 to configure two separate cross-connections from the internal logical port
to ports 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the 52TOM board to achieve dual feeding.
2. In the Port Protection user port, click New. In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click
For details of parameters, see the Feature Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
that are set.
5. Repeat Step 6.2 and Step 6.3 to configure the selective receiving feature of the ports 9
(RX7/TX7) and 10 (RX8/TX8) for the 52TOM board.
----End

Between Eight Any or Four OTU1 Services and Four ODU1
Electrical Signals
between eight channels of Any or four channels of OTU1 services and four channels ODU1
electrical signals.

This section describes how to configure 52TOM board for a ring network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

52TOM board.

Service Requirement
See Figure 8-15. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, C and D form a ring network, and all the ONEs
function as OADM stations.
On station A, the 52TOM board accesses eight Any services (100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s) or four
OTU1 services and then converts them into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are
then sent to two 52NS2 boards on station A according to the actual services requirement. Each
52NS2 board converges the received ODU1 services and other accessed services into one OTU2
service.
Figure 8-15 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary mode application 1 in
non-cascading mode) in application scenario 7
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT213 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A User3
D
B
C
EAST WEST
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, a 52TOM board and two 52NS2 boards should be configured on station A. A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A A
52TOM 52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
7(RX5/TX5) 1(IN/OUT)

: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service
can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the Working Mode of the 52TOM board: Set Board Working modeto Non-Cascading
and then set Port Working Mode of all the ClientLP interfaces to Application 1 of ODU1
Tributary Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). For details, refer to 13.14 Configuring the Working
Mode of the 52TOM Board.
Step 2 Optional: Set the Service Mode of the client-side interface of 52TOM as OTN Mode. For
details, refer to 13.16 Configuring the Service Mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When the 52TOM board accesses OTU1 services on the client side, you first need to set the Service
Mode of the 52TOM board to OTN Mode.
Step 4 Configure the Any/OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP interfaces on the
52TOM board.
1. Configure an Any/OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) interface and the 201
(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) interface on 52TOM board. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Creating
Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining Any/OTU1 services.
Step 5 Configure electrical cross-connections for the ODU1 service between the 52TOM and 52NS2
boards.
1. Configure an ODU1 cross-connection between the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) interface on
52TOM board and the 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP) interface on 52NS2 board. For details, refer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Repeat Step 5.1 to configure ODU1 cross-connections between other 52TOM and 52NS2
boards.
----End

Between Four OTU1 Services and Eight ODU0 Electrical
Signals
between four channels of OTU1 services and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals.

52TOM board.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Service Requirement
On station A, the 52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services and then converts them into eight
ODU0 services. The eight ODU0 services are then sent to two 52NS2 boards on the station A
according to the actual services requirement. Each 52NS2 board converges the received ODU0
services and other accessed services into one OTU2 service.
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT213 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A User3
D
B
C
EAST WEST
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, a 52TOM board and two 52NS2 boards should be configured on station A, a


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 8-18 Bidirectional service on station A when the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board
A A
52TOM 52NS2
3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
1(IN/OUT)
6(RX4/TX4) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
When the cross-connect board is the XCS board, do not support Application 2 of ODU1 Tributary Mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode.
NOTE
l A ClientLP port can access only one service that has a rate higher than 1.25 Gbit/s, and this service
can be configured in only the first channel of the ClientLP port.
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be selected as required.
Procedure
Tributary Mode(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). For details, see 13.14 Configuring the Working
Mode of the 52TOM Board.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Configure the Service Type at the WDM Interface of the 52TOM as OTU-1 according to the
service planning. For details, see 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
Step 4 Configure the OTU1 cross-connection between the RX/TX and ClientLP interfaces on the
52TOM board.
1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 3(RX1/TX1) interface and the 201
Cross-Connections.
NOTE
2. Repeat Step 4.1 to configure the remaining OTU1 services.
Step 5 Configure ODU0 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards.
1. Configure an ODU0 cross-connection between the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) interface
on 52TOM board and the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) interface on 52NS2 board. For
details, see 13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
boards.
----End

Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Eight ODU0
Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)
between four channels OTU1 optical signals and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services
and then converts them into eight ODU0 services through Any re-encapsulation. The ODU0
services are then sent to the 52NS2 board on station A, where they are converted into one OTU2
service.
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT214 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE


In this example, two 52TOM boards and a 52NS2 board should be configured on station A. A
52TOM board and a 52NS2 board should be configured on station B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


A A
52TOM 52NS2
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8
5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1
241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, do not support Application 3 of ODU1
Tributary Mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode.
NOTE
Each optical interface supports access of services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.
NOTE
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the 52TOM board supports de-encapsulation and
then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Tributary Mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). For details, see 13.14 Configuring the
Working Mode of the 52TOM Board.
NOTE
Step 3 Set the Service Type for the WDM Interface on the 52TOM board to OTU-1 and also set the
Service Type for the in-use AnyLP interfaces according to the service planning. For details,
refer to 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
52TOM board.
Cross-Connections.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Configure internal cross-connections of the Any service on the 52TOM board to reshuffle the
Any services on the board.
NOTE
1. Configuring an Any cross-connection in the 52TOM board. For details, refer to 13.2.1
NOTE
Services of the AnyLP1 port can only be configured on the AnyLP5 and AnyLP6 ports. Services of
the AnyLP2 port can only be configured on the AnyLP7 and AnyLP8 ports. The rest may be deduced
by analogy.
1. Configure an ODU0 cross-connection between the 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5) interface on
52TOM board and the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) interface on 52NS2 board. For details,
see 13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
boards.
----End

Between Four OTU1 Optical Signals and Four ODU1
Electrical Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)
between four channels OTU1 optical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services
and then converts them into four ODU1 services through Any re-encapsulation. The ODU1
services are then sent to the 52NS2 board on station A, where they are converted into one OTU2
service.
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
SLOT214 52TOM
SLOT212 52NS2
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT212 52NS2
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM

In this example, two 52TOM boards and a 52NS2 board should be configured on station A. A
52TOM board and a 52NS2 board should be configured on station B.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A A
52TOM 52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
When the cross-connect board is the XCM or XCH board, do not support Application 4 of ODU1
Tributary Mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0- >ODU1) in non-cascading mode.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the 52TOM board supports de-encapsulation and
then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
Procedure
Tributary Mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0- >ODU1).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
52TOM board.
Cross-Connections.
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
by analogy.
1. Configure an ODU1 cross-connection between the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) interface
on 52TOM board and the 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP) interface on 52NS2 board. For details,
refer to13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
boards.
----End

Between Two OTU1 Optical Signals and Two OTU1 Optical
Signals (Through Any Re-Encapsulation)
between two channels OTU1 optical signals and two channels OTU1 optical signals through
Any re-encapsulation.

52TOM board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Two bidirectional OTU1 service is available
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses two OTU1 services
and then converts them into two OTU1 services through Any re-encapsulation.
Figure 8-23 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary&line mode application
1 in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 11
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM


Two OTU1 service is available between station A and station B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A
52TOM
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(RX7/TX7)
162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

52TOM board.
Precautions
NOTE
l The client-side optical interfaces only can access two OTU1 services, and the OTU1 service can be
l When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the 52TOM board supports de-encapsulation
and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
NOTE
Procedure
and then set Port Working Mode of ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 to Application 1 of ODU1
Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any- >ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
NOTE
l The ClientLP5 and ClientLP7 do not support the Non-Cascading Application 1 of ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any- >ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) mode
l Before the working mode of the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 are set to Application 1 of ODU1 Tributary-
Line Mode(OTU1->ODU1->Any- >ODU0->ODU1->OTU1), the working modes of the ClientLP5 and
ClientLP7 ports must be set to NONE Mode (Not for Port).
NOTE
When the 52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module
must be inserted in the WDM-side optical interface, and the Type of this optical interface must be changed
to Line Side Color Optical Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Set the Service Mode of the client-side interface of 52TOM as OTN Mode. For details, refer
to 13.16 Configuring the Service Mode.
NOTE
52TOM board.
Cross-Connections.
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
by analogy.
Step 7 Configure the OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP and RX/TX interface on 52TOM
board.
1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and the 9
(RX7/TX7) on 52TOM board. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
----End
8.14 Application Scenario 12: Realizes the Regeneration of

Four OTU1 Optical Signals
This configuration example shows how the 52TOM board is configured to implement electrical
regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. If you set only two of the 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6),
9(RX7/TX7), and 10(RX8/TX8) optical interfaces as WDM-side optical interfaces, the 52TOM
board can implement conversion between six Any services and two channels of OTU1 optical
signals. If the 7(RX5/TX5) and 8(RX6/TX6) optical interfaces are configured as one protection
group and the 9(RX7/TX7) and 10(RX8/TX8) optical interfaces are configured are another
protection group, the 52TOM board can implement conversion between four Any services and
two channels of OTU1 opticalsignals and the dual-fed and selective receiving function on the
WDM side.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This section considers station A which the 52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services as an
example to describe the configuration process of the 52TOM board.

Service Requirement
User1 and User2 communicate with each other. Four bidirectional OTU1 service is available
between station A and station B. On station A, the 52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services,
decapsulates them into four ODU1 electrical signals, and then converts them into four OTU1
services. In this way, the electrical regeneration is complete.
Figure 8-25 Networking diagram for the 52TOM board (ODU1 tributary & line mode
application 2 in non-cascading mode) in application scenario 12
User1
SLOT215 52TOM
EAST WEST
NMS
WEST EAST
User2 A
D
B
C
EAST WEST
SLOT215 52TOM
WEST EAST
:OADM
NOTE



OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Four OTU1 services is available between station A and station B.
A
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5)
: WDM-side services
: Virtual channel

This section considers station A which the 52TOM board accesses four OTU1 services as an
example to describe the configuration process of the 52TOM board.
Context
NOTE
Procedure
Tributary-Line Mode(OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1). For details, see 13.14 Configuring the
Working Mode of the 52TOM Board.
Step 2 Set the type of ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2), 5 (RX3/TX3) and 6 (RX4/TX4) to Client Side
Color Optical Port. Set the type of ports 7 (RX5/TX5), 8 (RX6/TX6), 9 (RX7/TX7) and 10
(RX8/TX8) to Line Side Color Optical Port. For details, see 12.2.3 Modifying Port.
NOTE
When the 52TOM board is used as a tributary & line board, a corresponding WDM-side optical module
must be inserted in the WDM-side optical interface, and the Type of this optical interface must be changed
to Line Side Color Optical Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Set Service Mode of the 52TOM board to OTN Mode. For details, see 13.16 Configuring the
Service Mode.
NOTE
Step 4 Configure the Service Type at the WDM interface of the 52TOM as OTU1 according to the
service planning. For details, see 13.6 Configuring the Service Type.
board for the OTU1 services of the board.
1. Configure the cross-connections from the RX/TX ports to the ClientLP ports for the OTU1
services that are input to the 52TOM board. For details, see 13.2.1 Creating Cross-
Connections.
NOTE
2. Repeat Step 5.1 to configure cross-connections for the other OTU1 services.
Step 6 Configure the OTU1 cross-connections between the ODU1LP and RX/TX interface on 52TOM
board.
1. Configure an OTU1 cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and the 7
(RX5/TX5) on 52TOM board. For details, refer to 13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
----End
8.15 Working Mode

In this user interface, you can set working modes of the 52TOM board and ports on the board.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select a 52TOM board, and choose Configuration > Working Mode from
the Function Tree.
Parameters
Board Working Mode Cascading, Non-Cascading Sets the working mode of the
board.
Optical Port For example, ClientLP1 Displays the name of the

optical interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Port Working Mode In the Cascading mode: Sets the working mode of the
l ODU0 Tributary Mode port on the board.
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) NOTE
l ODU0 Tributary-Line l [->**] indicates that this

Mode(Any->ODU0- segment is optional. For
example, in the case of the
>ODU1->OTU1) ODU0 tributary mode of the
l ODU1 Tributary Mode non-cascading mode, there
(Any->ODU1) are two paths of processing
services as follows: Any-
l ODU1Tributary-Line >ODU0 and Any->ODU0-
Mode(Any->ODU1- >ODU1.
>OTU1) l If the NONE mode is
l NONE Mode(Not for selected, it indicates that the
Port) resources of the port are not
used and are released for
In the Non-Cascading mode: other ports.
l ODU0 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line
Mode(Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)
l Application 1 of ODU1
Tributary Mode(OTU1/
Any->ODU1)
Tributary Mode(OTU1-
>ODU1->ODU0)
>ODU1->Any->ODU0)
>ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1)
Tributary-Line Mode
(OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1)
Tributary-Line Mode
(OTU1/Any->ODU1-
>OTU1)
l NONE Mode(Not for
Port)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 9 Configuring SDH Services
9 Configuring SDH Services
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports SDH boards. Hence, the OptiX OSN 8800 can be interconnected
to the SDH equipment. When you configure an SDH service for the OptiX OSN 8800, you can
configure the SDH service on a per-NE basis. In this way, you can specify the timeslot and route
for the service on each NE.
9.1 Configuring SDH Services
This topic describes the process of configuring SDH services. The process consists of deploying
a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE,
and verifying services.
9.2 SDH Service Overhead
This topic describes the SDH overheads, including J0, J1, and C2, that the OptiX OSN 8800
supports.
9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring
Configure the protection and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection before configuring services on the non-
protection ring.
9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services
In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, the source NE dual-feeds service signals to the working and
protection lines. In normal conditions, the sink NE selectively receives the services from the
working line. When the working line is faulty, the sink NE selectively receives the services from
the protection line.
9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Services
To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP protection
and MSP services. There is no requirement for the sequence of creating the MSP protection and
MSP services.
9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services
With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring.
It can protect services on the two SNCP rings when one fiber between any adjacent stations on
each ring is cut. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on the
tangent node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured with
four pairs of protection groups.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9 Configuring SDH Services Web LCT Operation Guide
9.7 Parameter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.1 Configuring SDH Services

This topic describes the process of configuring SDH services. The process consists of deploying
a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink NE, configuring a pass-through NE,
and verifying services.
Figure 9-1 shows the process of configuring SDH services.
Figure 9-1 SDH service configuration process

Required
Optional
Configure the Configure the Configure pass- Maintenance for Verify

Deploy a network
source NE sink NE through NEs SDH services services
Create and Querying the NE Querying the NE Querying the NE Change SDH Test SDH
configure NEs Software Version Software Version Software Version services services
Create fibers Querying the Querying the Create SDH Delete SDH
Capacity of Lower Capacity of Lower services services
Order Cross- Order Cross-
Configure the Connections Connections
communication
Create SDH Create SDH

Set the NE time services services
Create SNCP Create SNCP

Configure clocks services services
Configure the
orderwire
Configure the
protection
NOTE
l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart, there are six main phases of SDH service
configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring the source NE, configuring the sink
NE, configuring a pass-through NE, maintenance for SDH services, and verifying services.
l The portrait orientation of the flow chart shows the relations between operation tasks in each phase.
9.2 SDH Service Overhead

This topic describes the SDH overheads, including J0, J1, and C2, that the OptiX OSN 8800
supports.
9.2.1 Trace Byte

Trace bytes are used to trace the connection status between the receive end and transmit end.
The trace bytes can be used to detect and solve problems in advance to prevent transmitted
services from being affected. This decreases the network restoration time to a great extent.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.2.2 Signal Label Byte

This topic describes the locations and functions of the signal label bytes C2 in SDH overheads.
9.2.1 Trace Byte

The trace bytes can be used to detect and solve problems in advance to prevent transmitted
services from being affected. This decreases the network restoration time to a great extent.
J0 Byte
The J0 byte is located at line 1 and column (6N+1) in a STM-N frame.
The J0 byte is the regenerator section trace byte. The J0 byte is continuously to carry an access
point identifier of a regenerator section, according to which the receive end verifies the
continuous connection to the intended transmit end.
J1 Byte
The J1 byte is the first byte in a virtual container (VC) and its location is indicated by the relevant
pointer.
The J1 byte is the higher order path trace byte. The J1 byte is used to repetitively transmit the
access point identifier of a higher order path (HO APId) so that the receive end of the path can
verify its continuous connection to the intended transmit end. The J1 byte can be used to detect
and solve problems in advance to prevent transmitted services from being affected. This
decreases the network restoration time to a great extent.
9.2.2 Signal Label Byte

This topic describes the locations and functions of the signal label bytes C2 in SDH overheads.
C2 Byte
The C2 byte is the third byte in a VC.
C2 is the signal label byte, which is used to indicate the multiplexing structure of VC frames
and the payload property. The sent C2 byte must match the received C2 byte. If C2 mismatch
occurs, an HP_SLM alarm is generated in the corresponding VC4 path at the local end.
9.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring

Configure the protection and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection before configuring services on the non-
protection ring.

You can configure a non-protection ring if the services on the ring do not need to be protected.
In this case, all the timeslots on the ring can carry services.
9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure services on the non-protection ring, you need to plan the traffic direction and
timeslot allocation for the services on the non-protection ring.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Configuration of the services on the non-protection ring is not related to the configuration of the
protection. To configure the services on the non-protection ring, configure the SDH services on
the source and sink NEs and the pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if the protection
is already created.

You can configure a non-protection ring if the services on the ring do not need to be protected.
In this case, all the timeslots on the ring can carry services.
Figure 9-2 shows a non-protection ring that consists of four NEs. NE1, NE2, NE3 and NE4 are
the OptiX OSN 8800. In this example, the source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE3 use the SLO16
boards to add or drop services, and use the SLQ64 boards to transmit SDH services. NE2 and
NE4 use the SLQ64 boards to pass through the SDH services.
Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of a non-protection
18-SLO16
17-SLQ64
West East
East NE1
01-SLQ64 Two-fiber bidirectional 01-SLQ64

17-SLQ64 non-protection ring 17-SLQ64
NE2 NE4
West
NE3
East West
18-SLO16
17-SLQ64
: OptiX OSN 8800

To configure services on the non-protection ring, you need to plan the traffic direction and
timeslot allocation for the services on the non-protection ring.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-3 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, five STM-1 services
are added to or dropped from the source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE3, and the STM-1 services
pass through the intermediate NE NE2.
Figure 9-3 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the services on the non-protection ring
NE1:
5xSTM-1 17-SLQ64
VC4-1:1-5 18-SLO16
NE2: NE1
01-SLQ64
17-SLQ64
VC4-1:1-5 Two-fiber bidirectional 线路

NE2 NE4 板
Pass-through service non-protection ring
NE3
NE3:
VC4-1:1-5 17-SLQ64
18-SLO16
5xSTM-1
: Traffic direction : Line board

Configuration of the services on the non-protection ring is not related to the configuration of the
protection. To configure the services on the non-protection ring, configure the SDH services on
the source and sink NEs and the pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if the protection
is already created.
Prerequisite
The physical topology of the network must be created.
You must be familiar with the contents in 9.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Configure an SDH service for the source NE NE1.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and choose Configuration > Cross Connection
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create in the lower-right pane and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog
box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example
Level VC4 In this example, STM-1 services are configured. Hence,

Level of the STM-1 services is set to VC4.
Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the services are transmitted and received
l over the same path. That is, the services are
Bidirectional services.
Source Slot 18- In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 18 of NE1 is
N4SLO16-1 configured as the source board. See Figure 9-3.
(SDH-1)
Source VC4 - In this example, five STM-1 services are configured

between NE1-NE3. Hence, the source VC4 is not
configured.
Source 1-5 In this example, five STM-1 services are configured

Timeslot between NE1-NE3. Hence, the source timeslot range is
Range (e.g. configured as 1-5.
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 17- In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 17 of NE1 is
N4SLQ64-1 configured as the sink board. See Figure 9-3.
(SDH-1)
Sink VC4 - In this example, five STM-1 services are configured

between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is not
configured.
Sink 1-5 In this example, five STM-1 services are configured

Timeslot between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink timeslot range is
1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 2 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE3. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service on
NE3. Set the following parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
over the same path. That is, the services are Bidirectional
services.
Source Slot 18- In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 18 of NE3 is
N4SLO16-1 configured as the source board. See Figure 9-3.
(SDH-1)

configured.

1,3-6)
(SDH-1)

between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is not configured.
Sink Timeslot 1-5 In this example, five STM-1 services are configured
Range (e.g. between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink timeslot range is
1,3-6) configured as 1-5.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 3 Configure pass-through services on the intermediate NE NE2.

1. Select NE2 from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Cross Connection
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
This
Example


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
l over the same path. That is, the services are
Bidirectional services.
Source Slot 01- In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 01 of NE2 is
N4SLQ64-1 configured as the source board. See Figure 9-3.
(SDH-1)

configured.

1,3-6)
(SDH-1)

between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink VC4 is not
configured.
Sink 1-5 In this example, five STM-1 services are configured

Timeslot between NE1-NE3. Hence, the sink timeslot range is
1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see Verifying the Correctness
of the Service Configuration.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 4.2.2 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Select a proper one from the following three methods
depending on the actual situation.
Option Description
When the system control and communication Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
board is not configured with the CF card Board.
When the system control and communication Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a
board is configured with the CF card CF Card.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services

In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, the source NE dual-feeds service signals to the working and
protection lines. In normal conditions, the sink NE selectively receives the services from the
working line. When the working line is faulty, the sink NE selectively receives the services from
the protection line.

This topic describes the configuration of 1+1 linear MSP. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as only
the intermediate NE that transmits an SDH service. The OptiX OSN 3500 adds or drops the SDH
service.
You can configure the service added to the source NE and dropped to the sink NE if the 1+1
linear MSP is already created.
This topic describes how to configure the 1+1 linear MSP services.

This topic describes the configuration of 1+1 linear MSP. The OptiX OSN 8800 is used as only
the intermediate NE that transmits an SDH service. The OptiX OSN 3500 adds or drops the SDH
service.
In Figure 9-4, NE1, NE2, NE5, and NE6 use the OptiX OSN 3500, and the intermediate NEs
NE3 and NE4 use the OptiX OSN 8800. In this example, the OptiX OSN 3500 adds or drops
the SDH service, and the OptiX OSN 8800 only transmits the SDH service instead of adding or
dropping the SDH service. NE1, NE2, NE5, and NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributary boards
that add or drop the SDH service, and use the SL16 boards as the line boards that transmit the
SDH service. The intermediate NEs NE3 and NE4 use the SLO16 boards as the line boards that
dual-feed or selectively receive the SDH service, and use the SLQ64 boards as the line boards
that transmit the SDH service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-4 Networking diagram of the 1+1 linear MSP

Tributary board 2-PQ1 Tributary board 2-PQ1
Line board 7-SL16 Line board 7-SL16
NE1 NE6
NE3 NE4
Line board 7-SLO16 Line board 7-SLO16
Line board 8-SLQ64 Line board 8-SLQ64
NE2 Line board 12-SLQ64 Line board 12-SLQ64 NE5
: OptiX OSN 8800 : OptiX OSN 3500

You can configure the service added to the source NE and dropped to the sink NE if the 1+1
linear MSP is already created.
Figure 9-5 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation between NE1 and NE6.
l The service flow from NE1 to NE6 is as follows: NE1→NE3→NE4→NE6.
A service is added to the source NE NE1, cross-connected from the tributary board PQ1 to
the line board SL16, and then transmitted to the intermediate NE3. The line board SLO16
dual-feeds the service to the line board SLQ64 through the working and protection lines.
The two services are received by the line board SLQ64 on the intermediate NE4, and the
line board SLO16 selects one of the two services and then transmits the service to the sink
NE6. The service is dropped to NE6, and cross-connected from the line board SL16 to the
tributary board PQ1.
l The services between NE1 and NE6 use the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4
(VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link between NE1 and NE6. There are totally four
E1 services.
Figure 9-5 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation between NE2 and NE5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The services between NE2 and NE3 occupy the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4
(VC12)) in the first VC4 on the SDH link. There are totally four E1 services.
l The services between NE3 and NE4 occupy the fifth to eighth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:5-8
l The services between NE4 and NE5 occupy the first to fourth VC12 timeslots (VC4-1:1-4
Figure 9-5 Signal flow and timeslot allocation of the 1+1 linear MSP service
VC4-1:1-4(VC12) VC4-1:1-4(VC12)
4xE1 services 4xE1 services
are added/ VC4-1:1-4(VC12) are added/
VC4-1:1-4(VC12)
dropped dropped
NE1 NE6
NE2 NE5
4xE1 services NE3 NE4 4xE1 services
are added/ VC4-1:5-8(VC12) VC4-1:5-8(VC12) are added/
dropped dropped
Line board 7-SLO16 Line board 7-SLO16
VC4-1:1-4(VC12) VC4-1:1-4(VC12)
Line board 8-SLQ64 Line board 8-SLQ64
Tributary board 2-PQ1 Line board 12-SLQ64 Line board 12-SLQ64 Tributary board 2-PQ1
: Line Board : Tributary board
: Traffic direction of the working : Traffic direction of the protection

path path

This topic describes how to configure the 1+1 linear MSP services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The physical topology of the network must be created.
The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the Web LCT.
Procedure

This
Example
Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence,

Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.
l over the same path. That is, the services are bidirectional
services. Hence, Direction of the services is set to
Bidirectional.
Source Slot 2-PQ1 In this example, the PQ1 board in slot 2 is configured as
the source tributary board for the bidirectional services.
See Figure 9-5.
Source VC4 - -
Source 1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to

Timeslot the plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is
Range (e.g. set to 1-4
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 7-N1SL16-1 In this example, the SL16 board in slot 7 is configured
(SDH-1) as the sink line board. See Figure 9-5.
Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a
result, Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4
contains 63 VC12s.
Sink 1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to

Timeslot the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is
Range (e.g. set to 1-4.
1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Configure another SDH service for the source NE NE2. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH
service on NE2. Set the following parameters.
This
Example
Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence, Level

of the E1 services is set to VC12.
over the same path. That is, the services are bidirectional
Bidirectional.
Source Slot 2-PQ1 In this example, the PQ1 board in slot 2 is configured as the
source tributary board for the bidirectional services. See
Figure 9-5.
Source VC4 - -
Source 1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to the
Timeslot plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to
Range (e.g. 1-4
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 7-N1SL16-1 In this example, the SL16 board in slot 7 is configured as
(SDH-1) the sink line board. See Figure 9-5.
Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a result,
Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4 contains 63
VC12s.
Sink Timeslot 1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to the
Range (e.g. plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to
1,3-6) 1-4.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 3 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE NE6. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service
on NE6. Set the following parameters.
This
Example

Bidirectional.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Figure 9-5.
Source VC4 - -
Range (e.g. 1-4
1,3-6)
VC12s.
1,3-6) 1-4.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 4 Configure another SDH service for the sink NE NE5. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH
This
Example

Bidirectional.
Figure 9-5.
Source VC4 - -
Range (e.g. 1-4
1,3-6)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
VC12s.
1,3-6) 1-4.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 5 Configure an SDH service for the intermediate NE NE3.

This
Example
Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are configured. Hence,

Bidirectional.
Source Slot 7-N4SLO16 In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured
(SDH-1) as the source line board. See Figure 9-5.
Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a
result, Source VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4
contains 63 VC12s.
Source 1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to

Timeslot the plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is
Range (e.g. set to 1-4
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 8- In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured

N4SLQ64-1 as the sink line board. See Figure 9-5.
(SDH-1)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a
result, Sink VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4
contains 63 VC12s.
Sink 1-4 The total capacity of the services is 4xE1 according to

Timeslot the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is
Range (e.g. set to 1-4.
1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 6 Configure another SDH service for the intermediate NE NE3. See Step Step 5 to configure the
SDH service on NE3. Set the following parameters.
This
Example

Bidirectional.
Source Slot 7-N4SLO16 In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as
(SDH-2) the source line board. See Figure 9-5.
Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require four VC12s. As a result,
Source VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC4 contains 63
VC12s.
Range (e.g. 1-4
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 12- In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as
N4SLQ64-1 the sink line board. See Figure 9-5.
(SDH-1)
VC12s.
1,3-6) 5-8.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 7 Configure an SDH service for the intermediate NE NE4. See Step Step 5 to configure the SDH
This
Example

Bidirectional.
Source Slot 8- In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as

N4SLQ64-1 the source line board. See Figure 9-5.
(SDH-1)
VC12s.
Range (e.g. 1-4
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 7-N4SLO16 In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as
VC12s.
1,3-6) 1-4.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 8 Configure another SDH service for the intermediate NE NE4. See Step Step 5 to configure the
SDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

Bidirectional.
Source Slot 12- In this example, the SLQ64 board in slot 8 is configured as
N4SLQ64-1 the source line board. See Figure 9-5.
(SDH-1)
VC12s.
Range (e.g. 1-4
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 7-N4SLO16 In this example, the SLO16 board in slot 7 is configured as
VC12s.
Range(e.g. plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range (e.g. 1, 3-6) is set to
1,3-6) 5-8.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Option Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Option Description
----End
9.5 Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring

Services
To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP protection
and MSP services. There is no requirement for the sequence of creating the MSP protection and
MSP services.

In the network construction, you should create and name NEs in sequence according to the certain
direction, which helps you facilitate the planning of the service flow and service configuration.
If you have created an MSP, you can configure a service on a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
as follows: The source NE adds a service, an NE accesses the service to the ring network, the
intermediate NE passes through the service, an NE transmits the service out of the ring network,
and then the sink NE drops the service. The service on a ring network has more than one route
from the source NE to the sink NE. You need not configure all routes in actual situations. Hence,
it is important that you plan and configure the flow of service signals and timeslot allocation
properly before you configure a service.
The configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service is independent of creation of its
MSP protection. In the case that the protection is created, you need to respectively configure
SDH services from the tributary board to the line board on the source NE and the destination
NE, and configure the pass-through service on the intermediate NE.

In the network construction, you should create and name NEs in sequence according to the certain
direction, which helps you facilitate the planning of the service flow and service configuration.
In the networking diagram shown in Figure 9-6, a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring that consists
of four OptiX OSN 8800 NEs. The OptiX OSN 3500 NEs at the source and sink ends are used
to add or drop services. In this example, the source NE NE5 and the sink NE NE6 use the PQ1
boards as the tributary boards that add or drop services, and use the SL16 boards as the line
boards that transmit SDH services. NE2 and NE4 on the ring use the SLO16 boards to receive
the services sent from the OptiX OSN 3500 or to transmit the services to the OptiX OSN
3500, and use the SLQ64 boards to transmit the SDH services. NE1 and NE3 on the ring uses
the SLQ64 board to transparently transmit the SDH services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-6 Networking of two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

12-SLQ64
8-SLQ64
12-SLQ64 12-SLQ64
8-SLQ64 8-SLQ64
7-SLO16 NE1 7-SLO16
Two-fiber bidirectional
NE2 NE4
MSP ring
NE5 NE6
NE3
Tributary board: 2-PQ1 Tributary board: 2-PQ1
Line board: 7-SL16 Line board: 7-SL16
12-SLQ64
8-SLQ64

If you have created an MSP, you can configure a service on a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
as follows: The source NE adds a service, an NE accesses the service to the ring network, the
intermediate NE passes through the service, an NE transmits the service out of the ring network,
and then the sink NE drops the service. The service on a ring network has more than one route
from the source NE to the sink NE. You need not configure all routes in actual situations. Hence,
it is important that you plan and configure the flow of service signals and timeslot allocation
properly before you configure a service.
Figure 9-7 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation of a service. In this example, NE5 adds
a service, NE2 accesses the service to the ring network, NE1 passes through the service, NE4
transmits the service out of the network, and NE6 drops the service. There are totally five E1
services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-7 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

12-SLQ64
8-SLQ64
VC4-1:1-5(VC12) NE1
12-SLQ64 12-SLQ64
线路
板
8-SLQ64 8-SLQ64
7-SLO16 7-SLO16
VC4-1:1-5(VC12) VC4-1:1-5(VC12)
线路
线路
Two-fiber bidirectional
板
MSP ring
5xE1 services are 5xE1 services are
added/dropped added/dropped
NE5 NE2 NE4 NE6
Tributary board: 2-PQ1 VC4-1:1-5(VC12) VC4-1:1-5(VC12) Tributary board: 2-PQ1
线路
板
VC4-1:1-5(VC12) NE3
12-SLQ64
8-SLQ64
: Traffic direction : Line board : Tributary board

The configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service is independent of creation of its
MSP protection. In the case that the protection is created, you need to respectively configure
SDH services from the tributary board to the line board on the source NE and the destination
NE, and configure the pass-through service on the intermediate NE.
Prerequisite
The physical network topology must be created.
NEs, boards, and fibers must be successfully created on the Web LCT.
Procedure
Parameter Value in Value Description

This
Example
Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are added and dropped.

Hence, Level of the E1 services is set to VC12.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Bidirectional.
Source Slot 2-PQ1 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,
the PQ1 housed in slot 2 serves as the source tributary
board. Different source boards can be selected according
to actual situations.
Source VC4 - -
Source 1-5 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,

Timeslot the total service volume is 5xE1. The service level is
Range(e.g. VC12, and thus the 5xVC12 need be set.
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 7-N1SL16-1 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,
(SDH-1) the SL16 housed in slot 7 serves as the sink line board.
Different sink boards can be selected according to actual
situations.
Sink VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the service requires 5xVC12. One VC4
timeslot contains 63xVC12. Hence, only the first VC4
timeslot need be set.
Sink 1-5 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,

1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 2 Configure an SDH service for the sink NE NE6. See Step Step 1 to configure the SDH service
on NE6. Set the following parameters.
This
Example
Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. Hence,
Bidirectional.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Source Slot 2-PQ1 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,
the PQ1 housed in slot 2 serves as the source tributary board.
Different sink boards can be selected according to actual
situations.
Source VC4 - -

1,3-6)
Sink Slot 7-N1SL16-1 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,
(SDH-1) the SL16 housed in slot 7 serves as the sink line board.
Different source boards can be selected according to actual
situations.
Sink Timeslot 1-5 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,
Range(e.g. the total service volume is 5xE1. The service level is
1,3-6) VC12, and thus the 5xVC12 need be set.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 3 Configure the SDH service for NE2 to access the SDH service to the ring network.
This
Example
Level VC12 In this example, E1 services are added and dropped. The
corresponding service level is set to VC12.
Bidirectional.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Source Slot 7- As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,

N4SLO16-1 the SLO16 housed in slot 7 serves as the source board.
(SDH-1) Different source boards can be selected according to
actual situations.
Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the service requires 5xVC12. One VC4

Range (e.g. VC12, and thus the 5xVC12 need be set.
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 8- As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,

N4SLQ64-1 the SLQ64 housed in slot 8 serves as the sink board.
(SDH-1) Different sink boards can be selected according to actual
situations.

1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 4 Configure the SDH service for NE4 to transmit the SDH service out of the ring network. See
Step Step 3 to configure the SDH service on NE4. Set the following parameters.
This
Example
Bidirectional.

N4SLQ64-1 the SLQ64 housed in slot 8 serves as the source board.
(SDH-1) Different source boards can be selected according to actual
situations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

1,3-6)

N4SLO16-1 the SLO16 housed in slot 7 serves as the sink board.
situations.
Sink Timeslot 1-5 As shown in Figure 9-7, in the planning of this example,
Range (e.g. the total service volume is 5xE1. The service level is
1,3-6) VC12, and thus the 5xVC12 need be set.
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 5 Configure the pass-through service for NE1.

This
Example
Bidirectional.
N4SLQ64-1 the SLQ64 housed in slot 12 serves as the source board.
(SDH-1) Different source boards can be selected according to
actual situations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

1,3-6)

N4SLQ64-1 the SLQ64 housed in slot 8 serves as the sink board.
situations.

1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Option Description
----End
9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services

With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring.
It can protect services on the two SNCP rings when one fiber between any adjacent stations on

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
each ring is cut. For service configuration of the SNCP tangent ring, you should focus on the
tangent node. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent node must be configured with
four pairs of protection groups.
The SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring in terms of physical networking
topology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional services in
the tangent point for the MSP ring. For the SNCP ring, however, you need to configure four
protection groups for each pair of bidirectional services.
9.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The service in the SNCP tangent ring is not transmitted in a fixed direction. The service flow
direction depends on the configuration of the working path and the protection path on each NE
where the SNCP protection group is configured. When configuring the SNCP protection group
on the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectional
service in the tangent point. The service timeslot allocation in the SNCP tangent ring is same as
the service timeslot allocation on a single SNCP ring.
For non-tangent nodes in the SNCP tangent rings, the service configuration is the same as the
service configuration in a single ring network. On tangent nodes, you need to configure four
SNCP protection groups for a bidirectional service.

The SNCP tangent ring is similar to the MSP tangent ring in terms of physical networking
topology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional services in
the tangent point for the MSP ring. For the SNCP ring, however, you need to configure four
protection groups for each pair of bidirectional services.
In the networking diagram shown in Figure 9-8, two SNCP tangent rings consist of six OptiX
OSN 3500 NEs and an OptiX OSN 8800 NE. The OptiX OSN 8800 NE functions as the tangent
NE, namely, NE3. The source NE NE1 and the sink NE NE6 use the PQ1 boards as the tributary
boards that add or drop services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-8 SNCP tangent ring networking

Tributary board: 2-PQ1
Line board: 11-SL16
Line board: 8-SL16

NE1
NE2 SNCP Ring1 NE4
NE3 Line board: 7-SLO16

Line board: 8-SLO16
Line board: 12-SLO16
Line board: 13-SLO16
NE5 SNCP Ring2 NE7
Line board: 11-SL16

NE6
Line board: 8-SL16
Tributary board: 2-PQ1

Line board: 8-SL16
Line board: 11-SL16
NOTE
This example illustrates a network that consists of the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 8800. In the case
of a network that consists of the OptiX OSN 8800 and other MSTP equipment, the configuration method
is the same. The difference lies in the slots where boards are inserted.For the slot information, see the
Hardware Description of the relevant product.
9.6.2 Service Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The service in the SNCP tangent ring is not transmitted in a fixed direction. The service flow
direction depends on the configuration of the working path and the protection path on each NE
where the SNCP protection group is configured. When configuring the SNCP protection group
on the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectional
service in the tangent point. The service timeslot allocation in the SNCP tangent ring is same as
the service timeslot allocation on a single SNCP ring.
Figure 9-9 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. The service can be transmitted
in the MSP tangent ring in different directions and routes. In this example, the service in the ring
is transmitted to the ring network from NE1 and then is dropped on the sink NE (NE6). on tangent

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE (NE3), four SNCP protection groups need to be configured. The service flow direction is
NE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-NE6 or NE1-NE2-NE3-NE7-NE6. There are five E1 services on the ring.

NE1:
5xE1 SNCP service protection service
protection group source source sink
protection group1 11-SL16 8-SL16 2-PQ1
VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)
8 11
NE1 NE2 and NE4
:
service service
SDH service
source sink
11 8 VC12 11-SL16 8-SL16
VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) 线路 VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

NE2 SNCP Ring1 NE4 板
Service pass-through Service pass-through
8 11
NE3:
NE3 SNCP service protection service
12 8 protection group source source sink
SNCP
protection group1 13-SLO16 7-SLO16 12-SLO16
VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) protection group2 13-SLO16 7-SLO16 8-SLO16

7 13
11 8
VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)

SNCP Ring2
NE5 NE7
Service pass-through Service pass-through
8 11
11 NE6 8
VC4-1:1-5 (VC12) VC4-1:1-5 (VC12)
NE6:
5 x E1 SNCP service protection service
protection group source source sink
working protection group1 11-SL16 8-SL16 2-PQ1
service route Line board
protection
Tributary board
service route

For non-tangent nodes in the SNCP tangent rings, the service configuration is the same as the
service configuration in a single ring network. On tangent nodes, you need to configure four
SNCP protection groups for a bidirectional service.
Prerequisite
The physical network topology must be created.
NEs, boards, and fibers must be successfully created on the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Configure an SNCP-protected SDH service for NE1.
2. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower-right pane and the Create SNCP Service dialog
box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
This
Example
Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter is set to the default value,
that is, SNCP.
Level VC12 In this example, the service in the ring is the E1 service.
The corresponding service level is set to VC12.
Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the received and transmitted services

l pass through the same route, and thus the service is
bidirectional. The service direction is set to
Bidirectional.
Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates the processing policies after the
Mode faulty line is recovered, that is, revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration, the revertive
mode is set to Revertive.
Source Slot 11- In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot
of the N1SL16-1 11 serves as the source board of the working service.
Working (SDH-1) Different source boards of the working service can be
Service selected according to actual situations.
Source 1-5 In the planning of this example, the total service volume
Timeslot is 5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus 5xVC12
Range of the need be set.
Working
Service
Source Slot 8-N1SL16-1 In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot
of the (SDH-1) 8 serves as the source board of the protection service.
Protection Different source boards of the protection service can be
Protection
Service
Sink Slot 2-PQ1 In the planning of this example, the PQ1 housed in slot
2 serves as the sink tributary board. Different sink boards
can be selected according to actual situations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Sink 1-5 In the planning of this example, the total service volume
Working
Service
Activate Yes -
Immediately
3. Click OK.
Step 2 The procedure of configuring a service for NE6 is similar to the procedure for NE1. Hence,
configure an SDH service for NE6 by referring to the service configuration process of NE1 and
the NE6 service planning described in Figure 9-9.
Step 3 Configure the pass-through service on NE2.


This
Example

Bidirectional.
Source Slot 11- In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot
N1SL16-1 11 serves as the source line board. Different source
(SDH-1) boards can be selected according to actual situations.
Range (e.g. need be set.
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 8-N1SL16-1 In the planning of this example, the SL16 housed in slot
(SDH-1) 8 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards can be
selected according to actual situations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 4 In this example, NE4, NE5, and NE7 are pass-through NEs. The configuration method and
parameter setting are the same as those of NE2. Refer to the configuration of NE2 to configure
pass-though SDH service of NE4, NE5 and NE7
Step 5 Configure the SDH service on NE3 (tangent NE).
NOTE
According to the configuration principle of the SNCP tangent rings, you need to configure four SNCP
protection groups for each bidirectional service. The configuration combination of protection groups is not
fixed. You can configure the protection group according to actual requirements. The following
configuration is considered as a reference.
2. Click Create SNCP Service in the lower-right pane and the Create SNCP Service dialog
box is displayed. Set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
This
Example
Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter is set to the default value,
that is, SNCP.
Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates the processing policies after the
Mode faulty line is recovered, that is, revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration, the revertive
mode is set to Revertive.

Bidirectional.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Hold-off 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode is

Time available, and thus the hold-off time need not be set.
(100ms) During the service configuration, the hold-off time is set
to 0.
WTR Time 600 In normal cases, this parameter is set to the default value,
(s) that is, 600.
Source Board 13- In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in
of the N4SLO16 slot 13 serves as the source board of the working service.
Working Different source boards of the working service can be
Source Port 1 In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16

of the housed in slot 13 serves as the source port of the working
Working service.
Service
Source VC4 VC4-1 The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.
of the
Working
Service
Timeslot is 5xE1. The service level is VC12, and thus the 5xVC12
Working
Service
Source Board 7-N4SLO16 In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in
of the slot 7 serves as the source board of the protection service.
Protection Different source boards of the protection service can be
Source Port 1 In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16

of the housed in slot 7 serves as the source port of the protection
Protection service.
Service
Source VC4 VC4-1 The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.
of the
Protection
Service
Protection
Service

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Sink Board 12- In the planning of this example, the SLO16 housed in
N4SLO16 slot 12 serves as the sink board. Different sink boards
can be selected according to actual situations.
Sink Port 1 In the planning of this example, the port 1 of SLO16

housed in slot 12 serves as the sink port.
Sink VC4 VC4-1 The service source uses the timeslots of VC4-1.
1,3-6)
Activate Yes -
Immediately
Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring of the NE. For the operation steps, see 4.2.2 Setting
Step 7 To back up configuration data of the NE, you can take the following three methods as references:
Option Description
When the system control and Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
communication board is not configured with Board.
the CF card
When the system control and Automatically Backing Up the NE Database

communication board is configured with the to a CF Card.
CF card
When the system control and Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a

communication board is configured with the CF Card.
CF card
----End
9.7 Parameter
9.7.1 Parameter: SDH Service Configuration

In this user interface, you can configure services for stations, such as services at VC4, VC3 and
VC12 levels. In addition, you can configure SNCP services and other services. You can query,
delete, print, and bind/unbind services. You can also customize columns to display important
parameters.
9.7.2 Parameter: SNCP Service Control

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
In this user interface, you can query and modify attributes and status of SNCP service.
9.7.3 Parameter: VC4 Path Overhead
You can query and set overhead bytes of the VC4 path in this user interface.
9.7.1 Parameter: SDH Service Configuration

In this user interface, you can configure services for stations, such as services at VC4, VC3 and
VC12 levels. In addition, you can configure SNCP services and other services. You can query,
delete, print, and bind/unbind services. You can also customize columns to display important
parameters.
Parameters
Level VC12, VC3, VC4, 3*AU3, Specifies the level of the

VC4-4C, VC4-8C, newly created service.
VC4-16C, VC4-64C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Type , , , , , , , , l indicates that a service

passes through the line
bidirectionally.
l indicates that a service
passes through the line
unidirectionally.
l indicates a service is
dropped from the line to
the tributary
(unidirectional)
l indicates a service is
added from the tributary to
the line (unidirectional)
l indicates that a service
is added from the tributary
to the line and also
dropped from the line to
the tributary
(bidirectional)
l indicates that the
service passes through
between two timeslots of
the same line board
unidirectionally.
the same line board
bidirectionally.
the same tributary board
unidirectionally.
the same tributary board or
two tributary boards of the
same node bidirectionally.
Source (Sink) Slot For example: 9-SD4-1 Specifies the service source
(SDH-1) (sink) slot.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Source (Sink) Timeslot/Path For example: 1 to 63 Sets the specific timeslot or

Source (Sink) Timeslot timeslot range of the service.
Range (e.g.1,3-6) The format of inputting
multiple consecutive
timeslots: start timeslot
number - end timeslot
number. The format of
inputting multiple
inconsecutive timeslots: ts1,
ts2.... Two formats can be
used together.
The range can be different for
different levels of services or
different boards.
Source (Sink) Protection For example, interface refers The name of the protection
to the service automatically where the source (sink) slot
generated during service resides. It is unnecessary for
configuration. e: Incomplete the 5.0 platform equipments.
MSP Ring (1)
Direction Bidirectional, Unidirectional The service received and

transmitted through the same
route is called bidirectional
service, while the service
received and transmitted
through different routes is
called unidirectional service.
Source (Sink) VC4 For example: VC4-1 Selects the source (sink)
VC4. This parameter is
unavailable if a tributary
board is selected for Source
(Sink) Slot.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Source (Sink) SNC None, No protection, The protection type of the

Protection Protection source (sink) SNCP node (If
this slot is an SNCP node,
you need to select whether
this service needs SNCP
protection). There are three
choices for this item:
(1) None (This slot is not an
SNCP node)
(2) No protection (This slot is
an SNCP, but this service
does not need SNCP
protection)
(3) Protection (This slot is an
SNCP, and this service needs
SNCP protection)
It is different according to the
equipment.
Lockout Status Unlocked, Locked Displays the lockout status of

the path carrying services.
Service Origin Create Manually, Displays the creation mode

Intelligently Generate of the service.
Activation Status Yes, No Displays whether the service

is activated or not.
Bound Group Number For example: 1 Displays the bind group

number of the service. You
can set a maximum of 24
binding groups, and you must
bind four VC4 channels each
time.
Schedule No For example: 1A2B3C4D Displays the name of

Schedule No.
Source Board For example: 8-N4SLQ64 Displays the board at the

(SDH-1) source end.
Sink Board For example: 8-N4SLQ64 Displays the board at the sink
(SDH-1) end.
9.7.2 Parameter: SNCP Service Control

In this user interface, you can query and modify attributes and status of SNCP service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Service Type PP, SNCP Displays the service

protection type.
Source For example: 5-S16-1 Displays the service source

(SDH-1)-VC4:1- timeslot of the service.
VC12:11-1-1
Sink For example: 2-PQ1-1 Displays the service sink

(SDH_TU-1) timeslot of the service.
Level VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4C, Displays the service level.

VC4-8C, VC4-16C,
VC4-64C
Current Status Normal, Lockout, Forced Displays the current

Switching, Forced Switching switching status of the
to Working, Forced protection group.
Switching to Protection, SF
Switching, SD Switching,
Manual Switching, Manual
Switching to Working,
Manual Switching to
Protection, Automatic
Switching, WTR, DNR,
Unknown
Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-Revertive Displays the revertive mode.

Whether the working service
is switched back from the
protection service after it
returns normal.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 Sets the wait-to-restore time.

Default: 600 Refer to the period of time
starting When it is detected
that the working service
returns to normal and ending
when the working service is
switched back after the
protection switching. If the
revertive mode is non-
revertive, skip this step.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hold-off Time(100ms) For example: 0 to 100, in the Sets a period of time which
unit of 100 milliseconds starts when the system
detects signal degrade and
ends when service switching
occurs, so as to avoid
duplicate switching when the
service status is unstable.
Sets 100 milliseconds as the
unit time for switching. 5
indicates that the hold-off
time is 500 milliseconds.
Initiation Condition TIM, EXC, SD, UNEQ, Sets the startup conditions
SLM, BIPOVER Default: that trigger service protection
Null switching.
Trail Status Normal, SF, SD, Unknown Displays the working status
of the working or the
protection service in a
protection group.
Service Grouping For example: Null Displays and configures the

group status of the service.
Group Type For example: Null Displays the group type.
Active Channel For example: Protection Path Displays what the current
protection group selectively
receives: the working or the
protection service.

Parameters
Object For example: NE56-4-SD1-1 Displays the name of the

(SDH-2)-1 operation object.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
J1 to be Sent ([Mode] For example: [16 Bytes] Sets the higher-order path
Content) HuaWei SBS overhead byte J1 to be sent.
[Mode] indicates whether the
overhead byte is of the
single-byte mode, 16-byte
mode or 64-byte
mode.
It is applicable to SDH line
boards. The default value is
usually used, but in the case
of Huawei equipment
interconnecting with third-
party's equipment, you need
to set the same value as J1 to
be received at the opposite
end.
J1 to be Received ([Mode] For example: [16 Bytes] Sets the higher-order path
Content) HuaWei SBS overhead byte J1 to be
received. [Mode] indicates
whether the overhead byte is
of the single-byte mode, 16-
byte mode or 64-byte
mode.
of Huawei equipment
to set the same value as J1 to
be sent of the opposite end.
J1 Received ([Mode] Queries the higher-order path

Content) overhead byte J1 received.
The NE reports an alarm if
the byte is different from the
J1 to be received. [Mode]
indicates whether the
mode or 64-byte
mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
C2 to be Sent (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Sets the signal label byte C2

Reserved, (0x02)TUG to be sent.
Structure, (0x03)Locke TU- It is applicable to SDH line
n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, boards. The default value is
(0x05)Experimental, (0x12) usually used, but when
140M into C-4 accessing signals of non-
asynchronously, (0x13)ATM TUG structure (for example,
Mapping, (0x14)MAN ATM, FDDI), you need to set
DQDB Mapping, (0x15) the C2 to be sent as required.
FDDI Mapping, (0x16)
HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17)
Reserved for Special
Purpose, (0x18)HDLC/
LAPS Mapping, (0x19)
Purpose, (0x1A)10G
Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP
Mapping, (0xCF)Reserved,
(0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,
(0xFF)VC-AIS
C2 to be Received (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Sets the signal label byte C2

Reserved, (0x02)TUG to be received.
Structure, (0x03)Locke TU- It is applicable to the SDH
n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3, line board. The default is
(0x05)Experimental, (0x12) usually used, but when
140M into C-4 accessing signals of non-
asynchronously, (0x13)ATM TUG structure (for example,
Mapping, (0x14)MAN ATM, FDDI), you need to set
DQDB Mapping, (0x15) the C2 to be received as
FDDI Mapping, (0x16) required.
HDLC/PPP Mapping, (0x17)
Purpose, (0x18)HDLC/
LAPS Mapping, (0x19)
Purpose, (0x1A)10G
Ethernet Frame, (0x1B)GFP
Mapping, (0xCF)Reserved,
(0xFE)O.181 Test Signal,
(0xFF)VC-AIS
C2 Received For example: (0x00) Queries the signal label byte

Unequipped C2 received. Reports an
alarm if it is different from
the C2 to be received.
VC4 Overhead Termination Auto, Termination, Pass- Displays VC4 overhead

Through termination.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Byte Mode Single Byte Mode, 16-Byte Sets byte mode for the
Mode(the first byte is created overhead byte.
automatically), 64-Byte
Mode(Synchronization Bit
0x0D,0x0A), 64-Byte Mode
(Without Synchronization
Bit), Disable Mode

Parameters
Object For example: NE351-4- Displays the name of the

N1EFS4-1-VC4:1-VC3:1 operation object.
For example: NE103-5-
EFT4-VC3-1
J1 to be Sent ([Mode] Default: [16 Bytes]HuaWei Sets the higher-order path

content) SBS overhead byte J1 to be sent.
[Mode] indicates whether the
mode or 64-byte
mode.
Object: VC3 path
of Huawei equipment
to set the same value as the J1
to be received at the opposite
end.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
J1 to be Received ([Mode] Default: [16 Bytes]HuaWei Sets the higher-order path

content) SBS overhead byte J1 to be
received. [Mode] indicates
mode.
Object: VC3 path
boards. The default is usually
used, but in the case of
Huawei equipment
to set the same value as the J1
to be sent of the opposite
end.
J1 Received ([Mode] Queries the higher-order path

content) overhead byte J1 received.
The NE reports an alarm if it
is different from the J1 to be
received.[Mode] indicates
mode.
C2 to be Sent (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Sets the signal label byte C2

Reserved, (0x02)TUG to be sent.
Structure, (0x03)Locked TU- Object: VC3 path
n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3,
(0x05)Experimental It is applicable to SDH line
Mapping, (0x12)140M into boards. The default value is
C-4, (0x13)ATM Mapping, usually used, but when
(0x14)MAN DQDB accessing signals of non-
Mapping, (0x15)FDDI TUG structure (for example,
Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP ATM, FDDI), you need to set
Mapping, (0x17) SDL with the C2 to be sent as required.
SDH Scrambler, (0x18)
HDLC/LAPS Mapping,
(0x19)SDL with Set-Reset
Scrambler, (0x1A)10G
Ethernet Frames, (0x1B)
Flexible Topology Data
Link, (0xCF)Reserved,
(0xE1)Reserved, (0xFC)
Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test
Signal, (0xFF)VC-
AIS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
C2 to be Received (0x00)Unequipped, (0x01) Sets the signal label byte C2

Reserved, (0x02)TUG to be received.
Structure, (0x03)Locked TU- Object: VC3 path
n, (0x04)34M/45M into C-3,
(0x05)Experimental It is applicable to the SDH
Mapping, (0x12)140M into line board. The default is
C-4, (0x13)ATM Mapping, usually used, but when
(0x14)MAN DQDB accessing signals of non-
Mapping, (0x15)FDDI TUG structure (for example,
Mapping, (0x16)HDLC/PPP ATM, FDDI), you need to set
Mapping, (0x17) SDL with the C2 to be received as
SDH Scrambler, (0x18) required.
HDLC/LAPS Mapping,
(0x19)SDL with Set-Reset
Scrambler, (0x1A)10G
Ethernet Frames, (0x1B)
Flexible Topology Data
Link, (0xCF)Reserved,
(0xE1)Reserved, (0xFC)
Reserved, (0xFE)O.181 Test
Signal, (0xFF)VC-AIS
C2 Received For example: (0x00) Queries the signal label byte

Unequipped C2 received. The NE reports
an alarm if it is different from
the C2 to be received.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 10 Configuring Ethernet Services
10 Configuring Ethernet Services
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the configuration of Ethernet services. Through the configuration of
Ethernet services and electrical cross-connections, the flexible grooming of Ethernet services
are realized.
10.1 Ethernet Service Types

The WDM equipment supports the following Ethernet services: Ethernet private line (EPL),
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), and Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) services.
10.2 Basic Concepts
Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts
including Tag Attributes, QoS, VLAN Group, Ethernet Service OAM, Ethernet Port OAM,
Ethernet LAG, Ethernet DLAG and MAC Address Filtering.
10.3 Configuring Ethernet Boards
During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes must
be configured.
10.4 Configuring an EPL Service on a WDM Network
Web LCT supports configuring an EPL service on a WDM network on a per-NE basis.
10.5 Configuring an EPL Service on an SDH Network
You can use the Web LCT to configure an Ethernet service on an SDH network on a per-NE
basis.
10.6 Configuring EPLAN Services on a WDM Network
This topic describes how to configure an EPLAN service on a WDM network on a per-NE basis.
10.7 Configuring an EPLAN Service on an SDH Network
This topic describes how to configure an EPLAN service on an SDH network on a per-NE basis.
10.8 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM Network
This topic describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service on a WDM network on a per-
NE basis.
10.9 Configuring an EVPL (QinQ) Service on an SDH Network
This topic describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service on an SDH network on a per-
NE basis.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10 Configuring Ethernet Services Web LCT Operation Guide
10.10 Configuring VLAN Groups

The Web LCT supports the configuration of Ethernet VLAN groups. Continuous VLANs can
be bound as one group. Once one VLAN in a VLAN group is configured, the other VLANs have
the same configuration, this is similar to expanding the carrying capacity of a VLAN flow.
10.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering
MAC address filtering is a broadband transmission solution oriented to alleviate the secondary
router load.
10.12 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN SNCP Services
The conversion between the created EPL Ethernet services and VLAN SNCP services can be
realized on the Web LCT.
10.13 Configuring Port Mirroring
You can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, you
can monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.
10.14 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults
When the Ethernet protocol operates abnormally, the Web LCT diagnoses the protocol fault,
displays the diagnosis contents, and restores the normal operation of the Ethernet protocol.
10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services
The EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet
services over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the user-
side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support
VLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier.
10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL(QinQ) Services
EVPL(QinQ) services realize the nesting of VLAN. With the increase of network users, the
existing number of VLAN IDs fail to meet the requirement of users. After EVPL(QinQ) services
are configured, however, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this
case, VLAN extension is achieved.
10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Service
The Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) service supports layer 2 switching of Ethernet
data, which is transmitted according to its destination media access control (MAC) address.
10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on a SDH Network
EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the
bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication
equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support
VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH
Network
The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users,
which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to be
transmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.
10.20 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services on a SDH
Network
When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmission
network and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)
service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner,
the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.
10.21 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a SDH Network
The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicable
where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmission

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ)
services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of different
users from each other.
10.22 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH
Network
The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint
convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment
connected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning
cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
10.23 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH
Network
The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication
equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags or
where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
10.24 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH
Network
The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private
networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN
solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.
10.25 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
on a SDH Network
The EGSH board supports the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) on a same
port. Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed trough a same
port, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same
port.
10.26 Parameters

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.1 Ethernet Service Types

The WDM equipment supports the following Ethernet services: Ethernet private line (EPL),
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL), and Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) services.
10.1.1 Ethernet Private Line Service
Ethernet private line services include Ethernet private line (EPL) services and Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL) services.
10.1.2 Ethernet LAN Service
Huawei OSN/TSC equipment supports Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) and
Ethernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.
10.1.3 QinQ
The QinQ technology is the basis for realizing EVPL (QinQ) services. EVPL (QinQ) services
realize VLAN nesting. With the increase of network users, the current number of VLAN IDs
fail to meet the network requirement. With the configuration of the EVPL (QinQ) service, users
can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, the VLAN is extended.
10.1.1 Ethernet Private Line Service

Ethernet private line services include Ethernet private line (EPL) services and Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL) services.
EPL Services
Two nodes are used to access EPL services and implement transparent transmission of the
Ethernet services to the users. Service of one user occupies one VCTRUNK and need not share
the bandwidth with the services of the other users, as shown in Figure 10-1. Hence, in the case
of EPL services, a bandwidth is exclusively occupied by the service of a user and the services
of different users are isolated. In addition, the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are not
required.
Figure 10-1 EPL services
EVPL Services
In the case of EVPL services, services of different users share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN/
QinQ scheme needs to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the services
of different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
corresponding QoS scheme. EVPL services are classified into two types, depending on whether
the PORT or VCTRUNK is shared.
There are two types of EVPL services:

l PORT-shared EVPL services
l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services
– VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services
– QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services
PORT-shared EVPL services
As shown in Figure 10-2, the services of different users are accessed through an external port
(that is, PORT) at a station, and are then isolated from each other by using the VLAN IDs.
Services are transmitted to other PORTs at this station through different VCTRUNKs.
Figure 10-2 PORT-shared EVPL services
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services
As shown in Figure 10-3, the services of different users are isolated by using the VLAN/QinQ
scheme. Hence, the services of different users can be transmitted in the same VCTRUNK.
l VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services
Figure 10-3 VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services
l QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services

For more information about the implementation principles of the QinQ technology-based
EVPL services, refer to 10.1.3 QinQ.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.1.2 Ethernet LAN Service

Huawei OSN/TSC equipment supports Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) and
Ethernet virtual private local area network (EVPLAN) services.
EPLAN Services
Currently, Ethernet LAN services mainly refer to Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services.
Based on the Layer 2 switch function, The EPLAN realizes transmission of the accessed data
based on destination media access control (MAC) address of the data.
The EPLAN services can be accessed from a minimum of two nodes. The services of different
users need not share the bandwidth. That is, in the case of EPLAN services, a bandwidth is
exclusively occupied by the service of a user and the services of different users are isolated. In
addition, the extra QoS scheme and security scheme are not required. There are more than one
node in the EPLAN services, Hence, the nodes need to learn the MAC addresses and forward
data according to MAC addresses. Therefore, Layer 2 switching is involved. See Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 EPLAN services

NM
NE3
NE2
VB1 NE4 VB1
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT3 PORT3
F2
NE1 F3
VB1
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 F1
PORT3
NE2
VCTRUNK PORT
NE1
VCTRUNK1 PORT3
F2
PORT VCTRUNK 10M
VB1 VB1
VCTRUNK1
PORT3
F1
10M VCTRUNK2 NE4
VCTRUNK PORT
VCTRUNK1 PORT3
F3
10M
WDM
VB1
VB
Service Mount of VB
Cross-conection

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
As shown in Figure 10-4, three branches of user F need to communicate with each other. On
NE1, the IEEE 802.1d bridge is established to achieve EPLAN services. IEEE 802.1d bridge
can create the MAC address-based forwarding table, which is periodically updated by using the
self-learning function of the system. Accessed data can be forwarded or broadcast within the
domain of the IEEE 802.1d bridge according to the destination MAC addresses.
To avoid broadcast storm, the EPLAN services cannot be set as a ring. If the EPLAN services
are set as a ring, the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) or Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) must be started in the network.
EVPLAN Services
EVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN/QinQ
scheme needs to be used for differentiating the data of different users. If the services of different
users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the corresponding
QoS scheme.
As shown in Figure 10-5, three branches of user G need to communicate with each other.
Services of user G need to be isolated from the services of user H. In this case, the operator needs
to separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, be established on NE1 to achieve
EVPLAN services.
IEEE 802.1q bridge: IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags.
This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer
2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.
Figure 10-5 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
NE3
NM
PORT2 PORT2
H2 NE2 NE4
H3
PORT1 NE1 PORT1
G2 G3
H1 G1
PORT6 PORT5
VCTRUNK
IEEE 802.1q bridge IEEE 802.1q bridge

VLAN 200 VLAN 100
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK
1 2 1 2
PORT6 PORT5
As shown in Figure 10-6, the VoIP services from user M and the HSI services from user N need
to access the VoiP server and the HSI server respectively. In this case, the operator needs to
separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, and isolate the data on the transmission

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
network side. On NE1, the IEEE 802.1ad bridge must be established to support the EVPLAN
services.
IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLAN
tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports only
the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge supports the following
switching modes:
l This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and
performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the packets.
l This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and performs
Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the
packets.
Figure 10-6 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
NE3
NM
Service C-VLAN Service C-VLAN
VoIP 10 VoIP 10
HSI 20 HSI 20
PORT1 PORT1
NE2 NE4
User M 8 NE1 11 User N
VoIP 11 8
HSI
PORT5 PORT6
VCTRUNK
IEEE 802.1ad bridge IEEE 802.1ad bridge

S-VLAN 100 S-VLAN 200
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK VCTRUNK
1 2 1 2
PORT5 PORT6
10.1.3 QinQ
The QinQ technology is the basis for realizing EVPL (QinQ) services. EVPL (QinQ) services
realize VLAN nesting. With the increase of network users, the current number of VLAN IDs
fail to meet the network requirement. With the configuration of the EVPL (QinQ) service, users
can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this case, the VLAN is extended.
The VLAN is a LAN technology developed along with the Ethernet switch technology. As the
Ethernet technology is deployed largely in the networks of carriers, which are the metropolitan
area networks, implementing the 802.1Q VLAN to isolate and identifying users is limited to a
great extent. The VLAN tag domain that is defined in the IEEE 802.1Q has 12 bits, which can
represent 4K VLANs only. This cannot meet the requirements for identifying a large number of
users in metropolitan area networks. In order to increase the number of VLANs, the QinQ
technology is developed.
The QinQ technology is realized by adding a layer of 802.1Q tags to 802.1Q packets. Thus, the
number of VLANs is increased to 4K x 4K. With the development of the metro Ethernet and

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the requirement of fine operation, QinQ double tags can be implemented in other scenarios. The
inner and outer tags can represent different information. The inner tag (namely the C-VLAN)
represents the client and the outer tag (namely the S-VLAN) represents the service. See Table
10-1.
Table 10-1 EVPL(QinQ) services
Operation Description Illustration
Add S-VLAN Tag Adds S-VLAN based on the Data C-VLAN Data C-VLAN S-VLAN
PORT.
Add S-VLAN and C-VLAN Adds S-VLAN and C-VLAN

Data Data C-VLAN S-VLAN
Tag based on the PORT.
Transparently transmit C- Transparently transmit C-

Data C-VLAN Data C-VLAN
VLAN Tag VLAN
Transparently transmit S- Transparently transmit S-

Data S-VLAN Data S-VLAN
VLAN Tag VLAN
Translate S-VLAN Tag Translate S-VLAN based on

Data S-VLAN1 Data S-VLAN2
the PORT.
10.2 Basic Concepts

Before you configure Ethernet boards with services, you need to learn the basic concepts
including Tag Attributes, QoS, VLAN Group, Ethernet Service OAM, Ethernet Port OAM,
Ethernet LAG, Ethernet DLAG and MAC Address Filtering.
10.2.1 Tag Attributes

In a virtual LAN, the tag attribute of an Ethernet port indicates how the port processes Ethernet
packets.
10.2.2 VLAN Group
This section describes the application scenarios of the VLAN group.
10.2.3 MAC Address Filtering
MAC address filtering is an OTN broadband transmission solution. MAC address filtering is
enabled for Ethernet data boards to alleviate router load.
10.2.1 Tag Attributes

In a virtual LAN, the tag attribute of an Ethernet port indicates how the port processes Ethernet
packets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Ethernet packets are classified into tagged and untagged packets in 802.1q. A four-byte field is
added to the Ethernet frame header of a tagged packet. The 802.1q-compliant field is used to
identify the VLAN ID. An untagged packet does not have such a four-byte field.
An Ethernet port has the following three types, which are Tag aware, Access and Hybrid.
SeeTable 10-2 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets at
the ingress.
Table 10-2 Processing policy at ingress
Port Type Tagged Packet Untagged Packet
Tag aware Transparently transmitted Discarded
Access Discarded Added with the default

VLAN tag
Hybrid Transparently transmitted Added with the default

VLAN tag
SeeTable 10-3 for details on how an Ethernet board processes tagged and untagged packets at
the egress.
Table 10-3 Processing policy at egress
Port Type Tagged Packet Untagged Packet
Tag aware Transparently transmitted -
Access The VLAN tag is removed -
Hybrid The VLAN tag is removed if -

it is the same as the default
tag for the port
Transparently transmitted if
the VLAN tag is different
from the default tag for the
port
As shown in Table 10-2 and Table 10-3, in an actual network, you need to set the port type for
the Ethernet board of an NE according to the Tag attribute of the messages sent from the user-
side equipment. If the user-side equipment sends the Untag message, set the external port to
Access and set the internal port to Tag aware. If the user-side equipment sends the Tag message,
set the external port to Tag aware and set the internal port to Tag aware.
For example, if the source equipment of a service does not support Tag messages but the sink
equipment supports Tag messages, you need to set the external port of the Ethernet board that
resides on the NE connected to the source to Access, and set the external port of the Ethernet
board that resides on the NE connected to the sink to Tag aware. Set the internal ports of the
Ethernet boards that resides on the NEs connected to the source and the sink to Tag aware.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.2.2 VLAN Group

This section describes the application scenarios of the VLAN group.
VLAN Group
The Web LCT and its managed NG WDM equipment organize certain consecutively accessed
VLAN services (usually they are of the same type) into a group to form a VLAN group. Web
LCT creates services, manages the QoS flow, and performs Ethernet OAM operations according
to the initial VLAN ID so that the other VLAN services in the VLAN group have the same
configuration.
Application Scenarios of the VLAN Group

Currently, the digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) does not support the QinQ
function. The broadband remote access server (BRAS), however, requires that two layers of
VLAN tags should be verified. Based on this, the VLAN grouping function provides the
broadband bearer solution from the DSLAM to the BRAS.
Currently, the NG WDM equipment supports the following three service scenarios:
l Convergence from multiple GE services to one 10GE service. The BRAS has the 10GE
access port. The GE service of the DSLAM is converged to the 10GE port of the BRAS/
PE through the NG WDM VLAN group.
l Convergence from multiple GE services to one GE service. The BRAS increases the
number of access ports. The WDM equipment realizes GE transparent transmission or GE
convergence from the DSLAM to the BRAS.
l Private line from GE services to GE services. In the metropolitan enterprise private lines,
point-to-point service transparent transmission is required. In this case, a typical
transmission channel is adopted. That is, services are transmitted over the 10GE optical
line by using the WDM equipment. This is realized as follows: GE services are accessed
on the client side of the WDM equipment, and then the GE services are multiplexed to the
10GE line for transmission through the VLAN group.
10.2.3 MAC Address Filtering

MAC address filtering is an OTN broadband transmission solution. MAC address filtering is
enabled for Ethernet data boards to alleviate router load.
Figure 10-7 describes the principle and function of MAC address filtering.
1. Station 2: Set the MAC address of the opposite BRAS1.
2. Station 3: Dual feeds services. The dual-fed services carry the MAC address of the
destination BRAS1 and respectively reach stations 1 and 2.
3. Station 2: Analyzes whether the MAC address of the destination router is included in the
MAC addresses set in the opposite BRAS1 of station 2.
l Included: Indicates that BRAS2 is not the destination BRAS of the service and the
transmission of the service stops at station 2.
l Excluded: Indicates that BRAS2 is the destination BRAS of the service and the service
is transmitted to BRAS2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-7 Principle and function of MAC address filtering

BRAS1 BRAS2
Station 1 Filter MAC Station 2

TBE address on the TBE
standby node
L4G L4G
L4G
L2
Station 3
Working Service
Protection Service
BRAS Broadband Remote Access Server
10.3 Configuring Ethernet Boards

During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes must
be configured.
Context
Follow the process given below to configure an Ethernet board:
10.3.1 Configuring Internal Ports
The attributes of Ethernet interfaces need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured
with services or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) for an
Ethernet board.
10.3.2 Configuring External Ports
with services or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for an Ethernet board.
10.3.1 Configuring Internal Ports

with services or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) for an
Ethernet board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The Ethernet boards must be created. In the case of OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004 and OptiX
OSN 3800 V100R004, the Ethernet boards include TBE and L4G; in the case of OptiX OSN
8800 V100R002, the Ethernet board is EGSH.
CAUTION
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes
of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.
NOTE
The configuration items are different according to different boards.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and select Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface in the Function Tree. Select the Internal Port option
button.
Step 2 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG. Click Apply. For the configuration of related
parameters, see 10.26.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Step 3 Click Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the port encapsulation and mapping. Click Apply.
NOTE
The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a general
mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-length
payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented,
such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or
common bit data streams. The GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click the Network Attributes tab and set the Port Type of the internal port. Click Apply.
NOTE
l In the case of UNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag Aware/
Access/Hybrid attribute.
l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.
l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.
l When the working mode of a port is NNI mode, that is, when the port functions as a network-to-network
interface, it is used for connecting to another network node.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Step 5 Click LCAS tab and set the port LCAS. Click Apply. For relevant information, see LCAS of
Feature Description .
Step 6 Click Bound Path tab, click Query to browse the bound paths.
Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the port attribute. Click Apply.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and all packets.
The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal
Port).
Step 8 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
----End
10.3.2 Configuring External Ports

with services or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be created. In the case of OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004 and OptiX OSN
3800 V100R004, the Ethernet boards include TBE and L4G; in the case of OptiX OSN 8800
V100R002, the Ethernet board is EGSH.
CAUTION
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes
of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the appropriate Ethernet board and then select Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select the
External Port option button.
Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab and set the basic attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l Working mode: If Working Mode at one end is set to Auto-Negotiation, Working Mode at the other
end also must be set to Auto-Negotiation. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
l MAC loopback and PHY loopback: They are used for locating faults and are service-affecting. The
two are mutually exclusive. When the value of MAC loopback is set to Inloop, the value of PHY
loopback is set to Non-Loopback automatically. The same applies to the reverse case.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External
Port).
Step 3 Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Flow Control tab, set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode and
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the external port.
NOTE
l Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is Auto-
Negotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means the port only transmits and does not receive
flow control frames. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and
receive only PAUSE frames. Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means that the
symmetric or dissymmetric flow control mode is selected according to the auto-negotiation.
l Non-Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is not
Auto-Negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and
receive PAUSE frames. Send Only means that the port is able to transmit PAUSE frames only. Receive
Only means the port is able to receive PAUSE frames only.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External
Port).
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG of the port. Click Apply. For the configuration
of related parameters, see 10.26.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes.
Step 7 Click Network Attributes tab, set the port attributes of the external port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l In the case of UNI/NNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag
Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.
l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.
l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.6 Parameters: Network Attributes.
Step 8 Click Apply.

Step 9 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold,
Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and
all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External
Port).
Step 10 Click Apply.

----End
10.4 Configuring an EPL Service on a WDM Network

Web LCT supports configuring an EPL service on a WDM network on a per-NE basis.
10.4.1 EPL Service Configuration Process

This section describes the EPL service configuration process that mainly consists of deploying
a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and
verifying services.
10.4.2 Configuring Port Attribute for an Ethernet Board
Before creating an Ethernet service, you need to set the port attribute for the Ethernet board.
10.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections on an Ethernet Board
Before the client Ethernet services are transmitted to the WDM side, appropriate cross-
connections must be created on the Web LCT.
10.4.4 Creating EPL Services
You can configure EPL services for a single NE.
10.4.5 Verifying Ethernet Services
After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is
normal.

verifying services.
Figure 10-8 shows the process for configuring EPL services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-8 EPL service configuration process

Required
Optional
Deploying a Configure Configure Configure

Verify service
Network source NE sink NE pass-through NE
Creating and Creating Cross- Test the Ethernet

Configuring NEs Setting External Setting External Connection Services
Ports Attributes of Ports Attributes of Between Line and
Ethernet Boards Ethernet Boards Line Boards
Checking the
Creating Fibers Connectivity of
Ethernet Service
Setting Internal Setting Internal
Ports Attributes of Ports Attributes of
Configuring Ethernet Boards Ethernet Boards Checking the
Communication Connectivity of
Ethernet Port
Creating Cross- Creating Cross-
Setting the NE Connection Connection
Time Between Ethernet Between Ethernet
and Line Boards and Line Boards
Configuring Clocks
Creating EPL Creating EPL
Services Services
Configuring
Orderwire
Configuring
Protection
NOTE
l In the landscape orientation of the configuration flow chart by using Web LCT, there are five main
phases of EPL service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring source NEs,
configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services.

Prerequisite
An Ethernet board must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring external ports. For details, refer to Configuring External Ports.
Step 2 Configuring internal ports. For details, refer to Configuring Internal Ports.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Prerequisite
l Applicable to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
l When you configure cross-connections, make sure that the source optical path is the same
as the sink optical path.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connetion
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connetion Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click New and then the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the parameters for the cross-connection and click OK. For details of the parameters,
see 6.8.1 Parameters: Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration.
----End

You can configure EPL services for a single NE.
Prerequisite
The port attribute must be configured for the Ethernet board.
The cross-connections must be configured for the Ethernet boards.
Applicable to the TBE and L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
The configuration of service parameters on both ends of an Ethernet service must be the same.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The following are the three types of EPL services that can be configured on the NM.
l EPL services between PORT and VCTRUNK ports.
l EPL services between VCTRUNK and VCTRUNK ports.
l EPL services between PORT and PORT ports.
NOTE
l For the above three types of services, if the source VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID are different, this
VLAN is a switched VLAN. To configure VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, the source
VLAN ID and sink VLAN ID must be the same.
l For the port description and configuration rules of each board, refer to the Hardware Description of
the corresponding equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Select EPL from the Service Type drop-down list.
Step 4 Configure the information related to the EPL service, such as Direction, Source Port, Sink
Port, etc.
NOTE
l You can set Direction to unidirectional or bidirectional.

l In Port Attributes, you can set Port Enabled and TAG for a port in the Create Ethernet Line
Service dialog box, or in Ethernet Interface.
l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however,
retain the default values.
Step 5 Click Apply or OK. The created EPL service is displayed in the window.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Optional: If the VLAN SNCP is required at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet
services at the transmit end, double-click the OAM Enabled field corresponding to the Ethernet
services and set it to Enabled.
NOTE
When creating the VLAN SNCP protection on the TBE board, you can choose not to enable the OAM
function because a large volume of service data may be transmitted in consideration of bandwidth usage
----End

normal.
Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be created.
Context
NOTE
You can select different steps to verify Ethernet services based on the networking and application
requirements.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Test Ethernet services. For details, see Testing Ethernet Services of Feature
Description.
NOTE
Only the L4G and EGSH board supports the test of Ethernet services.
Step 2 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet services. For details, see Configuring the IEEE
802.1ag OAM of Feature Description.
Step 3 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet ports. For details, see Configuring the IEEE 802.3ah
OAM of Feature Description.
----End
10.5 Configuring an EPL Service on an SDH Network

You can use the Web LCT to configure an Ethernet service on an SDH network on a per-NE
basis.

verifying services.
10.5.3 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board and a Line Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The cross-connections between an Ethernet board and a line board carry Ethernet services.
Hence, you need to create cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the line board prior
to creating Ethernet services.
You can create an EPL service on a per-NE basis.
normal.
10.5.6 Deleting EPL Services
To release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EPL services.

verifying services.
Figure 10-9 shows the process for configuring EPL services.
Figure 10-9 EPL service configuration process

Required
Optional
Deploying a Configure Configure Configure

Verify service
Network source NE sink NE pass-through NE
Creating and Creating Cross- Test the Ethernet

Configuring NEs Setting External Setting External Connection Services
Ports Attributes of Ports Attributes of Between Line and
Ethernet Boards Ethernet Boards Line Boards
Checking the
Creating Fibers Connectivity of
Ethernet Service
Setting Internal Setting Internal
Ports Attributes of Ports Attributes of
Configuring Ethernet Boards Ethernet Boards Checking the
Communication Connectivity of
Ethernet Port
Creating Cross- Creating Cross-
Setting the NE Connection Connection
Time Between Ethernet Between Ethernet
and Line Boards and Line Boards
Configuring Clocks
Creating EPL Creating EPL
Services Services
Configuring
Orderwire
Configuring
Protection

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
phases of EPL service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configuring source NEs,
configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through NEs, and verifying services.

Prerequisite
Procedure
----End
10.5.3 Creating Cross-Connections Between an Ethernet Board and

a Line Board
Prerequisite
The EGSH and OCS line board must be installed.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Cross-Connection
Configration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create and the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Create a cross connection between Ethernet and line boards by entering the values of the attribute
in the dialog box. For details of the parameters, see 9.7.1 Parameter: SDH Service
Configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l In the case of the EGSH board, Level can be set to only VC3 or VC4.
l The service level and timeslot of the cross-connection created must be consistent with the level and
timeslot of the bound path of the Ethernet interface.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

You can create an EPL service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisite
l Applies to the EGSH board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Step 2 Click New.
Step 3 In the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box displayed, configure the relevant information
about the EPL service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l If an appropriate path is not available in the Bound Path field, click Configuration to bind new paths.
l To configure the VLAN ID, you can set the same or different VLAN IDs for both the source and the
sink ports.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

normal.
Prerequisite
Context
NOTE
requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Description.
NOTE
----End

Prerequisite
EPL services must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION
The deletion operation affects services. Exercise caution when you perform this operation.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EPL services.
Step 3 Select the desired EPL service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK to
delete the service.
----End
10.6 Configuring EPLAN Services on a WDM Network

This topic describes how to configure an EPLAN service on a WDM network on a per-NE basis.
10.6.1 EPLAN Service Configuration Process

This section describes the EPLAN service configuration process that mainly consists of
deploying a network, configuring source NEs, configuring sink NEs, configuring pass-through
NEs, and verifying services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10.6.4 Creating EPLAN Services
Based on the Ethernet data layer 2 switch function, EPLAN services allow the accessed data to
be transported to its destination media access control (MAC) address. This section describes the
method to set the EPLAN service.
10.6.5 Creating VLANs Filtering
You can create VLANs to divide services in a virtual bridge (VB). The PORT port and the
VCTRUNK port that have different VLANs are isolated and do not transmit services to each
other.
10.6.6 Creating VLAN Unicast
You can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specified
MAC address, to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN. If the VB
swapping mode is SVL/Ingress Filter Disable, the packets are forwarded through the specified
port in the entire VB.
10.6.7 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses
You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address aging
function. If the MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network during the
aging time, the system considers that no information needs to be sent to these MAC addresses.
The MAC addresses are deleted from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address table
can contain more MAC addresses.
normal.
10.6.9 Deleting EPLAN Services
To release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EPLAN services.

Figure 10-10 shows the process for configuring EPLAN services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-10 EPLAN service configuration process

Required
Optional
Configure Configure Configure Enable NE

Deploying a Back up NE
source NE sink NE pass-through Verify service Performance Configuration Data
Network
NE Monitoring
Creating and Setting

Setting External Test the Backing Up the
Configuring Setting External Performance
Ports Attributes Configuring Ethernet Monitoring
NE Database to
NEs Ports Attributes the SCC Board
of Ethernet Cross- Services Parameters of
of Ethernet
Boards Connection an NE
Boards
Between Line
Creating Automatically
and Line Boards Checking the
Fibers Backing Up the
Setting Internal Setting Internal Connectivity of NE Database to a
Ports Attributes Ports Attributes Ethernet CF Card
Configuring of Ethernet of Ethernet Service
Communicati Boards Boards Manually Backing
on Up the NE
Checking the Database to a CF
Connectivity Card
Creating Cross- Creating Cross- of Ethernet
Setting the
Connection Connection Port
NE Time
Between Between
Ethernet and Ethernet and
Line Boards Line Boards
Configuring
Clocks
Creating Creating
EPLAN EPLAN
Configuring Services Services
Orderwire
Configuring Creating VLAN Creating VLAN

Protection
QOS QOS
NOTE
phases of EPLAN service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE,
configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.

Prerequisite
Procedure
----End


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Procedure
----End

Based on the Ethernet data layer 2 switch function, EPLAN services allow the accessed data to
be transported to its destination media access control (MAC) address. This section describes the
method to set the EPLAN service.
Prerequisite
The port attributes must be set for the Ethernet board.
The electrical cross-connect services between the TBE board and the line board must be created.
Applicable to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
Each TBE or L4G board support one virtual bridge (VB).
One VB can be created in each Ethernet board in the system. Inside VBs, the MAC address
learning function is used to complete the forwarding of Ethernet data. The MAC address table
is updated periodically based on the address learning result.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service Mount tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Complete the information of the EPLAN service. Enter a VB Name, and select VB Type and
Bridge Switch Mode.
Step 4 Click Configure Mount... in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box. The Service Mount
Configuration dialog box is displayed. Select a port in the Available Mounted Ports pane and
click .
CAUTION
Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.
Step 5 Click OK to return to Create Ethernet LAN Service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Select the Service Mount tab, and then click Query. The created EPLAN service is displayed.
NOTE
After you create an EPLAN service, if you want to set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port,
1. Click Query in the Service Mount panel to query the parameters value.
2. Double-click Hub/Spoke and select an option from the drop-down list.
Services are interoperable between Hub ports or between a Hub port and a Spoke port, but are isolated
between Spoke ports.
----End

other.
Prerequisite
The port must be mounted to a VB.
Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way,
you can create VLANs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select a service and click the VLAN
Filtering tab.
Step 2 Select the service and click New, the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN
ID, select an Available forwarding port, and then click .
Step 3 Click OK.

Step 5 Create other VLAN Filtering according to the requirements.
----End

Prerequisite
The VLAN must be created.
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MAC
Address, and Physical Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.
For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End

Prerequisite
Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
Applicable to the EGSH board of the OptiX OSN 8800.
Context
l If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address
items. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC
address table may not be updated according to the change in the network.
l If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,
packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance
of the network is affected.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is
displayed. Enter the value of the aging time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value ranges
from 1 to 120.
When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.
Step 3 Click OK and then click Apply.
----End

normal.
Prerequisite
Context
NOTE
requirements.
Procedure
Description.
NOTE
----End

Prerequisite
EPLAN services must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Service Mount tab and click Query to view the created EPLAN services.
Step 3 Select the desired EPLAN service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click
OK to delete the service.
NOTE
Before delete the EPLAN sevice, you must delete the VLAN filtering table.
Step 4 Optional: On the Service Mount tab page, select the port that need not be mounted, and then
double-click Mount Port. In the drop-down list, select unconnected. Then, click Apply. The
port is then disconnected.
NOTE
Before disconnecting the EPLAN service mounting port, delete the port on the VLAN Filtering tab page.
----End
10.7 Configuring an EPLAN Service on an SDH Network

This topic describes how to configure an EPLAN service on an SDH network on a per-NE basis.

You can create an EPLAN service on a per-NE basis.
other.
10.7.7 Disabling an MAC Address
The MAC address disabling function can prevent attacks initiated on the network or user side.
This helps to guarantee the stable running of the equipment on the network. After you create a
MAC address black list for a port that transmits EPLAN services, when the destination or source

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MAC address carried in the packet that enters the port matches a MAC address in the black list,
this packet is discarded. The MAC address that is already added to static routes cannot be added
to the MAC address black list.
normal.

Figure 10-11 shows the process for configuring EPLAN services.
Figure 10-11 EPLAN service configuration process

Required
Optional
Configure Configure Configure Enable NE

Deploying a Back up NE
source NE sink NE pass-through Verify service Performance Configuration Data
Network
NE Monitoring
Creating and Setting

Setting External Test the Backing Up the
Configuring Setting External Performance
Ports Attributes Configuring Ethernet Monitoring
NE Database to
NEs Ports Attributes the SCC Board
of Ethernet Cross- Services Parameters of
of Ethernet
Boards Connection an NE
Boards
Between Line
Creating Automatically
and Line Boards Checking the
Fibers Backing Up the
Setting Internal Setting Internal Connectivity of NE Database to a
Ports Attributes Ports Attributes Ethernet CF Card
Configuring of Ethernet of Ethernet Service
Communicati Boards Boards Manually Backing
on Up the NE
Checking the Database to a CF
Connectivity Card
Creating Cross- Creating Cross- of Ethernet
Setting the
Connection Connection Port
NE Time
Between Between
Ethernet and Ethernet and
Line Boards Line Boards
Configuring
Clocks
Creating Creating
EPLAN EPLAN
Configuring Services Services
Orderwire
Configuring Creating VLAN Creating VLAN

Protection
QOS QOS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
phases of EPLAN service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source NE,
configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.

Prerequisite
Procedure
----End

a Line Board
Prerequisite
Procedure
Configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

You can create an EPLAN service on a per-NE basis.
Prerequisite
The port attributes and bound paths must be set for the Ethernet board.
Applies to the EGSH board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service.
Step 2 Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the bridge.
Step 4 Configure service mounting relations.
Option Description
Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE Go to Step 5.
802.1q bridge.
Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Go to Step 6.
Step 5 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE 802.1q bridge.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
CAUTION
Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.
1. Click Configure Mount.
2. Select Available Mounted Ports and click .

3. Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 and select other ports to be mounted.
4. Click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
1. Click Configure Mount.
2. Set the parameters for configuring mounted services.
3. Click Add Mount Port.

4. Repeat Step 6.2 to Step 6.3 to add the other mount ports.
5. Click OK.
Step 7 Click Configration to configure the VC paths that are bound with the internal ports.
Step 8 Click OK.
NOTE
After you create an EPLAN service, if you want to set the Hub/Spoke attribute of a VB port, double-click
Hub/Spoke and select an option from the drop-down list. Services are interoperable between Hub ports or
between a Hub port and a Spoke port, but are isolated between Spoke ports.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

other.
Prerequisite
The port must be mounted to a VB.
Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way,
you can create VLANs.
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Select a service and click the VLAN
Filtering tab.
Step 2 Select the service and click New, the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN
ID, select an Available forwarding port, and then click .
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 5 Create other VLAN Filtering according to the requirements.
----End

Prerequisite
The VLAN must be created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MAC
Address, and Physical Port.
NOTE
The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.
For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service.
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
10.7.7 Disabling an MAC Address

The MAC address disabling function can prevent attacks initiated on the network or user side.
This helps to guarantee the stable running of the equipment on the network. After you create a
MAC address black list for a port that transmits EPLAN services, when the destination or source
MAC address carried in the packet that enters the port matches a MAC address in the black list,
this packet is discarded. The MAC address that is already added to static routes cannot be added
to the MAC address black list.
Prerequisite
Context
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the service.
Procedure
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Disable MAC Address tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Click New and the Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID
and MAC Address.
Step 3 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
----End

Prerequisite
Context
l If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address
items. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC
address table may not be updated according to the change in the network.
l If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,
packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance
of the network is affected.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is
displayed. Enter the value of the aging time.
NOTE
MAC Address Aging Time supports three time units, including minute, hour, and day. The value ranges
from 1 to 120.
When the unit of the MAC Address Aging Time is set to day, the valid range is 1-12.
Step 3 Click OK and then click Apply.
----End

normal.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
NOTE
requirements.
Procedure
Description.
NOTE
----End

Prerequisite
Precaution
CAUTION
Procedure
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
----End
10.8 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services on a WDM

Network
This topic describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service on a WDM network on a per-
NE basis.
10.8.1 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process

This section describes the EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process that mainly consists of
10.8.4 Creating EVPL (QinQ) Services
When the services of multiple users that have the same C-VLAN ID are accessed on the same
station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added to
isolate the services of different users from each other.
normal.
10.8.6 Deleting EVPL(QinQ) Services
To release network resources, you can delete the unwanted EVPL(QinQ) services.

Figure 10-12 shows the process for configuring EVPL (QinQ) services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-12 EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process

Required
Optional
Configure Enable NE
Deploying a Configure Configure Verify Back up NE
pass-through Performance
Network source NE sink NE service Configuration Data
NE Monitoring
Creating and Setting Setting Setting

Creating Test the Ethernet Performance
Backing Up the
Configuring External Ports External Ports NE Database to
Cross- Services Monitoring
NEs Attributes of Attributes of the SCC Board
Connection Parameters of
Ethernet Ethernet Between Line an NE
Boards Boards and Line Configuring
Creating Fibers Ethernet Service Automatically
Boards Backing Up the
Setting Internal OAM
NE Database to a
Ports Setting Internal
CF Card
Attributes of Ports Configuring the
Configuring
Ethernet Attributes of Ethernet Port
Communication OAM
Manually Backing
Boards Ethernet Up the NE
Boards Database to a CF
Setting the NE Card
Creating
Time Cross- Creating
Connection Cross-
Between Connection
Configuring
Ethernet and Between
Clocks
Line Boards Ethernet and
Line Boards
Configuring
Creating
Orderwire Creating
EVPL(QinQ)
Services EVPL(QinQ)
Configuring Services
Protection
NOTE
phases of EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source
NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.

Prerequisite
Procedure
----End


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Procedure
----End

Prerequisite
The port attribute must be configured for the Ethernet board.
The cross-connections must be configured for the Ethernet boards.
Applicable to the TBE, L4G and ECOM board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
Procedure
Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL Service tab.
Step 2 Select the Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select EVPL(QinQ) from the Service Type drop-down list.
Step 5 Configure the information related to the EVPL (QinQ) service, such as Direction, Source
Port, Sink Port, etc.
NOTE
l You can only set Direction to unidirectional.

l In Port Attributes, certain parameters can be modified. If port attributes are already set, however, use
the default values.
l In Port Attributes, you can set TAG for a port in Ethernet Interface.
Step 6 Click Apply or OK. The created EVPL service is displayed in the window.
Step 7 Optional: To create VLAN SNCP at the receive end of services, after creating Ethernet services
at the transmit end, double-click the field of OAM Enabled and set the value to Enabled.
Step 8 Select the Ethernet Line Service tab, and then click Query. The created EVPL (QinQ) service
is displayed.
NOTE
To transmit a large volume of service data, you do not need to set OAM Enabled during the creation of
VLAN SNCP on the TBE board in consideration of bandwidth usage.
----End

normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Context
NOTE
requirements.
Procedure
Description.
NOTE
----End

Prerequisite
EVPL(QinQ) services must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EVPL(QinQ) services.
Step 3 Select the desired EVPL(QinQ) service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed,
click OK to delete the service.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.9 Configuring an EVPL (QinQ) Service on an SDH

Network
This topic describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service on an SDH network on a per-
NE basis.

normal.

Figure 10-13 shows the process for configuring EVPL (QinQ) services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-13 EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process

Required
Optional
Configure Enable NE
Deploying a Configure Configure Verify Back up NE
pass-through Performance
Network source NE sink NE service Configuration Data
NE Monitoring
Creating and Setting Setting Setting

Creating Test the Ethernet Performance
Backing Up the
Configuring External Ports External Ports NE Database to
Cross- Services Monitoring
NEs Attributes of Attributes of the SCC Board
Connection Parameters of
Ethernet Ethernet Between Line an NE
Boards Boards and Line Configuring
Creating Fibers Ethernet Service Automatically
Boards Backing Up the
Setting Internal OAM
NE Database to a
Ports Setting Internal
CF Card
Attributes of Ports Configuring the
Configuring
Ethernet Attributes of Ethernet Port
Communication OAM
Manually Backing
Boards Ethernet Up the NE
Boards Database to a CF
Setting the NE Card
Creating
Time Cross- Creating
Connection Cross-
Between Connection
Configuring
Ethernet and Between
Clocks
Line Boards Ethernet and
Line Boards
Configuring
Creating
Orderwire Creating
EVPL(QinQ)
Services EVPL(QinQ)
Configuring Services
Protection
NOTE
phases of EVPL (QinQ) service configuration process. They are deploying a network, configure source
NE, configure sink NE, configure pass-through NE and verify service.

Prerequisite
Procedure
----End

a Line Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Procedure
Configuration.
NOTE
Step 4 Click OK.
----End

Prerequisite
l Applies to the EGSH boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 2 Select the Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner.
Step 3 Click New and the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Complete the information of the EVPL (QinQ) service.
NOTE
If an appropriate path is not available in the Bound Path field, click Configuration to bind new paths.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Context
NOTE
requirements.
Procedure
Description.
NOTE
----End

Prerequisite
Precaution
CAUTION
Procedure
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.10 Configuring VLAN Groups

The Web LCT supports the configuration of Ethernet VLAN groups. Continuous VLANs can
be bound as one group. Once one VLAN in a VLAN group is configured, the other VLANs have
the same configuration, this is similar to expanding the carrying capacity of a VLAN flow.
10.10.1 Creating a VLAN Group

The VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow the
procedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.
10.10.1 Creating a VLAN Group

The VLAN group can extend the number of supported VLAN flows. You can follow the
procedure described in this section to create a VLAN group.
Prerequisite
The configuration principles are as follows:
l The VLAN group is of port attributes. It is valid only at the service input port. Both the
PORT and VCTRUNK ports can be set as a VLAN group.
l The configuration of a VLAN group is based on the C-VLAN.
l When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for a member VLAN (a non-
initial VLAN in the VLAN group), the VLAN group cannot be created. The service
mentioned includes services that involve VLAN configuration, such as EPL service, flow
configuration and ETH OAM configuration.
l When you create a VLAN group, if a service is configured for the initial VLAN, the VLAN
group can be created, but the service may be transiently interrupted.
l The maximum number of VLAN groups is consistent with the number of board Links.
l After you create the port VLAN group, if the VLAN ID of the services to be created is
within the VLAN group, the services must be created based on the initial VLAN ID. If the
VLAN ID is not within the port VLAN group, the services are unrestricted.
CAUTION
Creating a VLAN group may affect the services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet
Line Service from the Function Tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Click the VLAN Group tab.

Step 3 Click New. In the dialog box displayed, configure the VLAN group parameters.
NOTE
l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = p
x 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12.
l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the value
of Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of Initial VLAN is an
integer other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value of n is the same as that in the
formula of the Initial VLAN.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.
Step 4 Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click OK. and the configuration is
complete. The created port VLAN group is displayed in the user interface.
----End
10.11 Configuring MAC Address Filtering

MAC address filtering is a broadband transmission solution oriented to alleviate the secondary
router load.
10.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite Router

On the Ethernet data board of the standby station, add the MAC address of the opposite router,
to realize the filtering of MAC address on the standby station.
10.11.2 Deleting the Opposite Router MAC Address
You can delete the opposite router MAC address when port MAC address filtering is not
required.
10.11.1 Adding the MAC Address of the Opposite Router

On the Ethernet data board of the standby station, add the MAC address of the opposite router,
to realize the filtering of MAC address on the standby station.
Prerequisite
Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
NOTE
l On Windows:
To complete the operation, you need to set the General tab of the Internet option of the browser as
follows: In Internet Temporary Files, click Settings. The Settings dialog box is displayed. Then, in
Check for newer version of stored pages, select Every visit to the page.
l On Solaris:
1. Install the flash plug-in.
2. Navigate to Mozilla, and enter about:config in the address bar. In Filter, enter cache. Then, set
the Value of browser.cache.disk.enable to true.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet data board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Port MAC Address Filtering from the function tree.
Step 2 Click New, the Create MAC Address Filter dialog box is played.
Step 3 Set the MAC Address. Click OK. Then, the added MAC address of the opposite router is
displayed in the list.
----End
10.11.2 Deleting the Opposite Router MAC Address

You can delete the opposite router MAC address when port MAC address filtering is not
required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Applicable to the TBE board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, choose the Ethernet data board. Select Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Port MAC Address Filtering from the function tree.
Step 2 Select the port from the Port List. Choose the MAC address from the Opposite Router MAC
Address List.
Step 3 Click Delete to delete the MAC address.
----End
10.12 Conversion Between EPL Ethernet Services and VLAN

SNCP Services
The conversion between the created EPL Ethernet services and VLAN SNCP services can be
realized on the Web LCT.
10.12.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP Service
You can convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service by using the Web LCT.
10.12.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet Service
You can convert a VLAN SNCP service to an EPL service by using the Web LCT.
10.12.1 Converting an EPL Ethernet Service to a VLAN SNCP

Service
You can convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service by using the Web LCT.
Prerequisite
Applicable to the TBE and L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800.
An EPL Ethernet services must be created.
An idle port must be available when you convert an EPL service to a VLAN SNCP service.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab. Select an service that you want to convert, right-click, and choose
Convert to VLAN SNCP from the shortcut menu. The Convert to VLAN SNCP Service dialog
box is displayed.
Step 3 Set protection service parameters such as Source Port according to the actual requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l Make sure that the port settings of the protection service and the service being protected are consistent.
l If the port type of protection services is not UNI, the Web LCT automatically sets the port type to UNI.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-Connection
Configuration from the Function Tree. Create the cross-connections between the Ethernet board
and the east line board and between the Ethernet board and the west line board.
NOTE
l When the Ethernet board is the L4G board, create the cross-connection between this L4G board and
the L4G board that is in another direction.
l If the cross-connection already exists, skip this step.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, create the Ethernet dual fed service of the opposite NE
and the corresponding cross-connections between the Ethernet board and the east line board and
between the Ethernet board and the west line board.
Step 7 Optional: If the service passes through an intermediate station, on the intermediate station, you
should configure the pass-through for the service between the line boards.
----End
10.12.2 Converting a VLAN SNCP Service to an EPL Ethernet

Service
You can convert a VLAN SNCP service to an EPL service by using the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Applicable to the TBE and L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800.
VLAN SNCP services must be created.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab.
Step 3 Select a VLAN SNCP working service, right-click, and choose Convert to Normal Service
from the shortcut menu, a confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK to convert the service to an EPL service.
----End
10.13 Configuring Port Mirroring

You can configure port mirroring to analyze only packets for mirrored ports. In this way, you
can monitor all mirrored ports. This helps you to manage the ports.
Prerequisite
Applicable to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800.
The mirror listener port should contain no Ethernet service, and has not be aggregated.
Context
A mirror listener port cannot be configured with any service.
The concatenation port mirroring function is not supported. For example, if VCTRUNK2 port
is configured to listen to VCTRUNK1 port, you cannot configure any other ports to listen to
VCTRUNK2 port.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Port Mirroring from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Click Query to query the status of port mirroring that you configure.
Step 3 Click New and the Port Mirror Management window is displayed.
Step 4 Set Mirror Listener Port, Uplink Listened Port, and Downlink Listened Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l For the TBE and EGSH board, you can set Uplink Listened Port or Downlink Listened Port, and
the two ports cannot be set at the same time.
l For the L4G boards, only Uplink Listened Port is supported.
l Do not select a port where services exist from the Mirror Listener Port drop-down list. Otherwise,
creating port mirroring fails.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
10.14 Diagnosing Ethernet Protocol Faults

When the Ethernet protocol operates abnormally, the Web LCT diagnoses the protocol fault,
displays the diagnosis contents, and restores the normal operation of the Ethernet protocol.
Prerequisite
Applies to the TBE, L4G board of the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 3800.
Context
The protocol types that can be diagnosed include 802.1agOAM, 802.3ahOAM, LAG,
DLAG, RSTP, IGMP Snooping and LCAS.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Protocol Fault Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Type tab and click Diagnosis. The user interface of the Web LCT displays
the diagnosis result.
----End
10.15 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services

The EPL service provides a solution for the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet
services over an exclusive bandwidth. EPL services are applied to the scenarios where the user-
side data communication equipment connected to the transmission network does not support
VLANs or where the VLAN planning is kept secret from the network carrier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This section describes the Ethernet service configuration in a ring network.
Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and
transparently transmitted on the WDM network. In this way, the node communicates with the
remote node.
This section describes how to configure an EPL service through an example in which station C
transmits the EPL service to station A. The case that station A transmits the EPL service to
station C is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

Service Requirement
are OADM stations.
There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EPL
service exists between stations A and C and passes through station B. The working mode of the
bidirectional EPL service is set to auto-negotiation and the bidirection EPL service does not
support the VLAN function.
Figure 10-14 Networking diagram for configuring EPL services
User1
Web LCT East L4G

West L4G
East L4G B D
West L4G
C East L4G
West L4G
East L4G
West L4G
NG WDM Equipment
User2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The L4G and TBE boards support the EPL service. In this example, each station is configured
with two L4G boards.

remote node.
Figure 10-15 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EPL services between stations A and
C.
Figure 10-15 Service signal flow of the bidirectional EPL service
ONEC ONE A
W-L4G W-L4G
PORT3 1(IN/OUT)-
AP1 PORT3 1(IN/OUT)-
PORT4 1
AP2 PORT4 1
AP1
PORT5
PORT5 AP2
AP4 1(IN/OUT)-
PORT8 4 1(IN/OUT)-
PORT8 AP4 4
PORT3 1(IN/OUT)-
AP1 1(IN/OUT)-
1 AP1 PORT3
PORT4 1
PORT4
PORT5 AP2 AP2
1(IN/OUT)- PORT5
4 1(IN/OUT)-
PORT8 AP4 4 AP4 PORT8
E-L4G E-L4G
: Client-side signals
: WDM-side working service
Figure 10-16 shows the wavelength allocation.
Wavelength(nm)/ A B C D
Frequency(THz)
1560.61/
192.10
Working channel

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-4 Parameters of external ports on the Ethernet boards
Parameter A C
Board 3-L4G 3-L4G
Port PORT3 PORT3
Port Enabled Enabled Enabled
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame Length 1522 1522
Table 10-5 Parameters of internal ports on the Ethernet boards
Parameter A C
Board 3-L4G 3-L4G
Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
Table 10-6 Parameters of the EPL services
Parameter EPL Service of A EPL Service of C
Board 3-L4G 3-L4G
Service Type EPL EPL
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Port VCTRUNK1 PORT3
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 1 1
Sink Port PORT3 VCTRUNK1
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6) 1 1

This section describes how to configure an EPL service through an example in which station C
transmits the EPL service to station A. The case that station A transmits the EPL service to
station C is similar, and thus is not described in this section.
Prerequisite
The network must be created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPL Service.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPL service that User2 occupies at station C.
1. Configure the attributes of the external port that User2 occupies.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the L4G board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Then, select External Port.
b. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.26.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes
(External Port).
Parameter Value Description
Port Enabled PORT3: Enabled The EPL service of User2 occupies the
external port PORT3, and the enabling
status of PORT3 is set to enabled.
Working Mode PORT3: Auto- The access equipment of the EPL

Negotiation service of User2 supports auto-
negotiation, and the working mode of
PORT3 is set to auto-negotiation.
Maximum Frame PORT3: 1522 In general, the default value 1522 is

Length used.
c. Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended.
d. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.26.5 Parameters: TAG
Attributes.
TAG PORT3: Access The access equipment of the service of

User2 does not support the VLAN
function. The transmitted data does
not contain the VLAN ID. In this case,
the TAG identifier of PORT3 is set to
Access.
Default VLAN ID PORT3: 1 The EPL service of User2 occupies the

PORT and VCTRUNK interfaces
exclusively, and the service does not
need to be separated by using a VLAN
ID. In this case, you do not need to
configure the VLAN ID but retain the
default value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
VLAN Priority PORT3: 0 The VLAN ID is not required, and thus

VLAN priority is also not required. In
this case, retain the default value,
namely 0.
e. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.26.6 Parameters: Network
Attributes.
Port PORT3: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port

processes the 802.1Q tag header. The
port attributes include Tag Aware,
Access, and Hybrid.
2. Configure the attribute of the internal port that User2 occupies.

Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Then, select Internal Port.
b. Click the Bound Path tab. On the tab page, browse the paths that are bound with the
current VCTRUNK port.
NOTE
For L4G and TBE board, each VCTRUNK port is bound with a fixed wavelength. Thus, the
bound path of the VCTRUNK cannot be set.
c. Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.26.6 Parameters: Network
Attributes.
Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port

Access, and Hybrid.
d. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see 10.26.5 Parameters: TAG
Attributes.
TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag For the internal port, you do not need
Aware to configure the tag header but retain
the default value, namely Tag Aware.
3. Configure the EPL service of User2 at station C.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL
Service tab.
b. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog
box is displayed.
c. Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box. For details
on parameter settings, see 10.26.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service.
Service Type EPL The service type of User2 is EPL.
Direction Bidirectional The service of User2 is a bidirectional

service.
Source Port PORT3 Indicates the name of the source port.
Source C-VLAN 1 The value of this parameter is

(e.g. 1,3-6) consistent with the default VLAN ID
of the Tag Attributes parameter
described in step 1.a.
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.
Sink C-VLAN 1 The value of this parameter is

(e.g.1, 3-6) consistent with the default VLAN ID
of the Tag Attributes parameter
described in step 1.b.
d. Click OK, and the created Ethernet private line service is displayed on the interface.
4. Configure the electrical cross-connection services of User2 at station C.
a. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
b. Click New at the bottom of the window. The Create Cross-Connection Service
dialog box is displayed.
c. Enter the attributes of the newly created cross-connection service in the dialog box.
Service Level GE Service level of station C is GE.
Direction Bidirectional The cross-connetion is bidirectional.
Source Slot 3-L4G The name of source slot.
Source Port 101(AP1/AP1) Select the port of the cross-connection

source.
Source Optical 1 Using the default value 1.

Path(e.g.1,3-6)
Sink Slot 4-L4G The name of sink slot.
Sink Port 201(LP/LP) Select the port of the cross-connection

sink.
Sink Optical Path 1 Using the default value 1.

(e.g.1,3-6)
d. Click OK, and the created cross-connection service is displayed on the interface.
Step 2 Configure the electrical cross-connection services at station B.
l Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-
l Click New on lower right of the window. The Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box
is displayed.
l Enter the attributes of the newly created cross-connection service in the dialog box.
Service Level GE Service level of station B is GE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Source Port 201(LP/LP) Select the port of the cross-connection

source.
Source Optical Path 1 Using the default value 1.

(e.g.1,3-6)

sink.

(e.g.1,3-6)
l Click OK, and the created cross-connection service is displayed on the interface.
Step 3 Configure the EPL service that User1 occupies at station A.
Configure the EPL service at station A by referring to step 1.
Step 4 Verify the service configurations of User2 and User1. For the verification procedure, see Testing
Ethernet Service Paths.
NOTE
The external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet service must
be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function for the NEs. For the operation procedures, see
Enabling/Disabling Performance Monitoring of a Specified NE.
----End
10.16 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL(QinQ)

Services
EVPL(QinQ) services realize the nesting of VLAN. With the increase of network users, the
existing number of VLAN IDs fail to meet the requirement of users. After EVPL(QinQ) services
are configured, however, users can be identified through multiple layers of VLAN IDs. In this
case, VLAN extension is achieved.

remote node.
This section describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service through an example in which
station A transmits the EVPL (QinQ) service to station B. The case that station B transmits the
EVPL(QinQ) service to station A is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
See Figure 10-17. The optical NEs (ONEs) A, B, and C form a ring network, and all the ONEs
are OADM stations.
There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EVPL
(QinQ) service exists between stations A and B. The working mode of the bidirectional EVPL
(QinQ) service is set to auto-negotiation.
Figure 10-17 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL(QinQ) service
East L4G
West L4G
Web LCT
East L4G East L4G

West L4G West L4G
B
A
User 2
User 1
NG WDM Equipment

Both the TBE and L4G boards support EVPL(QinQ) service. In this example, each station is
configured with two L4G boards.

remote node.
Figure 10-18 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EVPL(QinQ) services between stations
A and B.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-18 Service signal flow of EVPL(QinQ) service

ONE A East L4G ONE B East L4G
Port 3 AP 1 1(IN/OUT)1 1(IN/OUT)1 AP 1 Port 3

Port 5
AP 4 1(IN/OUT)4 1(IN/OUT)4 AP 4
Port 8 Port 8

Port 5
AP 4 1(IN/OUT)4 1(IN/OUT)4 AP 4
Port 8 Port 8
West L4G West L4G
: WDM-side signals
Wavelength(nm)/ A B C
Frequency(THz)
1560.61/
192.10
Working channel
Parameters A B
Board 3-L4G 4-L4G
Port PORT3 PORT3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters A B
Parameter A B
Board 3-L4G 4-L4G
Table 10-9 Parameters of the EVPL(QinQ) service
Parameter EVPL(QinQ) Service of A EVPL(QinQ) Service of B
Service Type EVPL(QinQ) EVPL(QinQ)
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Operation Type Add S-VLAN Strip S-VLAN
Source Port Port3 VCTRUNK1
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Port3
Sink S-VLAN 1 1

This section describes how to configure an EVPL (QinQ) service through an example in which
station A transmits the EVPL (QinQ) service to station B. The case that station B transmits the
EVPL(QinQ) service to station A is similar, and thus is not described in this section.
Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EVPL(QinQ)
Service.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL(QinQ) service that User1 occupies at station A.
l In the NE Explorer, select the L4G board in slot 3 and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then,
select External Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic Attributes
Parameter (External Port).
Port Enabled PORT3: Enabled The EVPL(QinQ) service of User1

occupies the external port PORT3, and
the enabling status of PORT3 is set to
enabled.
Working Mode PORT3: Auto- The access equipment of the EVPL

Negotiation (QinQ) service of User1 supports auto-

Length used.
l Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For
the default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter
(External Port).
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For the default value of the parameter, see Description of the TAG Attributes
Parameter.
Port PORT3: C-Aware In the case of C-Aware, the port does

not process the TAG attribute of
802.1Q. It determines that the data
packet carries C-VLAN tag and
processes the data packet based on the
C-VLAN tag.

select Internal Port.
l Click the Bound Path tab. On the tab page, browse the paths that are bound with the
current VCTRUNK port. For details on the parameter description, see Description of
the Bound Path Parameter.
NOTE
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Network Attributes
Parameter.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Port VCTRUNK1: S- In the case of S-Aware, the port does

Aware not process the TAG attribute of
802.1Q. It determines that the data
packet carries S-VLAN tag and
processes the data packet based on the
S-VLAN tag.
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the TAG Attributes
Parameter.
3. Configure the EVPL(QinQ) service of User1 at station A.

Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the EPL
Service tab.
l Select Display QinQ Shared Service check box in the lower right corner.
l Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog
box is displayed.
l Enter the attributes of the Ethernet private line service in the dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Service Type EVPL(QinQ) The service type of User1 is EVPL

(QinQ).
Direction Bidirectional The service of User1 is a bidirectional

service.
Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add the label of S-VLAN.
Source Port PORT3 Indicates the name of the source port.
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 Indicates the name of the sink port.
Sink S-VLAN 1 Select the S-VLAN.

(e.g.1, 3-6)
l Click OK, and the created EVPL(QinQ) service is displayed on the interface.
4. Configure the electrical cross-connection services of User1 at station A.
l Click New on lower right of the window. The Create Cross-Connection Service dialog
box is displayed.
Service Level GE Service level of station A is GE.
Direction Bidirectional The cross-connection is bidirectional.
Source Slot 3-L4G The name of source slot

source.
Source Optical 1 Select the optical path of the cross-

Path(e.g.1,3-6) connection source.
Sink Slot 4-L4G The name of sink slot

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

sink.
Sink Optical Path 1 Select the optical path of the cross-

(e.g.1,3-6) connection sink.
Step 2 Configure the EVPL(QinQ) service that User2 occupies at station B.
Configure the EVPL(QinQ) service at station B by referring to step 1.
NOTE
be set to Tag Aware, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup.
Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any CF Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
card Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF card Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a
CF Card
----End
10.17 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Service

The Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN) service supports layer 2 switching of Ethernet
data, which is transmitted according to its destination media access control (MAC) address.

10.17.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation
remote node.
10.17.3 Configuring Process
This section describes how to configure an EPLAN service through an example in which station
B transmits the EPLAN service to station D. The case that station D transmits the EPLAN service
to station B is similar, and thus is not described in this section.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Requirement
are OADM stations.
There is Ethernet communication between User1 and User2. In addition, a bidirectional EPLAN
service exists between stations B and D and passes through station C. The working mode of the
bidirectional EPLAN service is set to auto-negotiation.
Figure 10-20 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services
East TBE
West L4G
Web LCT
West TBE A East TBE

East L4G West L4G
B D
User 1 C User 2
East L4G
West L4G NG WDM Equipment

The TBE boards support the EPLAN service. In this example, stations B and D are configured
with one TBE board and one L4G board. As a pass through station, station C is configured with
two L4G boards.
10.17.2 Service Signals Flow and Wavelength Allocation

remote node.
Figure 10-21 shows the signal flow of the bidirectional EPLAN services between stations B
and D.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-21 Service signal flow of the EPLAN service

ONE B East L4G ONE D East TBE
Port 3 AP 1 1(IN/OUT)1 AP 1 Port 3

Port 5
AP 4 1(IN/OUT)4
Port 8 AP 16 Port 11

1(IN/OUT)4 AP 4
Port 11 AP 16 Port 8
West TBE West L4G
: WDM-side signals
Wavelength(nm)/ A B C D
Frequency(THz)
1560.61/
192.10
Working channel
Parameter B D
Board 1-TBE 3-L4G
Port PORT3 PORT3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter B D
Parameter B D
Board 1-TBE 3-L4G
Table 10-12 Parameters of the EPLAN services
Parameter EPLAN Service of EPLAN Service of

B D
VB Name BB DD
VB Type 802.1q 802.1q
Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter IVL/Ingress Filter

Enable Enable
Configure Mount Selected Forwarding PORT3 PORT3

Ports VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
10.17.3 Configuring Process

This section describes how to configure an EPLAN service through an example in which station
B transmits the EPLAN service to station D. The case that station D transmits the EPLAN service
to station B is similar, and thus is not described in this section.
Prerequisite
You must read and understand the contents of Configuration Process of the EPLAN
Service.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPLAN service that User1 occupies at station B.
l In the NE Explorer, select the TBE board in slot 1 and then choose Configuration >
select External Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameter on this tab page, click
Apply. For details on parameter settings, see Description of the Basic Attributes
Parameter (External Port).
Port Enabled PORT3: Enabled The EPLAN service of User1 occupies

the external port PORT3, and the
enabling status of PORT3 is set to
enabled.
Working Mode PORT3: Auto- The access equipment of the EPLAN

Negotiation service of User1 supports auto-

Length used.
l Click the Flow Control tab. The default value of the parameter is recommended. For
the default value of the parameter, see Description of the Flow Control Parameter
(External Port).
Parameter.
TAG PORT3: Access In this case, the TAG identifier of

PORT3 is set to Access.
Default VLAN ID PORT3: 1 The VLAN ID must be the same as the

VLAN ID in the VLAN Filtering.
VLAN Priority PORT3: 0 In this case, retain the default value,

namely 0.
Parameter.
Port PORT3: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port

Access, and Hybrid.

select Internal Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Click the Bound Path tab. On the tab page, browse the paths that are bound with the
current VCTRUNK port. For details on the parameter description, see Description of
the Bound Path Parameter.
NOTE
Parameter.
Port VCTRUNK1: UNI If the port is a UNI port, the port

Access, and Hybrid.
Parameter.
3. Configure the EPLAN service of User1 at station B.

Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Service
Mount tab.
l Click New on the lower right of the window. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog
box is displayed.
l Enter the attributes of the Ethernet LAN service in the dialog box. For details on
parameter settings, see Description of the EPLAN Service Parameter.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
VB Name BB Specifies a VB name that contains a

maximum of 16 characters or numerals.
VB Type 802.1q Using a default value.
Bridge Switch IVL/Ingress Filter You can create VLAN when Bridge
Mode Enable Switch Mode is IVL/Ingress Filter
Enable.
l Click Configure Mount, the Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Select the mount ports in the dialog box.
Parameter Value
Selected Forwarding Ports PORT3
VCTRUNK1
l Click OK, and the service mount is displayed on the interface.

l Click OK, and the created EPLAN service is displayed on the interface.
4. Configure the VLAN on station B of User1.
l Select the EPLAN services and then click VLAN Filtering tab. Click New, and the
Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
l Enter the VLAN ID, and select the
VLAN ID 1 Set 1 as the VLAN ID.
Available forwarding PORT3, VCTRUNK1 Select the forwarding port.

ports

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Click OK, and the created VLAN filtering is displayed on the interface.
5. Configure the electrical cross-connection services of User1 at station B.
l Click New on lower right of the window. The Create Cross-Connection Service dialog
box is displayed.
Service Level GE Service level of station B is GE.
Source Slot 1-TBE The name of source slot.
Source Port 101(AP1/AP1) Select the port of the cross-connection

source.
Source Optical 1 Using the default value 1.

Path(e.g.1,3-6)

sink.

(e.g.1,3-6)
Step 2 Configure the electrical cross-connection services at station C.

l Click New on lower right of the window. The Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box
is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Service Level GE Service level of station C is GE.

source.
Source Optical Path 1 Using the default value 1.

(e.g.1,3-6)

sink.

(e.g.1,3-6)
Step 3 Configure the EPLAN service that User2 occupies at station D.

Configure the EPLAN service at station D by referring to step 1.
NOTE
be set to Access, and the default VLAN ID must be set to the same value.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data on the NEs. Two methods are available for the backup.
Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any CF Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
card Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF card Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a
CF Card
----End
10.18 Configuration Example: Configuring EPL Services on

a SDH Network
EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the
bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support
VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another
station.
mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node
communicates with a remote node.
During the configuration of EPL services on Ethernet switching boards, you need to configure
Ethernet private line services. This topic describes the process of configuring Ethernet private
line services for Ethernet switching boards.

The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another
station.
Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 10-23, the service requirements are as follows:
l The two branches of user A that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with
each other over Ethernet. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The two branches of user B that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with
each other over Ethernet. A 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The services of user A must be isolated from the services of user B.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-23 Networking diagram of the EPL services

User A2 User B2
PORT1 PORT2
Line Board 1-SLQ64
Ethernet Board 4-EGSH
1
NE3
17
Line Board 1-SLQ64 NE2 NE4

Line Board 17-SLQ64
1
NE1
17
Line Board 17-SLQ64
PORT1 PORT2
User A1 User B1
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800

mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node
communicates with a remote node.
The signal flow of the EPL services and the timeslot allocation to the EPL services are shown
in Figure 10-24.
Figure 10-24 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board)
NE1 EGSH NE2 NE3 EGSH
PORT1 PORT1
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
User A1 User A2
VC4--xv:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1 VC4--xv:VC4-1
PORT2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
User B1 User B2
SDH

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The EPL services of user A:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 and pass
through NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board
of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE3.
l The EPL services of user B:
– Occupy the second and third VC-4s (VC4:VC4-2 and VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE3 and pass through NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4-
xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2
and VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board of NE3.
Table 10-13 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards
Parameter NE1 NE3
Board EGSH EGSH
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled
Working Mode 1000M Full 1000M Full 1000M Full 1000M Full
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex
Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length
Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Port Type UNI UNI UNI UNI
Table 10-14 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards
Parameter NE1 NE3
Board EGSH EGSH
Internal Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol
Bound Path VC4- VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4- VC4-xv:VC4-2,

xv:VC4-1 and VC4- xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-3
xv:VC4-3
Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-15 Parameters of the EPL services

Parameter EPL Services of User A EPL Services of User B
Board EGSH
Service Type EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1 PORT2
Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) Null Null
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) Null Null

During the configuration of EPL services on Ethernet switching boards, you need to configure
Ethernet private line services. This topic describes the process of configuring Ethernet private
line services for Ethernet switching boards.
Prerequisite
The 3 Creating a Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 10.5.1 EPL Service Configuration Process.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used
by the services of user A1 and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH and then choose Communication > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Description
ter Example
Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user A1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user B1. In
Disable this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
d Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter Example
Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the Ethernet service access
g Mode Duplex equipment of user A1 and user B1 supports
PORT2: 1000M Full- the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,
Duplex Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.
Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length
MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.
PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.
l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Parame Value in This Example Description

ter
Entry PORT1: Disabled The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPL
Detectio PORT2: Disabled transparent transmission services. Hence,
n you need not enable the entry detection
function to check the VLAN tags of the
packets. In this example, Entry Detection
needs to be set to Disabled. When Entry
Detection is set to Disabled, the parameters
of TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN
Priority are invalid.
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the

ter
Port PORT1: UNI The UNI interface processes the tag attribute
Type PORT2: UNI of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is,
the UNI interface processes and identifies the
VLAN information of the accessed user
packets, according to the supported tag flag,
namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Configure the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH
board) used by the services of user A1 and user B1.
l Select Internal Port.
ter
Entry VCTRUNK1: Disabled The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPL
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Disabled transparent transmission services. Hence,
n you need not enable the entry detection
function to check the VLAN tags of the
packets. In this example, Entry Detection
needs to be set to Disabled. When Entry
Detection is set to Disabled, the parameters
of TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN
Priority are invalid. Hence, it is
recommended that this parameter adopts the
default value.
ter
Port PORT1: UNI The UNI interface processes the tag attribute
Type PORT2: UNI of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is,
the UNI interface processes and identifies the
VLAN information of the accessed user
packets, according to the supported tag flag,
namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.
l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
ter
Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP In this example, the EGSH board is used.

g VCTRUNK2: GFP This parameter adopts the default value
Protocol GFP. Mapping Protocol of the
VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.
Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.
FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
ter
Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS VCTRUNK2: Enabled enabled.
LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
VCTRUNK2: Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.
HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time VCTRUNK2: 2000 default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.
WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) VCTRUNK2: 300 default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.
l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click
and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation dialog box that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example
User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between

A1← e Ports K user A1 and user A2.
→user
A2 Avail Lev VC4-xv The service between user A1 and user A2
able el uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one
Boun VC-4 needs to be bound.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio The service between user A1 and user A2 is
vice nal a bidirectional service.
Dir
ecti
on
Ava VC4-1 -
ilab
le
Res
our
ces
User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 is used by the service between

B1← e Ports K user B1 and user B2.
→user
B2 Avail Lev VC4-xv The service between user B1 and user B2 uses
able el a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
Boun need to be bound.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio The service between user B1 and user B2 is
vice nal a bidirectional service.
Dir
ecti
on

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Ava VC4-2, The service between user B1 and user B2 uses

ilab VC4-3 a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
le needs to be bound.
Res
our
ces
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services for user A1 and user B1.
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog
box. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

This
Example
User A1 Service EPL The service of user A1 is an EPL service.

Type
Service Bidirection The service of user A1 is a bidirectional

Direction al service.
Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. In this example, the service of
user A1 occupies PORT1.
Source C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
VLAN(e.g. the VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)
Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
the service of user A1 occupies VCTRUNK1.
Sink C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
1, 3-6)
User B1 Service EPL The service of user B1 is an EPL service.

Type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Service Bidirection The service of user B1 is a bidirectional

Direction al service.

the source port. In this example, the service of
user B1 occupies PORT2.
Source C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
1, 3-6)

the service of user B1 occupies VCTRUNK2.
Sink C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
1, 3-6)
4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user A1
and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required, and then click Apply. Then, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example
User A1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
A1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the path
bound with the VCTRUNK.
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user A1 is a bidirectional

l service.
Source Slot 4-EGSH-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
Source 1 The value range of the source VC-4

Timeslot timeslots is consistent with the value of
Range(e.g. Available Resources, which is set for the
1,3-6) paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this
example, the value of Available
Resources is VC4-1.
Sink Slot 17- When you create a bidirectional SDH

SLQ64-1 service from an Ethernet board to a line
(SDH-1) board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.
Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
User B1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
B1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the path
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user B1 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source 2-3 The value range of the source VC-4

Timeslot timeslots is consistent with the value of
Range(e.g. Available Resources, which is set for the
1,3-6) paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this
example, the values of Available
Resources are VC4-2 and VC4-3.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
Sink 2-3 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots must be, however, the
same as the number of sink timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
Step 2 Configure the pass-through services for user A1 and user B1 on NE2.
1. Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
3. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog
This
Example
Level VC4 The SDH service of NE1, which passes through NE2, is
at the VC-4 level.
Direction Bidirectional The SDH service from NE1 to NE2 is a bidirectional

service.
Source Slot 1-SLQ64-1 The service signals are transmitted from 1-SLQ64-1
(SDH-1) (SDH-1) to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1). In this example,
Source Slot is set to 1-SLQ64-1(SDH-1).
Source 1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three
Timeslot VC-4s.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
Sink Slot 17-SLQ64-1 The service signals are transmitted from 1-SLQ64-1
(SDH-1) (SDH-1) to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1). In this example, Sink
Slot is set to 17-SLQ64-1(SDH-1).
Sink 1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three
Timeslot VC-4s.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
Step 3 Configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2 on NE3.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2.
Step 4 Check whether the service between user A1 and user A2 and the service between user B1 and
user B2 are correct. For the operation procedure, see 13.7 Testing Ethernet Service Paths.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.
Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
CF card.
The SCC board is configured with a CF Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF
card. Card
----End
10.19 Configuration Example: Configuring PORT-Shared

EVPL (VLAN) Services on a SDH Network
The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users,
which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to be
transmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.
The services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on an Ethernet
board of a station, need to be transmitted to different stations on different VCTRUNKs.
The Ethernet services wherein different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users,
are received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and then
transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a
remote node.
Ethernet switching boards are required for creating EVPL services of different VLAN IDs on
NE1. In this manner, the data of different users, which are received from the same external port,
can be differentiated. Ethernet transparent transmission boards are required for creating EPL
transparent transmission services on NE2 and NE4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on an Ethernet
board of a station, need to be transmitted to different stations on different VCTRUNKs.
Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 10-25, the service requirements are as follows:
l The headquarters C1 of user C is located at NE1. Two branches (C2 and C3) of user C are
located at NE2 and NE4. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN of
which the VLAN ID is 100. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLAN
of which the VLAN ID is 200.
l The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 require
a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.
l The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces
that work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The Ethernet equipment of C1 supports VLAN tags,
but the Ethernet equipment of C2 and C3 does not support VLAN tags.
– The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C2 is 100.
– The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C3 is 200.
Figure 10-25 Networking diagram for configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services
T2000
Line Board 1-JL64 NE3 Line Board 17-JL64

Ethernet Board 15-EGT6 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6
NE2 NE4
PORT1 PORT1
1 17 User C3
User C2
NE1
17 1
Line Board 17-SLQ64
PORT1
Line Board 1-SLQ64
User C1
VLAN 100
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In this example, NE1 is configured with an EGSH board. VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data
of different users that are received from the same port. NE2 and NE4 are configured with an
EGT6 board each. The EPL services are configured to implement service transparent
transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.
NOTE
The Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switching
boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards support
only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer
2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely than Ethernet transparent transmission
boards.

The Ethernet services wherein different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users,
are received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and then
transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a
remote node.
Figure 10-26 shows the signal flow of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the
timeslot allocation to the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.

NE2:EGT6
VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1

NE1:EGSH 4- 1 User C2
:VC VC4-xv:VC4-1
VC4
VCTRUNK1
EVPL1
PORT1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User C1
VCTRUNK2
EVPL2 VC
VC4-xv:VC4-2 4 :VC NE4:EGT6
4-1
VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1

User C3
VC4-xv:VC4-1
SDH
l The EVPL service from C1 to C2:

– Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
– Is added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of
NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.
l The EVPL service from C1 to C3:
– Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.
– Is added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board
of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4
Board EGSH EGT6 EGT6
Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
Maximum Frame 1522 1522 1522

Length
TAG Tag Aware - -
Entry Detection Enabled - -
Port Type UNI - -

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Protocol
TAG Access Access - -
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -
Default VLAN 100 200

ID
VLAN Priority 0 0
Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
Port Type UNI UNI - -
Table 10-18 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1
EVPL1 EVPL2
(PORT1←→ (PORT1←→
VCTRUNK1) VCTRUNK2)
Board EGSH

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter NE1
EVPL1 EVPL2
(PORT1←→ (PORT1←→
VCTRUNK1) VCTRUNK2)
Service Type EVPL
Source Port PORT1 PORT1
Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100 200
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100 200

Ethernet switching boards are required for creating EVPL services of different VLAN IDs on
NE1. In this manner, the data of different users, which are received from the same external port,
can be differentiated. Ethernet transparent transmission boards are required for creating EPL
transparent transmission services on NE2 and NE4.
Prerequisite
You must be familiar with 10.9.1 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user C1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) used by the service
of user C1.

ter
Enabled PORT1: Enabled The service of user C1 occupies PORT1. In

/ this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disable Enabled.
d

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet service access equipment of

g Mode Duplex user C1 supports the 1000M full-duplex
mode. In this example, Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.

m value 1522.
Frame
Length
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, MAC
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
default values.
ter
TAG PORT1: Tag Aware When the port is set to Tag Aware, all data
frames transmitted and received at the port
must carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware.
Default - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

VLAN not set Default VLAN ID.
ID
VLAN - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

Priority not set VLAN Priority.
Entry PORT1: Enabled The services of user C1 is EVPL services.

Detectio Hence, the entry detection function must be
n enabled to check whether the data frames
carry VLAN tags. In this manner, the user
data frames with different VLAN tags can be
distinguished at one port. In this example,
Entry Detection of PORT1 is set to
Enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Port PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board)
used by the services between user C1 and user C2 and between user C1 and user C3.
ter
TAG VCTRUNK1: Access This parameter is set to Access if the Ethernet

VCTRUNK2: Access equipment of user C2 and user C3 does not
support VLAN tags and if the transmitted
packets do not carry VLAN tags.
Default VCTRUNK1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN VCTRUNK2: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user C1 and user
C2.
The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the
transmission network side for the Ethernet
services between user C1 and user C3.
VLAN VCTRUNK1: 0 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority VCTRUNK2: 0 default value.
Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The services of user C1, user C2 and user C3
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled are EVPL services. Hence, the entry
n detection function must be enabled to check
whether the received packets carry VLAN
tags.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type VCTRUNK2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
ter
Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on

g VCTRUNK2: GFP the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Protocol equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

+1] same value.



OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter


Huawei Mode.

user.


Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
This
Example
User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 10-26, VCTRUNK1 is

C1← e Ports K1 used by the service between user C1 and user
→user C2.
C2
Availa Le VC4-xv The service between user C1 and user C2 uses
ble vel a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
Bound needs to be bound.
Paths
Se Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C2 is a
rvi al bidirectional service.
ce
Di
rec
tio
n

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Av VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is set

ail to VC4-1.
abl
e
Re
so
ur
ce
s
User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 10-26, VCTRUNK2 is

C1← e Ports K2 used by the service between user C1 and user
→user C3.
C3
Availa Le VC4-xv The service between user C1 and user C3 uses
ble vel a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
Bound needs to be bound.
Paths
Se Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C3 is a
rvi al bidirectional service.
ce
Di
rec
tio
n
Av VC4-2 In this example, Available Resources is set

ail to VC4-2.
abl
e
Re
so
ur
ce
s
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user C1 and user C2 and between user
C1 and user C3.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGSH board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
User C1 Service EPL The service between user C1 and C2 is a point-

←→user Type to-point Ethernet private line service.
C2
Service Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C2 is a
Direction al bidirectional service.

the source port. PORT1 is the external port
used by the service between user C1 and user
C2.
Source C- 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 100 for the Ethernet service between user C1
1, 3-6) and user C2.

VCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK1 is
the internal port used by the service between
user C1 and user C2.
Sink C- 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

User C1 Service EPL The service between user C1 and user C3 is a

←→user Type point-to-point Ethernet private line service.
C3
Service Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C3 is a

the source port. PORT1 is the external port
used by the service between user C1 and user
C3.


VCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK2 is
the internal port used by the service between
user C1 and user C2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

4. Configure the cross-connections from Ethernet services (between user C1 and user C2 and
between user C1 and user C3) to the SDH links.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog
r This
Example
User C1 Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the service

←→ between user C1 and user C2 is at the VC-4
user C2 level. The service level must be consistent
with the level of the paths bound with the
VCTRUNK.
Direction Bidirectiona The service between user C1 and user C2 is

l a bidirectional service.

Source 1 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.


timeslots.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
User C1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service

←→ between user C1 and user C3 is at the VC-4
user C3 level. The service level must be consistent
with the level of the paths bound with the
VCTRUNK.
Direction Bidirectiona The service between user C1 and user C3 is

l a bidirectional service.


Sink Slot 1-SLQ64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH


timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.

NOTE
The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See
Configuration Guide(on a SDH Network) to set the parameters.
Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see 13.7
Testing Ethernet Service Paths.
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C2, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C3, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 200 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.
NOTE
After the test, change the parameter values back to the values specified in the service configuration.
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End
10.20 Configuration Example: Configuring VCTRUNK-

Shared EVPL Services on a SDH Network
When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmission
network and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)
service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner,
the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.
The services of multiple Ethernet users are accessed on the same station, transmitted on the same
VCTRUNK, and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared
on the SDH side.
The services of multiple users are received from different external ports on an Ethernet board,
tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner,
the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node,
the VLAN tags are stripped.
Ethernet switching boards are required on both the source and sink nodes for creating EVPL
services with different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the packets received from different external
ports are added with different VLAN tags. As a result, the services of different users are isolated
from each other when they are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

The services of multiple Ethernet users are accessed on the same station, transmitted on the same
VCTRUNK, and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared
on the SDH side.
Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 10-27, the service requirements are as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Two branches of user D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l Two branches of user E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l The services of user D need to be isolated from the services of user E. The traffic of user
D and the traffic of user E, however, occupy a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth during different time
period.
l The Ethernet equipment of user D and user E provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical
Figure 10-27 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services
Line Board 1-SLQ64

Ethernet Board 4-EGSH NE3
PORT1
NE2 NE4
User D2 PORT2 1 NE1
17
PORT1 PORT2 User E1
User E2
Line Board 17-SLQ64

User D1
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800

In this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with an EGSH board. Different VLAN IDs
are used to isolate the data of different users transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.
l When the data of user D is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 100
is added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the
VLAN tag is stripped.
l When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 is
added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN
tag is stripped.

The services of multiple users are received from different external ports on an Ethernet board,
tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner,

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node,
the VLAN tags are stripped.
Figure 10-28 shows the signal flow of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the
timeslot allocation to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.

NE1:EGSH NE2:EGSH
PORT1 PORT1
User D1 EVPL1 EVPL1 User D2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 PORT2
VC4:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User E1 EVPL2 EVPL2 User E2
SDH
l The EVPL services of user D and user E that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4
(VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
l The EVPL services are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the
EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE2.

Parameter NE1 NE2
Board EGSH EGSH

Disabled
Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length
TAG Access Access Access Access
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Default VLAN 100 200 100 200

ID
VLAN Priority 0 0 0 0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter NE1 NE2
Board EGSH EGSH
Mapping Protocol GFP GFP
TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled
Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
Port Type UNI UNI
Table 10-21 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1 NE2
EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2

PORT1←→ PORT2←→ PORT1←→ PORT2←→
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
Board EGSH EGSH
Service Type EVPL EVPL
Service Bidirectional Bidirectional

Direction
Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Source C- 100 200 100 200

VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
Sink C-VLAN 100 200 100 200

(e.g.1, 3-6)

Ethernet switching boards are required on both the source and sink nodes for creating EVPL
services with different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the packets received from different external
ports are added with different VLAN tags. As a result, the services of different users are isolated
from each other when they are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user D1 and user E1 on NE1.
by the services of user D1 and user E1.
ter
Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user D1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user E1. In

g Mode Duplex user D1 and user E1 supports the 1000M full-
PORT2: 1000M Full- duplex mode. In this example, Working
Duplex Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex.

Frame
Length
default values.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
TAG PORT1: Access In this example, TAG is set to Access,

PORT2: Access because the Ethernet equipment of user D1
and user E1 does not support VLAN tag.
When TAG is set to Access for a port, only
the data packets that do not carry VLAN tags
can enter the port.
Default PORT1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN PORT2: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user D1 and user
D2.
The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the
transmission network side for the Ethernet
services between user E1 and user E2.
VLAN PORT1: 0 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority PORT2: 0 default value.
Entry PORT1: Enabled The services of user D1 and user E1 are

Detectio PORT2: Enabled EVPL services. Hence, the entry detection
n function must be enabled to check whether
the received packets carry VLAN tags. In this
example, Entry Detection is set to
Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

ter

Type PORT2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) used by the services
between user D1 and user D2 and between E1 and user E2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware When the port is set to Tag Aware, all data
frames transmitted and received at the port
must carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware.
Default - When TAG is set to TAG Aware, you need

ID
VLAN - When TAG is set to TAG Aware, you need

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The service of user D1 , user D2, user E1 and
Detectio user E2 are EVPL services. Hence, in this
n example, the entry detection function must be
enabled to check whether the received
packets carry VLAN tags.
ter

ter

g the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
same value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Field default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Calculat Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big

on parameter is valid and adopts the default
ter

g LCAS enabled.

equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

Time default value 2000. This parameter can also
user.

Time(s) default value 300. This parameter can also be

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

r This
Example
User Configura VCTRUN As shown in Figure 10-28, VCTRUNK1 is

D1← ble Ports K1 used by the service between user D1 and user
→user D2 and the service between user E1 and user
D2 E2.
User
Avai Le VC4-xv The service between user D1 and user D2 and
E1← lable ve the service between user E1 and user E2 share
→user Bou l a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
E2 nd needs to be bound.
Path
s Se Bidirection The service between user D1 and user D2 and
rvi al the service between user E1 and user E2 are
ce bidirectional services.
Di
re
cti
on
A VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is

va VC4-1.
ila
bl
e
Re
so
ur
ce
s
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user D1 and user D2 and between user
E1 and user E2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
This
Example
User D1 Service EPL The service between user D1 and user D2 is a

D2
Service Bidirection The service between user D1 and user D2 is a

the source port. In this example, PORT1 is the
external port used by the service between user
D1 and user D2.

VLAN(e.g. 100 on the transmission network side for the
1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user D1 and user D2.

VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the
service between user D1 and user D2.

1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user D1 and user D2.
User E1 Service EPL The service between user E1 and user E2 is a

E2
Service Bidirection The service between user E1 and user E2 is a

the source port. In this example, PORT2 is the
external port used by the service between user
E1 and user E2.

1, 3-6) Ethernet service between user E1 and user E2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

service between user E1 and user E2.

1, 3-6) Ethernet service between user E1 and user E2.
4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user D1
and user E1.
r This
Example
User D1 Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the service

←→ between user D1 and user D2 and the
user D2 service between user E1 and user E2 are at
User E1 the VC-4 level. The service level must be
←→ consistent with the level of the paths bound
user E2 with the VCTRUNK.
Direction Bidirectiona The service between user D1 and user D2

l and the service between user E1 and user
E2 are bidirectional services.



OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example


timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE1.
l Test the service connectivity between user D1 and user D2.
l Test the service connectivity between user E1 and user E2.
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End
10.21 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL (QinQ)

Services on a SDH Network
The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicable
where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmission
network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of different
users from each other.
When the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the same
The services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through different
external ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are added
to the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink node, the S-
VLAN tags are stripped.
The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source
and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different
S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and
are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

When the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the same
Service Requirement
l Two branches of user J are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l Two branches of user K are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l The services of user J need to be isolated from the services of user K. The traffic of user J
and the traffic of user K, however, occupy a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth during different time
periods.
l The Ethernet equipment of user J and user K provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The services of all the users have the same
VLAN ID of 100 and are accessed into the transmission network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-29 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services
Line Board 1-SLQ64 NE3

PORT1 NE2 NE4

VLAN 100
User J2 PORT2 1
VLAN 100
NE1
17 PORT2
User K2 VLAN 100
Line Board 17-SLQ64 User K1

PORT1
Ethernet Board 4-EGSH VLAN 100
User J1
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800

In this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with one EGSH board, which is an Ethernet
switching board supporting the QinQ function. Two layers of VLAN tags are added to isolate
the services of different users from each other.
l When the data of user J is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are
added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the S-
l When the data of user K is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are
added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the S-

The services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through different
external ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are added
to the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink node, the S-
Figure 10-30 shows the signal flow of the EVPL (QinQ) services and the timeslot allocation to
the EVPL (QinQ) services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-30 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

NE1:EGSH NE2:EGSH
PORT1 PORT1 User J2

User J1 EVPL1 EVPL1
VLAN 100
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1 PORT2
User K1 User K2
VLAN 100 EVPL2 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2 EVPL2 VLAN 100
SDH
PORT VCTRUNK
Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label
C-VLAN(100) User J1 S-VLAN(10) C-VLAN(100) User J1 C-VLAN(100) User J1
C-VLAN(100) User K1 S-VLAN(20) C-VLAN(100) User K1 C-VLAN(100) User K1
l The EVPL services of user J and user K that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4
(VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
l The EVPL services of user J and user K are added and dropped by using the first VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the
first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of
NE2.
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board EGSH EGSH

Disabled
Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length
Port Type C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board EGSH EGSH
Mapping Protocol GFP GFP
Port Type S-Aware S-Aware

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter NE1 NE2
Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4- VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-

xv:VC4-2 xv:VC4-2
Table 10-24 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) services

Parameter NE1 NE2
EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2

PORT1←→ PORT2←→ PORT1←→ PORT2←→
Board EGSH EGSH
Service Type EVPL(QinQ) EVPL(QinQ)
Service Bidirectional Bidirectional

Direction
Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add S-VLAN
Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Source C- 100 100 100 100

VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
Source S- - - - -
VLAN
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
Sink C-VLAN 100 100 100 100

(e.g.1, 3-6)
Sink S-VLAN 10 20 10 20
C-VLAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Priority
S-VLAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Priority

The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source
and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different
S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and
are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user J1 and user K1 on NE1.
by the services of user J1 and user K1.
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
ter
Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user J1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user K1. In
g Mode Duplex equipment of user J1 and user K1 supports

Frame
Length
default values.
Click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter Value in This Example Description
Port Type PORT1: C-Aware The C-Aware port is used for

PORT2: C-Aware connecting to the client network, and
identifies and processes the packets
that carry C-VLAN tags.
l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG
Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page
need not be set.
2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGSH board) used by the service
between user J1 and user J2 and the service between K1 and user K2.
Click Close.

ter
Port VCTRUNK1: S-Aware The S-Aware port is used for connecting to

Type the supplier network, and identifies and
processes the packets that carry S-VLAN
tags.
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.

ter

g the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
same value.

Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Field default value FCS32. Check Field Length

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Calculat Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big

on parameter is valid and adopts the default
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
ter

g LCAS enabled.

equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

Time default value 2000. This parameter can also
user.

Time(s) default value 300. This parameter can also be

The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the
Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click
Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
User Configurab VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between

J1←→ le Ports K1 user J1 and user J2 and the service between
user J2 user K1 and user K2.
User
Ava Lev VC4-xv The service between user J1 and user J2 and
K1←
ilabl el the service between user K1 and user K2 share
→user e a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
K2 Bou need to be bound.
nd
Path Ser Bidirection The service between user J1 and user J2 and
s vice al the service between user K1 and user K2 are
Dir bidirectional services.
ecti
on
Ava VC4-1, In this example, the first and second VC-4s of

ilab VC4-2 the EGSH board are bound.
le
Res
our
ces
need not be set.
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user J1 and user J2 and between user
K1 and user K2.
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
l Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane. Then, click New.
l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
This
Example
User J1 Service EVPL The service between user J1 and user J2 is an

←→ Type (QinQ) EVPL (QinQ) service.
user J2
Service Bidirectio The service between user J1 and user J2 is a
Direction nal bidirectional service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
Operation Add S- The service between user J1 and user J2 and

Type VLAN the service between user K1 and user K2
carry the same C-VLAN tag. Hence, a layer
of S-VLAN tag needs to be added to isolate
the services of different users.

recommended that you use a specific PORT
as the source port. In this example, PORT1
is the external port used by the service
between user J1 and user J2.
Source C- 100 The Ethernet service of user J1 carries the C-

VLAN(e.g. VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)
Source S- - The data packets that are accessed into the

VLAN external port carry the C-VLAN tags but do
not carry the S-VLAN tags.

service between user J1 and user J2.
Sink C- 100 The Ethernet service of user J2 carries the C-

VLAN(e.g. VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)
Sink S- 10 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 10

VLAN needs to be added to the service between user
J1 and user J2.
C-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority default value.
S-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

User K1 Service Bidirectio The service between user K1 and user K2 is

←→ Direction nal a bidirectional service.
user K2
Operation Add S- The service between user J1 and user J2 and
Type VLAN the service between user K1 and user K2
carry the same C-VLAN tag. Hence, a layer
of S-VLAN tag needs to be added to isolate
the services of different users.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

recommended that you use a specific PORT
as the source port. In this example, PORT2
is the external port used by the service
between user K1 and user K2.
Source C- 100 The Ethernet service of user K1 carries the

VLAN(e.g. C-VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)
Source S- - The data packets that are accessed into the

VLAN external port carry the C-VLAN tags but do
not carry the S-VLAN tags.

service between user K1 and user K2.
Sink C- 100 The Ethernet service of user K2 carries the

VLAN(e.g. C-VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)
Sink S- 20 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 20

VLAN needs to be added to the service between user
K1 and user K2.
C-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

S-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user J1
and user K1.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
User J1 Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the service

←→ between user J1 and user J2 and the service
user J2 between user K1 and user K2 are at the
User K1 VC-4 level. The service level must be
←→ consistent with the level of the paths bound
user K2 with the VCTRUNK.
Direction Bidirectiona The service between user J1 and user J2 and

l the service between user K1 and user K2 are
bidirectional services.

Source 1-2 The value range of the source timeslots is

values of Available Resources are VC4-1
and VC4-2.

Sink 1-2 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE1.
Step 3 Check whether the services between NE1 and NE2 are configured correctly. For the operation
procedures, see 13.7 Testing Ethernet Service Paths.
l Before testing the service connectivity between user J1 and user J2, set TAG to Access and
Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGSH board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Before testing the service connectivity between user K1 and user K2, set TAG to Access and
Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT2 on the EGSH board.
NOTE
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End
10.22 Configuration Example: Configuring EPLAN Services

(IEEE 802.1d Bridge) on a SDH Network
The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint
convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment
connected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning
cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.
The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded to
an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on the
SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At
the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparent transmission EPL
services.

The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.
Service Requirement
l Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs to
communicate with F2 and F3, and requires a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth for communication
with each branch.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The Ethernet equipment of user F provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces that
work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags. The VLAN IDs and the number
of VLANs, however, are unknown and may be changed.
NOTE
The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:
l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other.
l Branches F2 and F3 need not communicate with each other.
If branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.4.
Figure 10-31 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)
NE3
Line Board 1-SL64 Line Board 17-SL64

NE2 NE4
PORT1 1 NE1 17 PORT1

17 1
F2 F3
PORT1 Line Board 1-SLQ64
VB Line Board 17-SLQ64
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK Ethernet Board 4-EGSH
1 2 F1
PORT1
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 3500

In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGSH board that supports the
IEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs are not limited.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT2 board each. The EPL services are
configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded to
an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on the
SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
Figure 10-32 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-32 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation

NE2:EGT2
VCTRUNK1 PORT1
NE1:EGSH User F2
VC4-xv:VC4-1
C 4-1
VCTRUNK1 4:V
VC
PORT1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User F1
VCTRUNK2
V C4 NE4:EGT2
VC4-xv:VC4-2 :VC
4- 1
VB1
VCTRUNK1 PORT1
User F3
VC4-xv:VC4-1
SDH
l The Ethernet LAN services of user F occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1
and NE4.
l The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE2 are added and dropped by using the
first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-
xv:VC4-1) on the EGT2 board of NE2.
l The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE4 are added and dropped by using the
second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-
xv:VC4-1) on the EGT2 board of NE4.
Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex
Maximum Frame 1522 1522 1522

Length
Entry Detection Enabled - -
TAG Tag Aware
Port Type UNI - -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Protocol
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -
TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware
Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
Port Type UNI UNI - -
Table 10-27 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1
Board EGSH
VB Name VB1
Bridge Type IEEE 802.1d
Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable
Bridge Learning Mode SVL
Ingress Filter Disabled
VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub
VCTRUNK1 Spoke
VCTRUNK2 Spoke

At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At
the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparent transmission EPL
services.
Prerequisite
You must be familiar with 10.7.1 EPLAN Service Configuration Process.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPLAN services for user F1, user F2, and user F3 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGSH board) used by the service
of user F1.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click

ter Example
Enabled PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 carries the services

/ and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
Disable PORT1.
d

g Mode Duplex user F1 supports the 1000M full-duplex
mode. In this example, Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.

m value 1522.
Frame
Length
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, MAC
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click

ter
TAG PORT1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user F1

supports VLAN tags and the transmitted data
frames carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT1.

ID

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

Entry PORT1: Enabled The services of user F1 is EPLAN services.

Detectio Hence, the entry detection function must be
n enabled to check whether the packets carry
VLAN tags. In this example, Entry
Detection is set to Enabled.
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

ter

used by the services of user F2 and user F3 on NE1.

ter
TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user F2 and
VCTRUNK2: Tag Aware user F3 supports VLAN tags and the
transmitted data frames carry VLAN tags. In
this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

ID


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The services of user F2 and user F3 are

Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled EPLAN services. Hence, the entry detection
n function must be enabled to check whether
the packets carry VLAN tags. In this
Enabled.
ter

ter


+1] same value.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
ter


Huawei Mode.

user.


and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used by

F2 e Ports K1 the service of user F2.
Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user F2 uses a 100 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Boun bound.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio The service of user F2 is a bidirectional
vic nal service.
e
Dir
ecti
on
Av VC4-1 -
aila
ble
Res
our
ces
User Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used by

F3 e Ports K2 the service of user F3.
Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user F3 uses a 100 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Boun bound.
d
Paths Ser Bidirectio The service of user F3 is a bidirectional
vic nal service.
e
Dir
ecti
on
Av VC4-2 -
aila
ble
Res
our
ces
3. Create a bridge for the EGSH board on NE1.
l Click New.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
This
Example
VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describe

the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.
VB Type 802.1d The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwards
the packets according to the MAC addresses of the
user packets. The information in the VLAN tags of
the user packets, however, is not considered in the
learning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge is used when the entire information of
the VLANs used by the client cannot be learned or
when the data between the VLANs of the client need
not be isolated.
Bridge SVL/Ingress When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, all
Switch Filter the VLANs share the same MAC address table. That
Mode Disable is, the bridge learns and forwards the packets
according to the MAC addresses of the user packets
only. The information in the VLAN tags of the user
packets, however, is not considered in the learning
and forwarding process.
Bridge SVL -
Learning
Mode
Ingress Filter Disabled The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect the
VLAN tags of the received packets.
MAC Enabled When MAC Address Self-learning is set to

Address Enabled, the bridge can learn the MAC address.
Self-learning
l Click Configure Mount.

l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 in the Service Mount Configuration
dialog box that is displayed. Then, click .
l Click OK.
l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Then, the
Click Close.
4. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
NOTE
If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, proceed to Step 1.5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting
the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
This
Example
Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub If user F1 needs to communicate with user F2 and

VCTRUNK user F3, Hub/Spoke of PORT1 that accesses the
1: Spoke services of user F1 is set to Hub. A port of the
Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the
VCTRUNK Spoke or Hub attribute.
2: Spoke
If user F2 need not communicate with user F3, set
the two VCTRUNKs that access the services of users
F2 and F3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute
cannot communicate with each other.
5. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user F2
and user F3.
r This
Example
User F2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
F2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the paths
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user F2 is a bidirectional

l service.
Source 4-EGSH-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

Slot (SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example


Timeslot the same as or different from the value range
Range(e.g. of the source timeslots. The number of sink
1,3-6) timeslots, however, must be consistent with
the number of source timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediate
ly
User F3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
F3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the paths
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user F3 is a bidirectional

l service.
Source 4-EGSH-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

Slot (SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line


Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value range
Range(e.g. of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the same
as the number of source timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediate
ly

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F2, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board.
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F3, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board.
NOTE
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End
10.23 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN

Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network
The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication
equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags or
where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
LAN services of two users need to be isolated.
The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through
Layer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted
on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparent
transmission EPL services only.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

LAN services of two users need to be isolated.
Service Requirement
l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.
A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required. G2 and G3 need not communicate with each other.
l Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.
A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.
l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical
Figure 10-33 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
NE3
T2000
Line Board 1-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64

PORT2 PORT2
H2 NE2 NE4
H3
PORT1 1 NE1 PORT1
17
G2 G3
17 1
H1 G1
PORT2 PORT1
Line Board 1-SLQ64
Line Board 17-SLQ64
VB1 VLAN 200 VB1 VLAN 100

PORT2 PORT1
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IEEE 802.1q bridge, thus implementing EVPLAN services wherein services of different users
are isolated from each other.
NOTE
The Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switching
boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards support
only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer
2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely than Ethernet transparent transmission
boards.

The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through
Layer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted
on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
Figure 10-34 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).

NE2:EGT6
VCTRUNK1 PORT1
User G2
NE1:EGSH VC4-xv:VC4-1
C 4-1
4:V VCTRUNK2 PORT2
VC User H2
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 VC4-xv:VC4-2
PORT1 2
VC4-xv:VC4-1
C 4-
User G1 :V
VCTRUNK2 V C4
VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK3 4:
VC NE4:EGT6
PORT2 4-
VC4-xv:VC4-3 1
User H1
VCTRUNK4 VC PORT1
4:V VCTRUNK1
C 4-2 User G3
VC4-xv:VC4-4 VC4-xv:VC4-1
VB1 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
User H3
VC4-xv:VC4-2
SDH
PORT VCTRUNK
Strip VLAN Label Add VLAN Label Strip VLAN Label
Data(User G) VLAN(100) Data(User G) Data(User G)
Data(User H) VLAN(200) Data(User H) Data(User H)
l The Ethernet LAN services of user G:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the
first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board
l The Ethernet LAN services of user H:
– Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and
the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.
– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board
of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the fourth VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGSH board
Paramete NE1 NE2 NE4

r
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled
Working 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M

Mode Full- Full- Full- Full- Full- Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex
Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame
Length
TAG Access Access - - - -
Entry Enabled Enabled - - - -

Detection
Default 100 200 - - - -

VLAN ID
VLAN 0 0 - - - -
Priority
Port Type UNI UNI - - - -
Param NE1 NE2 NE3

eter
Port VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR

UNK1 UNK2 UNK3 UNK4 UNK1 UNK2 UNK1 UNK2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Param NE1 NE2 NE3

eter
Mappin GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP

g
Protoco
l
TAG Access Access Access Access - - - -
Entry Enable Enable Enable Enable - - - -

Detecti d d d d
on
Default 100 100 200 200 - - - -

VLAN
ID
VLAN 0 0 0 0 - - - -
Priority
Bound VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4-

Path xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4
-1 -2 -3 -4 -1 -2 -1 -2
Port UNI UNI UNI UNI - - - -

Type
Table 10-30 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
Board EGSH
VB Name VB1
Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q
Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Bridge Learning Mode IVL
Ingress Filter Enabled
VB Mount Port PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3,

VCTRUNK4
VLAN VLAN VLAN filtering table 1 VLAN filtering table 2

Filtering Filtering
VLAN ID 100 200
Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, PORT2, VCTRUNK3,

Physical Port VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK4
Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
PORT2 Hub
VCTRUNK Spoke
1
VCTRUNK Spoke
2
VCTRUNK Hub
3
VCTRUNK Hub
4

At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparent
transmission EPL services only.
Prerequisite
You must be familiar with 10.7.1 EPLAN Service Configuration Process.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2, user G3, user H1, user H2, and user H3
on NE1.
by the services of user G1 and user H1.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click
ter
Enabled PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 carries the services

/ PORT2: Enabled and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
Disable PORT1 and PORT2.
d

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
g Mode Duplex equipment of user G1 and user H1 supports

Frame
Length
default values.
ter
TAG PORT1: Access The access equipment of user G1 and user H1

PORT2: Access does not support VLAN tags. Hence, the
Ethernet access equipment transmits only the
packets without the VLAN tags. In this
example, TAG are set to Access for PORT1
and PORT2.
Default PORT1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN PORT2: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user G1, user G2,
and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on
the transmission network side for the
EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,
and user H3. In this manner, the services of
different users are isolated.
VLAN - This parameter adopts the default value.

Priority

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Entry PORT1: Enabled The services of user G1 and user H1 are

Detectio PORT2: Enabled EVPLAN services. Hence, the entry
n detection function must be enabled to check
whether the packets carry VLAN tags. In this
Enabled.
ter

Type PORT2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and
VCTRUNK4 of the EGSH board) used by the services of user G2, user G3, user H2, and
user H3 on NE1.
ter
TAG VCTRUNK1: Access The service access equipment of user G2,

VCTRUNK2: Access user G3, user H2, and user H3 supports
VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames
VCTRUNK3: Access do not carry VLAN tags. In this example,
VCTRUNK4: Access TAG is set to Access for VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Default VCTRUNK1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN VCTRUNK2: 100 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID EVPLAN services between user G1, user G2,
VCTRUNK3: 200 and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on
VCTRUNK4: 200 the transmission network side for the
EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,
and user H3. In this manner, the services of
different users are isolated.
VLAN VCTRUNK1: 0 This parameter adopts the default value.

Priority VCTRUNK2: 0
VCTRUNK3: 0
VCTRUNK4: 0
Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled The services of user G2, user G3, user H2,
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled and user H3 are EVPLAN services. Hence,
n the entry detection function must be enabled
VCTRUNK3: Enabled to check whether the packets carry VLAN
VCTRUNK4: Enabled tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set
to Enabled.
ter

VCTRUNK3: UNI processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
VCTRUNK4: UNI compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

VCTRUNK3: GFP VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
VCTRUNK4: GFP interconnected equipment at both ends must

+1] same value.
VCTRUNK3:
Scrambling mode[X43
+1]
VCTRUNK4:
Scrambling mode[X43
+1]

VCTRUNK3: FCS32 the interconnected equipment at both ends
VCTRUNK4: FCS32 must be set to the same value.
Sequenc VCTRUNK3: Big endian the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e VCTRUNK4: Big endian the interconnected equipment at both ends

Header VCTRUNK3: No value No. Extension Header Option of the
VCTRUNK4: No interconnected equipment at both ends must
Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

VCTRUNK3: Enabled
VCTRUNK4: Enabled

Huawei Mode.
VCTRUNK3: Huawei
Mode
VCTRUNK4: Huawei
Mode

VCTRUNK3: 2000 user.
VCTRUNK4: 2000

VCTRUNK3: 300
VCTRUNK4: 300

VCTRUNK3: Disabled
VCTRUNK4: Disabled
and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
This
Example
User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 10-34, VCTRUNK1 of

G2 e Ports K1 the EGSH board is used by the service of user
G2.
Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user G2 uses a 100 Mbit/s

lable el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Bou bound.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
nd Ser Bidirection The service of user G2 is a bidirectional

Path vice al service.
s Dire
ctio
n
Ava VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is set to

ilabl VC4-1.
e
Res
ourc
es

G3 e Ports K2 the EGSH board is used by the service of user
G3.
Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user G3 uses a 100 Mbit/s

Bou bound.
nd
Path Ser Bidirection The service of user G3 is a bidirectional
s vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

ilabl VC4-2.
e
Res
ourc
es

H2 e Ports K3 the EGSH board is used by the service of user
H2.
Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user H2 uses a 100 Mbit/s

Bou bound.
nd
Path Ser Bidirection The service of user H2 is a bidirectional
s vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

ilabl VC4-3.
e
Res
ourc
es

H3 e Ports K4 the EGSH board is used by the service of user
H3.
Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user H3 uses a 100 Mbit/s

Bou bound.
nd
Path Ser Bidirection The service of user H3 is a bidirectional
s vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

ilabl VC4-4.
e
Res
ourc
es
l Click New.
This
Example

bridge.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
VB Type 802.1q The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using

one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the
contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames
and performs Layer 2 switching according to the
destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.
Bridge IVL/Ingress When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, the

Switch Mode Filter Enable bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are
in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching
according to the destination MAC addresses and the
VLAN IDs of the packets.
Bridge IVL -
Learning
Mode
Ingress Filter Enabled -
MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Then, click .
l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. ClickClose.
l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
4. Create a VLAN filtering table.
l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
l Click New.
l Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create
VLAN dialog box that is displayed.

This
Example
VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on

the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user G1, user G2, and user G3.
l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.
This
Example
VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 on

the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

. Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.
l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting
the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. ClickClose.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example
Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub If user G2 need not communicate with user G3,
VCTRUNK1: set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access
Spoke the services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke.
Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot
VCTRUNK2: communicate with each other. A port of the
Spoke Hub attribute can communicate with a port of
PORT2: Hub the Spoke or Hub attribute.
VCTRUNK3:
Hub
VCTRUNK4:
Hub
6. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user G2,
user G3, user H2, and user H3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
User G2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
G2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user G2 is a bidirectional

l service.




timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
User G3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
G3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user G3 is a bidirectional

l service.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example



1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the
same as the number of sink timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
User H2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
H2 is at the VC-12 level. The service level
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user H2 is a bidirectional

l service.




same as the number of source timeslots.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
User H3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
H3 is at the VC-12 level. The service level
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user H3 is a bidirectional

l service.




Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End
10.24 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPLAN

Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge) on a SDH Network
The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private
networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN
solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.
A network operator requires that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI) services
sent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.
The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4
respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards.
The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN IDs are tagged with different S-VLAN
IDs. The service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.
At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
and an S-VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure
transparent transmission EPL services only.

A network operator requires that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI) services
sent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.
Service Requirement
As shown in Figure 10-35, the transmission network is required to transmit the VoIP and HSI
services.
The service requirements are as follows:
l The VoIP services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2
and NE4 respectively and into the VoIP server at the convergence node NE1. A 100 Mbit/
s bandwidth is required.
l The HSI services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2
and NE4 respectively and into the HSI server at the convergence node NE1. A 150 Mbit/
s bandwidth is required.
l The VoIP services need to be isolated from the HSI services.
l The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet
optical interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– C-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 10

– C-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 20
NOTE
The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:
l User M needs to communicate with user N.
l User M need not communicate with user N.
If user M and user N need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.5.
The operator requires that all services received from the user side should be uniformly labeled
and groomed through planned S-VLANs.
l S-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 100
l S-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 200
Figure 10-35 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
NE3
Line Board 1-SL64 Line Board 17-SL64

User M PORT1 PORT1

NE2 NE4 User N
Service C-VLAN 1 NE1 17 Service C-VLAN
VoIP 10 VoIP 10
20 VoIP 17 1
HSI HSI HSI 20
PORT1 PORT2
Line Board 1-SLQ64
Line Board
u 17-SLQ64
VB1 S-VLAN 100 VB1 S-VLAN 200

PORT1 PORT2
VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 3500

IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which VoIP data is isolated
from HSI data.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The VoIP services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 10 from NE2 and NE4 are further tagged
with the S-VLAN ID of 100 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then,
the services are forwarded to the VoIP server through Layer 2 switching.
l The HSI services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 20 from NE2 and NE4 are further tagged
with the S-VLAN ID of 200 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then,
the services are forwarded to the HSI server through Layer 2 switching.

The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4
respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards.
The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN IDs are tagged with different S-VLAN
IDs. The service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.
Figure 10-36 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).

NE1:EGSH NE2:EGT2
-1 VCTRUNK1 PORT1
SVLAN 100 :VC4 User M
VC4 C4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1
:V
PORT1 VC4 VC4-xv:VC4-2
VoIP VCTRUNK1
Server VC4-xv:VC4-1
VC4-xv:VC4-2
SVLAN 200 VC4:V
NE4:EGT2
VCTRUNK2 VC4:V C4-1
PORT2
HSI VC4-xv:VC4-3 C4-2
Server VC4-xv:VC4-4 PORT1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-xv:VC4-1
User N
VC4-xv:VC4-2
VB1 SDH
PORT VCTRUNK
Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label
C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP) S-VLAN(100) C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP) C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP)
C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI) S-VLAN(200) C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI) C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI)
l The EVPLAN services of user M:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and
second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT2 board of NE2.
l The EVPLAN services of user N:
– Occupy the third VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4 (VC4:VC4-4) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE4.
– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGSH board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and
second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT2 board of NE4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Disabled
Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length
Port Type C-Aware C-Aware - -


Protocol
Port Type C-Aware C-Aware - -
Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-3, VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-1,

VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-4 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2
Table 10-33 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

Board EGSH
VB Name VB1
Bridge Type 802.1ad
Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN
VB Port 1 2 3 4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Mount Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20
S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200
VLAN VLAN VLAN filtering table 1 VLAN filtering table 2

Filterin Filtering
g
VLAN ID 100 200
Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1,

Physical Port VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
Hub/ PORT1 Hub

Spoke
PORT2 Hub
VCTRUNK Spoke
1
VCTRUNK Spoke
2

At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
and an S-VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure
transparent transmission EPL services only.
Prerequisite
The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only.
The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used to
transparently transmit the S-VLAN tags.
The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports the following operation types:
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port

l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN
l Performing port mounting based on the port
l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN
This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad
provider bridge is set to IVL/Ingress Filter Enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are added
with the preset S-VLAN tags, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN
filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: The entry detection is performed
for the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags are
added to the packets according to the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tags and the
S-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relation does not exist, the packets are
discarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packets
are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-
Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.
NOTE
l A C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped into different S-VLAN tags, but
does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping into multiple S-VLAN tags.
l Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port are
not filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have the
S-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Aware
port, the packets are transparently transmitted.
l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering is
performed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the S-
VLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering
table. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.
In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packets
leave a port:
l The port must be contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.
l The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually
mounts the port to the bridge.
– In the case of a C-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN
ID that is added when the packets enter the port.
– In the case of an S-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN
ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware port is mounted
based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal S-VLAN IDs.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN service of NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGSH board) used by
the VoIP server and HSI server.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter
Enabled PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 transmit

/ PORT2: Enabled the services and Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disable Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.
d
Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the VoIP server and HSI
g Mode Duplex server support the 1000M full-duplex mode.
PORT2: 1000M Full- Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

Frame
Length
default values.
Parameter Value in This Example Description
Port Type PORT1: C-Aware The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute

PORT2: C-Aware must be selected for the port when
you configure the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge. The C-Aware port connects to
the port on the client network,
identifies and processes the packets
that contain C-VLAN tags (namely,
client tags). The S-Aware port
connects to the port on the network
side, identifies and processes the
packets that contain S-VLAN tags
(namely, service tags of the network
operator).
need not be set.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
used by the services of user M and user N on NE1.
ter
Port VCTRUNK1: C-Aware The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must be

Type VCTRUNK2: C-Aware selected for the port when you configure the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The C-Aware port is
connected to the network port of the user
equipment, and identifies and processes the
packets that carry the C-VLAN tags. The S-
aware port is used for connecting to the
supplier network, and identifies and
processes the packets that carry the S-VLAN
tags.
need not be set.
ter


+1] same value.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ter

ter


Huawei Mode.

user.


l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the
Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click
Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation
Result that is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example
User M Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK1 of the EGSH board is used by

e Ports K1 the service of user M.
Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user M uses a 200 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be
Boun bound.
d
Paths Serv Bidirectio The service of user M is a bidirectional
ice nal service.
Dire
ctio
n
Ava VC4-1, -
ilabl VC4-2
e
Res
ourc
es
User N Configurabl VCTRUN VCTRUNK2 of the EGSH board is used by

e Ports K2 the service of user N.
Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user N uses a 200 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be
Boun bound.
d
Paths Serv Bidirectio The service of user N is a bidirectional
ice nal service.
Dire
ctio
n
Ava VC4-3, -
ilabl VC4-4
e
Res
ourc
es
l Click New.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This
Example

bridge.
VB Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with
two layers of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the
outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and
supports only the mounted ports whose attributes are
C-Aware or S-Aware.
Bridge IVL/Ingress This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags
Switch Mode Filter Enable that are in the packets and performs Layer 2
switching according to the destination MAC
addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the packets.
Bridge IVL -
Learning
Mode
Ingress Filter Enabled -
MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

l Set the parameters in the Service Mount Configuration dialog box that is displayed.
Click Add Mount Port and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog
box.
Parameter Value in This Example
Operation Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN
Type
VB Port 1 2 3 4
Mount Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20
S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200
The other parameters take the default values.

l Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Click
4. Create a VLAN filtering table.
l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
l Click New.
l Create the VLAN filtering table of the VoIP service.
This
Example
VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VoIP service uses the S-
VLAN ID of 100.

. Then, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result that is displayed.
l Create the VLAN filtering table of the HSI service.
This
Example
VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the HSI service uses the S-
VLAN ID of 200.

. Then, click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is
displayed.
NOTE
If normal communication is required between user M and user N, proceed to Step 1.6.
l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example
Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub User M and user N need not communicate with
PORT2: Hub each other. In this case, set VCTRUNK1 and
VCTRUNK2 that access the services of user M
VCTRUNK1: and user N to the Spoke attribute. Ports of the
Spoke Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each
VCTRUNK2: other. A port of the Hub attribute can
Spoke communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub
attribute.
6. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user M
and user N.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation
r This
Example
User M Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
M is at the VC-12 level. The service level
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user M is a bidirectional

l service.


and VC4-2.

Sink 1-2 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

timeslots.
Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y
User N Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
N is at the VC-12 level. The service level
Direction Bidirectiona The service of user N is a bidirectional

l service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

r This
Example


and VC4-4.

Sink 1-2 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

NOTE
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.25 Configuration Example: Configuring EVPL and

EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge) on a SDH Network
The EGSH board supports the EVPL and EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) on a same
port. Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed trough a same
port, which is applicable to the scenario where the EVPL and EVPLAN users share the same
port.
Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed trough a same port.
When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the Ethernet services of the
convergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLAN
IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN
tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this
manner, the node communicates with a remote node. The Ethernet services of user H are received
from the external port on an Ethernet board, tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then
transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated
from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags are stripped.
For the Ethernet service of user G, at convergence node NE1, the EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q
bridge) and VLAN filtering table should be created. Access nodes NE2 and NE4 should be
configured with the EPL transparent services. After user H transmits services to the Ethernet,
the service data is added with different VLAN tags and thus different user data is isolated but
transmitted over the same VCTRUNK.

Based on different VLANs, EVPL and EVPLAN services can be accessed trough a same port.
Service Requirement
On the network as shown Figure 10-37, the service requirements are as follows:
l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.
The branches need to form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. G2 and G3 need not
communicate with each other.
l Two branches of user H are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.
l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 10-37 Networking diagram for configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services
NE3
T2000
Line Board 1-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64

PORT2 PORT1
H2 NE2 NE4
PORT1 1 NE1
17
G2 G3
17 1
H1 G1
PORT2 PORT1
Line Board 1-SLQ64
Line Board 17-SLQ64
VB1 VLAN 200

VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4
PORT2 VCTRUNK
OptiX OSN 8800
OptiX OSN 3500

IEEE 802.1q, the access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each.
When the data of user G is accessed into the transmission network, services of different users
are isolated from each other by EGSH board on NE1. The EPL services are configured to be
transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1 when the NE2 and NE4 are used as access
nodes.
When the data of user H is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 is added
to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN tag is
stripped.

When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the Ethernet services of the
convergence node are received from an external port and tagged with the corresponding VLAN
IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through Layer 2 switching, the VLAN
tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this
manner, the node communicates with a remote node. The Ethernet services of user H are received

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
from the external port on an Ethernet board, tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then
transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services of different users are isolated
from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node, the VLAN tags are stripped.
Figure 10-38 shows the signal flow of the EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)
and the timeslot allocation to the EVPL and EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge).

NE2:EGT6
VCTRUNK1 PORT1
User G2
NE1:EGSH VC4-xv :VC4-1
C 4-1
4:V PORT2
VC VCTRUNK2
User H2
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 VC4-xv :VC4-2
PORT1 2
VC4-xv :VC4-1 4-
User G1 VC
VCTRUNK2 4:
VC
VC4-xv :VC4-2
VC
4:V NE4:EGT6
PORT2 C4
VCTRUNK3 -1
User H1
VC4-xv :VC4-3
VCTRUNK1 PORT1
User G3
VB1 VC4-xv :VC4-1
SDH
PORT VCTRUNK
Strip VLAN Label Add VLAN Label Strip VLAN Label
Data(User G) VLAN(100) Data(User G) Data(User G)
Data(User H) VLAN(200) Data(User H) Data(User H)
l The Ethernet LAN services of user G:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the
first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.
– Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGSH board
l The Ethernet services of user H
– Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGSH board
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1
Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Working 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Mode Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex
Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame
Length
TAG Access Access - - -
Entry Enabled Enabled - - -

Detection
Default 100 200 - - -

VLAN ID
VLAN 0 0 - - -
Priority
Port Type UNI UNI - - -

Paramete NE1 NE2 NE3
r
Port VCTRUN VCTRUN VCTRUN VCTRUN VCTRUN VCTRUN

K1 K2 K3 K1 K2 K1
Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol
TAG Access Access Tag aware - - -
Entry Enabled Enabled Enabled - - -

Detection
Default 100 100 200 - - -

VLAN ID
VLAN 0 0 0 - - -
Priority
Bound VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4-

Path xv:VC4-1 xv:VC4-2 xv:VC4-3 xv:VC4-1 xv:VC4-2 xv:VC4-1
Port Type UNI UNI UNI - - -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-36 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
Board EGSH
VB Name VB1
Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q
VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
VLAN Filtering VLAN Filtering VLAN filtering table 1
VLAN ID 100
Forwarding Physical PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Port
Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub
PORT2 Hub
VCTRUNK1 Spoke
VCTRUNK2 Spoke
VCTRUNK3 Hub
VCTRUNK4 Hub
Table 10-37 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services
Parameter NE1
EVPL
PORT1←→VCTRUNK1
Board EGSH
Service Type EVPL
Source Port PORT1
Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 200
Sink Port VCRTUNK1
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 200

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the Ethernet service of user G, at convergence node NE1, the EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q
bridge) and VLAN filtering table should be created. Access nodes NE2 and NE4 should be
configured with the EPL transparent services. After user H transmits services to the Ethernet,
the service data is added with different VLAN tags and thus different user data is isolated but
transmitted over the same VCTRUNK.
Prerequisite
You must be familiar with 10.9.1 EVPL (QinQ) Service Configuration Process and 10.7.1
EPLAN Service Configuration Process.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2 and user G3 on NE1. For the operation
procedures, see 10.23.3 Configuration Process.
NOTE
Step 3 Configure the EVPL services for user H1 and user H2 on NE1, For the operation procedures,
see 10.20.3 Configuration Process.
Step 6 Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.
Option Description
CF card.
card. Card
----End
10.26 Parameters
10.26.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port)

In this user interface, you can query and set basic attributes of a MAC port.
10.26.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port)
In this user interface, you can enable and disable the auto-negotiation or non-auto-negotiation
flow control mode for an external port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.26.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port)

In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an external port.
10.26.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)
In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an internal port.
10.26.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes
In this user interface, you can query and set the TAG attribute for a PORT port or a VCTRUNK
port.
10.26.6 Parameters: Network Attributes
In this user interface, you can set port attributes.
10.26.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service
In this user interface, you can create or query the source and sink routes of an Ethernet leased
line, and set port attributes and path binding.
10.26.8 Parameters: VLAN SNCP Service Management
In this user interface, you can create, query, and modify attributes and status of VLAN SNCP
services.
10.26.9 Parameters: VLAN Group
In this user interface, you can configure a VLAN group. You can assign services that have
consecutive CVLANs into a VLAN group. In this way, you configure the VLAN group as a
whole in the same way as you configure a single VLAN.
10.26.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service
In this user interface, you can create and query Ethernet LAN services, and configure the
forwarding filter table.
10.26.11 Parameters: Aging Time
In this user interface, you can set the life cycle for filtering dynamic records in the database and
the aging time for the MAC address.
10.26.12 Parameters: VLAN Unicast
In this user interface, you can create, query or delete a VLAN unicast item.
10.26.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring
In this user interface, you can configure the port mirroring of the Ethernet interface board. Then,
you can use the port mirroring to perform packet monitoring, daily maintenance and in-service
commissioning.
10.26.14 Parameters: Protocol Fault Management
In this user interface, you can diagnose the Ethernet protocol and restart the protocol state
machine by restoring the protocol, to remove the protocol faults.
10.26.15 Parameters: Port MAC Address Filtering
In this user interface, you can set the port MAC address filtering.
10.26.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port)

In this user interface, you can query and set basic attributes of a MAC port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Port PORTn Displays all the PORT ports

For example: PORT3 that the Ethernet board can
use. The value n indicates the
PORT port number.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled means that the user

Default: Disabled uses this port and the service
is available. Disabled means
that the services at this port
are not handled. Hence, you
need to enable the port that
you want to use when
configuring services.
Working Mode For example: 10M Half- Displays the working modes
Duplex of the Ethernet port. Auto-
Negotiation can
automatically determine the
optimized working modes of
the connected ports. This
mode is easy to maintain and
is recommended.
During configuration, make
sure that working modes of
the connected ports are
consistent. If the working
modes are different, the
services are down.
Max. Frame Length For example: 1518 The Max. Frame Length
(Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter specifies the
maximum frame length that
is supported at an Ethernet
port.
Port Physical Parameters Reported value by query Displays the actual working
status of the PORT port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, The MAC Loopback

Outloop (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default: Non-Loopback parameter specifies the MAC
loopback state at an Ethernet
port. Port loopback setting is
applied to locating faults
only.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, The PHY Loopback

Outloop (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default: Non-Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
loopback state at an Ethernet
port. Port loopback setting is
applied to locating faults
only.
Physical Type Displays the physical type of

port.
Logic Type SDH-OPPORT, SDH- Displays the logic type of

EPORT port.
10.26.2 Parameters: Flow Control (External Port)

In this user interface, you can enable and disable the auto-negotiation or non-auto-negotiation
flow control mode for an external port.
Parameters
Port PORTn Displays all PORT ports an

Ethernet board can use.
A port numbered n.
Non-Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable Symmetric The Non-Autonegotiation

Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, Flow Control Mode
Receive Only (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default: Disable specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in non-
auto-negotiation mode.
Autonegotiation Flow Values of parameters vary The Autonegotiation Flow

Control Mode with different boards and Control Mode (Ethernet
products. Port Attribute) specifies the
flow control mode adopted
when an Ethernet port works
in auto-negotiation mode.
10.26.3 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (External Port)

In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an external port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Port PORTn Displays the PORT port. The

letter n indicates the port
number.
Enabling Broadcast Packet Disabled, Enabled Enables or disables broadcast

Suppression Default: Disabled packet suppression.
Broadcast Packet 10% to 100% When the broadcast packet

Suppression Threshold suppression function is
enabled, if the broadcast
packet occupies a bandwidth
that exceeds the overall
bandwidth of the port x the
suppression threshold, the
broadcast packet is
suppressed.
Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Sets whether to enable loop

Default: Disabled detection, which is used to
check whether a loop exists at
the port.
Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable

shutdown of a loop port,
which is used to set blocking
for a loop port.
10.26.4 Parameters: Advanced Attributes (Internal Port)

In this user interface, you can set and query advanced attributes for an internal port.
Parameters
Port VCTRUNKn Displays the VCTRUNK

port. The letter n indicates the
port number.
Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled The Loop Detection

Default: Disabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
function of reporting the self-
loop alarms after one of the
following loopback cases is
detected.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled The Loop Port Shutdown

Default: Enabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter is set to disable the
self-loop port after a self-
loop port is detected if the
loop port shutdown function
is enabled. After the self-loop
port is shut down, the self-
loop port only transmits or
receives the self-loop
detection packets rather than
any other packets. If the port
is not a self-loop port, it starts
to work again.
10.26.5 Parameters: TAG Attributes

In this user interface, you can query and set the TAG attribute for a PORT port or a VCTRUNK
port.
Parameters
Port PORTn or VCTRUNKn PORT port or VCTRUNK

port. "n" is the port number.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid The tag is used for setting
Default: Tag Aware which type of data packets
can be processed.
Set this parameter to Tag
Aware to enable the port to
transparently transmit
packets that have the VLAN
ID (tag). If packets do not
have the VLAN ID (untag),
the packets are discarded.
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN priority cannot be
edited.
Set this parameter to Access
to enable the port to add the
default VLAN ID to packets
that do not have the VLAN
ID (untag). If the packets
have the VLAN ID (tag), the
packets are discarded.
Set this parameter to
Hybrid to enable the port to
add the default VLAN ID to
the packets that do not have
the VLAN ID (untag). If the
packets have the VLAN ID
(tag), the packets are
transparently transmitted.
The tag attribute is effective
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.
NOTE
The tag attribute does not apply
to C-Aware and S-Aware ports.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 The Default VLAN ID

Default: 1 (Ethernet Port Attribute)
default VLAN ID of a port.
NOTE
When the tag attribute is Tag
Aware, the default VLAN
cannot be set. When the tag
attribute is Access or Hybrid,
the default VLAN can be set.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
VLAN Priority 0-7 The VLAN Priority

Default: 0 (Ethernet Port Attribute)
priority of the default VLAN
ID of a port. It indicates the
priority of the service quality.
NOTE
When the tag attribute is Tag
Aware, the VLAN priority
cannot be set. When the tag
attribute is Access or Hybrid,
the VLAN priority can be set.
Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection

Default: Enabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter specifies whether
to identify the tag labels in the
data packets.
10.26.6 Parameters: Network Attributes

In this user interface, you can set port attributes.
Parameters
Port PORTn or VCTRUNKn A PORT or VCTRUNK port

numbered n.
Port Attribute Values of parameters vary The Port Attribute

with different boards and (Ethernet Port) parameter
products. specifies the position of a
port in the network. Different
port attributes support
different packets.
10.26.7 Parameters: Ethernet Line Service

In this user interface, you can create or query the source and sink routes of an Ethernet leased
line, and set port attributes and path binding.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Table 10-38 Ethernet Service Parameters

Service Type Values of parameters vary Displays the service type.

with different boards and
products.
Direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional Displays the transmit

Default: Bidirectional direction of the service.
The bidirectional service
refers to two services, one of
which is transmitted from the
source port to the sink port
and the other one of which is
transmitted from the sink port
to the source port. The
unidirectional service refers
to a service transmitted from
the source port to the sink
port.
Operation Type Values of parameters vary Sets the operation type for the
with different boards and EVPL(QinQ) services.
products. l Add S-VLAN: Adds S-
Add S-VLAN, Add S-VLAN TAG based on the PORT
and C-VLAN, Strip S- route.
VLAN, Strip S-VLAN and
C-VLAN, Transparently l Add S-VLAN and C-
transmit S-VLAN, Translate VLAN: Adds S-TAG and
S-VLAN, Transparently C-TAG based on the
transmit C-VLAN, PORT route.
l Transparently transmit S-
VLAN: Transmits the
User TAG transparently.
l Transparently transmit C-
VLAN: Transmits the C-
TAG transparently.
l Translate S-VLAN:
Exchanges S-TAG based
on the PORT route.
l Strip S-VLAN: Strip S-
TAG.
l Strip S-VLAN and C-
VLAN: Strip S-TAG and
C-TAG.
Source Port PORTn, VCTRUNKn Displays the name of the

Default: PORT3 source port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Source VLAN 1-4095 Sets VLAN ID of the source

port. Applies to EPL
services.
Source C-VLAN 1-4095 Sets C-VLAN of the source

port. C-VLAN is the client
VLAN ID.
Applies to EVPL(QinQ)
services.
Source S-VLAN 1-4095, NULL Sets S-VLAN of the source

Default: NULL port. S-VLAN is the service
VLAN ID.
services.
Sink Port PORTn, VCTRUNKn Displays the name of the sink

For example: PORT3 port.
Sink VLAN 1-4095 Sets VLAN ID of the sink

port. Applies to EPL
services.
Sink C-VLAN 1-4095 Sets C-VLAN of the sink

port. C-VLAN is the client
VLAN ID.
services.
Sink S-VLAN 1-4095, NULL Sets S-VLAN of the sink

Default: NULL port. S-VLAN is the service
VLAN ID.
services.
C-VLAN Priority AUTO, Priority0, Priority1, Sets the priority of C-VLAN.

Priority2, Priority3,
Priority6, Priority7
S-VLAN Priority AUTO, Priority0, Priority1, Sets the priority of S-VLAN.

Priority6, Priority7
OAM Enable Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the OAM

function.
Port For example: PORT3 Displays the name of a port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware (for Sets the network attributes
boards that support QinQ) for a port.
Default: UNI If the port is of the UNI type,
the port processes the tag
attributes in 802.1Q and the
port has the Tag, Access, and
Hybrid attributes.
If the port is of the C-Aware
type, the port does not
process the tag attributes in
802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries the C-
only the data packet that has
the C-VLAN tag.
If the port is of the S-Aware
data packet carries the S-
the S-VLAN tag.
Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables a port.

Default: Enabled Enabled: This port can
access services.
Disabled: This port cannot
access services.
TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid TAG is used to set the type of
Default: Tag Aware the processed messages. The
tag aware port only processes
the messages with a tag, and
those messages without a tag
are discarded. However, the
Access port is quite the
contrary. The hybrid port
processes the two types of
messages. It adds a tag to the
messages without a tag
according to the VLAN ID of
this port.
10.26.8 Parameters: VLAN SNCP Service Management

In this user interface, you can create, query, and modify attributes and status of VLAN SNCP
services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Table 10-39 VLAN SNCP parameters

Protection Group ID For example: 1 Displays the protection group

number.
Board For example: 5-L4G Displays the board that is

configured with the VLAN
SNCP.
Service Type EPL, EVPL(QinQ) Sets and Queries the Service

Default: EPL Type of the VLAN SNCP.
Operation Type Add S-VLAN, Transparently When the Service Direction

Transmit S-VLAN, is Unidirectional, the
Transparently Transmit C- operation types include Add
VLAN, Translate S-VLAN, S-VLAN, Transparently
Strip S-VLAN, Transmit S-VLAN,
Default: Vary with different Transparently Transmit C-
boards VLAN, Translate S-VLAN
and Strip S-Vlan. When the
Service Direction is
Bidirectional, the operation
types include Transparently
Transmit S-VLAN,
Transparently Transmit C-
VLAN, Translate S-VLAN.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only
when the Service Type
parameter is set to EVPL
(QinQ)
Source Port l TBE: POTR3 to PORT11, Displays the source port of a

VCTRUNK1 to VLAN SNCP service.
VCTRUNk16 Currently, PORT and
l L4G: POTR3 to PORT8, VCTRUNK types are
VCTRUNK1 to supported.
VCTRUNk4
Default: Port3
Source C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) 1 to 4095 Sets the C-VLAN ID of the

Default: - source port.
Source S-VLAN 1 to 4095 Displays the S-VLAN ID of

Default: - the source port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Sink Port l TBE: POTR3 to PORT11, Displays the sink port of a

VCTRUNK1 to VLAN SNCP service.
VCTRUNk16 Currently, PORT and
l L4G: POTR3 to PORT8, VCTRUNK types are
VCTRUNK1 to supported.
VCTRUNk4
Default: Port3
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.1,3-6) 1 to 4095 Sets the S-VLAN ID of the

Default: - sink port.
Sink S-VLAN 1 to 4095 Displays the C-VLAN ID of

Default: - the sink port.
Current Status Normal State, Lockout State, Displays the switching status
Forced (Standby to Active) of a service.
Switching State, Forced
(Active to Standby)
Switching State, Manual
(Standby to Active)
Switching State, Manual
(Active to Standby)
Switching State, WTR State,
SF Switching, Unknown
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive, Revertive Sets the revertive mode that

Default: Revertive determines whether services
are switched back from the
protection channel after the
working channel is normal.
WTR Time (s) 6 to 720 Sets the WTR time. The

Default: 6 amount of time that elapses
between the moment that the
working channel is normal
and the moment that services
are switched back to the
working channel. The
Revertive Mode is available
only when the value is
Revertive.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Delay Time (100ms) 0 to 100 Sets the amount of time that

Default: 0 elapses from the moment that
the system detects a signal
degrade to the moment that
service switching takes
place. Set this parameter to
avoid repeat switching when
services are unstable. The
switching delay time is
expressed in 100
milliseconds. For example, if
you enter 10, the delay time
is 1000 milliseconds.
Current Working Link Working Link, Protection Displays the link where
Link services reside.
Link Status Normal, SF Displays the working status

of the link where services
reside.
OAM Enable Enabled, Disabled Displays the enabling status

Default: Disabled of the OAM function.
Port For example: PORT3 Displays the port name.
Port Type For example: UNI Displays the port type.
Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets the port status.

Default: Disabled

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TAG Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid The tag is used for setting
Default: Tag Aware which type of data packets
can be processed.
Set this parameter to Tag
Aware to enable the port to
transparently transmit
packets that have the VLAN
ID (tag). If packets do not
have the VLAN ID (untag),
the packets are discarded.
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN priority cannot be
edited.
Set this parameter to Access
to enable the port to add the
default VLAN ID to packets
that do not have the VLAN
ID (untag). If the packets
have the VLAN ID (tag), the
packets are discarded.
Set this parameter to
Hybrid to enable the port to
add the default VLAN ID to
the packets that do not have
the VLAN ID (untag). If the
packets have the VLAN ID
(tag), the packets are
transparently transmitted.
10.26.9 Parameters: VLAN Group

In this user interface, you can configure a VLAN group. You can assign services that have
consecutive CVLANs into a VLAN group. In this way, you configure the VLAN group as a
whole in the same way as you configure a single VLAN.
Parameters
Board For example: 4-TBE Displays the name of a board.
Port For example: PORT3 Choose the port of the VLAN

group.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Initial VLAN For example: 1 Sets and displays the initial

VLAN. The value of Initial
VLAN ranges from 1 to
4095. The calculation
formula is as follows: Initial
VLAN = p x (2^n), where n
= 0, 1,…, 12, and p is an
integer ranging from 1 to
2^m. m + n< = 12.
Last VLAN For example: 1 Displays the VLAN ID of last

the VLAN.
VLAN Group Member For example: 1 Sets and displays the number
Count of members in a VLAN
group.
l The calculation formula of
VLAN Group Member
CountVLAN depends on
the value of Initial
VLAN. When Initial
VLAN = 1, VLAN Group
Member Count = 2^n - 1.
When Initial VLAN has
another value, VLAN
Group Member Count =
2^n, where n is equal to the
n in the formula of Initial
VLAN.
l The maximum number of
VLAN groups is equal to
the number of links on a
board.
10.26.10 Parameters: Ethernet LAN Service

In this user interface, you can create and query Ethernet LAN services, and configure the
forwarding filter table.
Parameters
Board For example: NE501-4-TBE Displays the name of the

board.
VB ID For example: 1 Allocated automatically

when an Ethernet LAN
service is created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
VB Name A maximum of 16 English Indicates the name of the VB.

letters or numerals
Bridge Type For example: 802.1q Sets the type of a bridge.
Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable, Selects the bridge switch
SVL/Ingress Filter Disable mode.
Default: IVL/Ingress Filter
Enable
Bridge Learning Mode Values of default with Bridge Learning Mode

different bridge mode. For (Ethernet LAN Service)
details, click the links in the indicates how the bridge
Description column. learns the MAC address.
Bridge Learning Mode is
classified into the shared
VLAN learning and
independent VLAN learning
modes. The shared VLAN
learning mode indicates
learning and forwarding
based on the MAC address.
The independent VLAN
learning mode indicates
learning and forwarding
based on the VLAN and
MAC address.
Ingress Filter Enabled, Disabled Displays the status of an

ingress filter.
Enabled: Checks the validity
of a VLAN ID on the basis of
bridge. If the ingress receives
a packet that does not belong
to the VLAN associated to
the port on the bridge, the
ingress discards the packet.
Disabled: Does not check the
validity of a VLAN ID. All
packets that need to enter the
bridge are valid.
MAC Address Self-learning Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables MAC

Default: Enabled address learning.
Enabled: MAC addresses are
learnt.
Disabled: MAC addresses
are statically configured.
Active Active, Inactive Displays the activation status

of a VB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-40 Service Mount

VB Port For example: 1 Sets the VB logical ports.
Mount Port For example: PORT1 The mount port may be the
PORT port or VC trunk port.
Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port, You can perform operations
Add S-VLAN base for Port as follows:
and C-VLAN, Mount Port, l Mounting that is based on
Mount Port and base for Port port and for which the S-
and S-VLAN VLAN tag is added
l Mounting that is based on
port and C-VLAN and for
which the S-VLAN tag is
added
port
port and S-VLAN
Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware(for Sets the network attributes

boards that support QinQ) for a port.
Default: UNI If the port is of the UNI type,
the port processes the TAG
attributes in 802.1Q and the
port has the Tag Aware,
Access and Hybrid attributes.
If the port is of the C-Aware
data packet carries no S-
the C-VLAN tag.
If the port is of the S-Aware
type, It can identify and
process the VLAN
information about the
provider. If the QinQ Type
field is valid, this port treats
the outmost label carried by
the packets as S-VLAN.
Service Direction Bidirectional Displays the direction of an

Default: Bidirectional Ethernet service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables a port.

Enabled: This port can
access services.
Disabled: This port cannot
access services.
TAG Access, Tag aware, Hybrid Sets the tag attribute of the
VB.
Hub/Spoke Hub, Spoke Hub/Spoke (Ethernet LAN

Default: Hub Service) is used to separate
packets between the logical
ports in the network bridge.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Sets the VLAN ID. To set the

VLAN ID, right-click a port,
and choose VLAN
Allocation from the shortcut
menu. Then, in the dialog box
displayed, set the VLAN ID
of the VB link that the port
belongs to. You can also set
the VLAN ID in the VLAN
Filtering tab.
Working Mode For example: 10M Half- Displays the working modes
Duplex of the Ethernet port. Auto-
Negotiation can
automatically determine the
optimized working modes of
the connected ports. This
mode is easy to maintain and
is recommended.
During configuration, make
sure that working modes of
the connected ports are
consistent. If the working
modes are different, the
services are down.
Service Direction Bidirectional Sets the direction of service.
C-VLAN 0 to 4095 Sets the C-VLAN value.
S-VLAN 0 to 4095 Sets the S-VLAN value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Sets the VLAN ID. To set the

VLAN ID, right-click a port,
and choose VLAN
Allocation from the shortcut
menu. Then, in the dialog box
displayed, set the VLAN ID
of the VB link that the port
belongs to. You can also set
the VLAN ID in the VLAN
Filtering tab.
MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Sets the MAC address of

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF VLAN unicast. To set the
The first byte is an even MAC address of VLAN
number. unicast, right-click a port that
is already allocated with a
VLAN ID, and choose
VLAN Unicast from the
shortcut menu. Then, in the
dialog box displayed, set the
MAC address of VLAN
unicast for the port. You can
also set the MAC address of
VLAN unicast in the VLAN
Unicast tab.
Table 10-41 VLAN Filtering

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Specifies the VLAN ID and

configures the forwarding
filter table.
VB Port For example: (1-2) Sets the VB logical ports.
Forwarding Physical Port For example: PORT1, Displays the physical port
VCTRUNK1 that is actually attached to the
VB link.
Available forwarding ports For example: PORT4 Displays the queried physical
ports that can be used for
forwarding.
Selected forwarding ports For example: PORT4 Displays the selected ports
that can be used for
forwarding.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-42 VLAN Unicast

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Only the VLAN ID specified

in the forwarding filter table
can be selected. VLAN
unicast is different from
common unicast. A VLAN
unicast uses VB, VLAN ID,
port, and MAC address as its
unique identifier.
MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Displays the MAC address of

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF VLAN unicast.
The first byte is an even
number.
Physical Port For example: PORT1 Displays the name of the port.
Aging Status Static Displays the aging status of

unicast items, including
static and dynamic.
VB VB ID-VB Name VB is automatically

displayed by the Web LCT.
Table 10-43 Disable MAC Address

VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Inhibits a MAC address in the

VLAN of a certain VB.
MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Enters a MAC address that is

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF to be inhibited. Hence, enters
The first byte is an even a MAC address that is not
number. associated to the VLAN
unicast of this VLAN.
Table 10-44 Bound Path

VCTRUNK Port For example: VCTRUNK1 Displays the name of the

configured VC trunk port.
Level For example: VC12 Displays the level of a VC

trunk-bound path.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Service Direction Bidirectional, Uplink, Displays the direction of an

Downlink Ethernet service.
Default: Bidirectional
Bound Path For example: VC4-1-VC3(1) Specifies the number of the

path that you want to bind,
including VC4 path No. and
VC12/VC3 path No. VC4-1-
VC12(1-3).
Number of Bound Paths For example: 1 Displays the number of the

bound paths.
Table 10-45 Self-learning MAC address

MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Enters a MAC address.

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
The first byte is an even
number.
VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Displays the VLAN ID.
10.26.11 Parameters: Aging Time

In this user interface, you can set the life cycle for filtering dynamic records in the database and
the aging time for the MAC address.
Parameters
Board For example: NE1-8-TBE Displays the board name.
MAC Address Aging Time / 1-120 The MAC Address Aging

Aging Time Unit Default: 5 Time parameter specifies the
valid duration of a
dynamically learnt MAC
address in the MAC address
table.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.26.12 Parameters: VLAN Unicast

In this user interface, you can create, query or delete a VLAN unicast item.
Parameters
Board For example: NE70-4-ER4 Displays the Board.
VLAN ID 1 to 4095 Only the VLAN ID that has

been created in earlier VLAN
Filtering can be selected.
MAC Address The first digit is an even MAC Address

number
Port Logical port (LP) +port No.
Aging Status Static, Dynamic Aging status of unicast items,

Default: Static including static, dynamic and
so on.
10.26.13 Parameters: Port Mirroring

In this user interface, you can configure the port mirroring of the Ethernet interface board. Then,
you can use the port mirroring to perform packet monitoring, daily maintenance and in-service
commissioning.
Parameters
Board For example: 5-L4G Selects a board for port mirroring.
Mirror Listener Port For example: PORT4 Displays the mirror listener port. It is
used to perform packet detection and
daily maintenance.
Uplink Listened Port For example: PORT3 Sets the uplink listened port.
Downlink Listened For example: PORT5 Sets the downlink listened port.
Port
10.26.14 Parameters: Protocol Fault Management

In this user interface, you can diagnose the Ethernet protocol and restart the protocol state
machine by restoring the protocol, to remove the protocol faults.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Field Description
Diagnose Port Selects the diagnose port.
Protocol Type Selects the Ethernet protocol type.
Diagnose Information Select the diagnose information.
Fault Displays the fault diagnosis result.
10.26.15 Parameters: Port MAC Address Filtering

In this user interface, you can set the port MAC address filtering.
Parameters
Port For example: Port1 Displays the port name.
MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-01 to FE- Displays the opposite router

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF MAC address.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 11 Configuring PRBS Test
11 Configuring PRBS Test
About This Chapter
Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS)
error detection function. On the Web LCT, the meter board can be configured to send PRBS
signals, and the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the
PRBS signals. In this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without
attaching a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
11.1 Application of PRBS

Specific application scenarios are provided to meet different requirements of the PRBS test.
11.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board
Before you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the auxiliary
boards at the near and far ends.
11.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board
In the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code that is looped
back from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is sent with the code that is
received, you can determine that the current link or equipment is normal or not.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11 Configuring PRBS Test Web LCT Operation Guide
11.1 Application of PRBS

Specific application scenarios are provided to meet different requirements of the PRBS test.
In the PRBS test, OTU boards are used as the meter board and the auxiliary board. There are
two common networking modes for the PRBS test. In the first mode, the PRBS test is started on
the client side of the OTU board. In the second mode, the PRBS test is started on the WDM side
of the OTU board. The details on the two modes are provided as follows.
l Starting the PRBS test on the client side
See Figure 11-1. One OTU board is used to serve as a meter. In this case, the OTU board
is called meter board. The meter board generates PRBS signals and sends the signals to the
client side of the local auxiliary board. The signals are looped back on the WDM or client
side or with fiber of the auxiliary board at the opposite end.
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the client side
TX RX OUT IN
Near Far
Meter end 1 end 2
board auxiliary WDM network auxiliary
board board
RX TX IN OUT
1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback

2: Loopback on the client side/fiber loopback
l Starting the PRBS test on the WDM side

See Figure 11-2. One OTU board is used to serve as a meter. In this case, the OTU board
is called meter board. The meter board generates PRBS signals and sends the signals to the
WDM side of the auxiliary board at the opposite end. The signals are looped back on the
WDM side of the auxiliary board at the opposite end.
Figure 11-2 Schematic diagram of the PRBS test on the WDM side
OUT IN
Far
Meter 1 end
board WDM network
auxiliary
board
IN OUT
1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary

Board
Before you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the auxiliary
boards at the near and far ends.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU must be configured.
The service type must be set according to the board type.
The WDM-side outloop, client-side inloop, or fiber loopback is configured on the remote
auxiliary board based on the networking requirements.
Precautions
CAUTION
l After the PRBS Test Status is enabled, do not perform any other operation, such as
modifying the service type, opening or closing a laser, or configuring a loopback.
l After the PRBS test is complete, stop the test. Then, configure the PRBS Test Status of the
board to Disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as auxiliary board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click PRBS Test Status field, and select
Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11 Configuring PRBS Test Web LCT Operation Guide
NOTE
The service type of the auxiliary board should be set before configuring the PRBS test status.
----End
11.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board

In the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code that is looped
back from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is sent with the code that is
received, you can determine that the current link or equipment is normal or not.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU must be configured.
The service type must be set according to the board type.
Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers of all OTU
boards are turned on.
When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on the OTU
board which is used as auxiliary board.
Precautions
CAUTION
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test is used only
in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as meter board and choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function tree.
Step 2 Select a channel or a port in the right interface, and set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the actual situation.
Step 3 Optional: Choose Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane in
an accumulative manner.
NOTE
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the previous n
seconds.
Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the service is
displayed.
Step 5 Click OK to start the PRBS test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.
NOTE
l If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally working.
l If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.
l If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be interrupted or have loud
noise.
----End
Result
After the Test, right click on the channel or the port selected for the test and choose Clear
Result from the displayed shortcut menu to clear the test result.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 12 Modifying the Configuration Data
12 Modifying the Configuration Data
About This Chapter
12.1 Modifying the Attributes of NEs

After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following task
sets.
12.2 Modifying the Boards Configuration
After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board based
on the following task sets.
12.3 Modifying the Fibers Configuration
After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based
12.4 Modifying the Services Configuration
After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service
based on the following task sets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12 Modifying the Configuration Data Web LCT Operation Guide
12.1 Modifying the Attributes of NEs

After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following task
sets.
12.1.1 Modifying the NE Name

You can modify the NE name as needed, which does not affect the running of the NE.
12.1.2 Deleting an NE
When you need to adjust the network topology or have created a wrong NE, you can delete the
NE from the Web LCT. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the Web LCT
but does not affect the running of the equipment.
12.1.1 Modifying the NE Name

You can modify the NE name as needed, which does not affect the running of the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and select Configuration > NE Attribute.
Step 2 Enter a new NE name in Name.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
TL1 Command
Issue the following TL1 command to fulfill the task.
SET-SID
12.1.2 Deleting an NE
When you need to adjust the network topology or have created a wrong NE, you can delete the
NE from the Web LCT. Deleting an NE removes all information of the NE from the Web LCT
but does not affect the running of the equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.
You have already logged out the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.
Step 2 Click OK.
----End
12.2 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board based
12.2.1 Deleting Boards

To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the Slot Layout.
12.2.2 Modifying Board Parameters
When you need to adjust the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.
12.2.3 Modifying Port
The client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM equipment can be
configured as color ports or colorless ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of
the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.
12.2.1 Deleting Boards

To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the Slot Layout.
Prerequisite
l The services and protection groups must be deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Click required subrack on which board you want to delete
is present.
Step 2 Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.
----End
12.2.2 Modifying Board Parameters

When you need to adjust the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
For the board classification and details of board parameters, see Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board and choose the corresponding item from the
Function Tree.
Table 12-1 List of parameters for optical transponder and Ethernet unit
Parameter Name Application Scenario
Laser Status Refer to 13.11 Open and Close the Laser on

the WDM Board.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Refer to 13.18 Setting Automatic Laser

Shutdown on the WDM Board.
Service Type Refer to 13.6 Configuring the Service

Type.
LPT Enabled Refer to Enabling and Disabling LPT.
NULL Mapping Status Refer to Setting the NULL Mapping Status.
OFC Enable Refer to 13.17 Enable the Open Fiber

Control (OFC).
Port Enabled, TAG, Port Type Refer to 10.3.1 Configuring Internal Ports.
Port Enabled, TAG, Port Type, Working Refer to 10.3.2 Configuring External
Mode, MAC LoopBack, PHY LoopBack, Ports.
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode, Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
Other parameters Refer to 13.8 Configuring Board WDM

Interface Attributes.
Table 12-2 List of parameters for Tributary unit and line unit

the WDM Board.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Refer to 13.18 Setting Automatic Laser

Shutdown on the WDM Board.
LPT Enabled Refer to Enabling and Disabling LPT.
NULL Mapping Status Refer to Setting the NULL Mapping Status.
OFC Enable Refer to 13.17 Enable the Open Fiber

Control (OFC).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Port Enabled, TAG, Port Type, Entry Refer to 10.3.1 Configuring Internal Ports
Detection, Enabling Broadcast Packet and 10.3.2 Configuring External Ports.
Suppressing, Working Mode
Path Binding Refer to 13.21 Configuring Path Binding.

Table 12-3 List of parameters for Optical amplifying unit


the WDM Board.

Table 12-4 List of parameters for Spectrum analyzer unit

Wavelength Monitor Status Refer to 13.10 Monitoring Wavelengths by

Using the MCA Board.

NOTE
In the case of an optical multiplexing/demultiplexing board, a static optical add/drop multiplexing board, a
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board,an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator
board, choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree to change the parameters settings of
the board.
Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply.
----End
12.2.3 Modifying Port

The client-side and line-side ports of the OTU board in the NG WDM equipment can be
configured as color ports or colorless ports. The port type needs to be set according to type of
the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module used in the equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Background Informations
Only the TOM board supports interchange of line-side ports and client-side ports. When a TOM
board is created, the ports on the TOM board are created automatically and are defined as client-
side ports by default
When a board is created, the ports on the board are created automatically and the client-side
ports are defined as Client Side Colorless Optical Port by default.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Slot Layout.
Step 2 Right-click the board, and choose Path View from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 Right-click the port for which you want to modify the port type and choose Modify Port from
the shortcut menu. The Modify Port dialog box is displayed. Set Type and click OK to apply
the configuration.
NOTE
If you need to modify Type to Line Side Color Optical Port or Electrical Port, you must first delete the
port, and then add the port. Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.
Step 4 Optional: In Path View, right-click the desired port, and click Delete Port.
Step 5 Optional: In Path View, right-click a blank space and select Add Port. In the Add Port dialog
box displayed, set the Type of the port. Click OK to apply the configuration.
----End
12.3 Modifying the Fibers Configuration

After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based
12.3.1 Deleting Fibers

During the adjustment of the network, if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between
NEs, you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
12.3.1 Deleting Fibers

During the adjustment of the network, if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between
NEs, you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
Prerequisite
There are no services on the fiber to be deleted.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the fiber you wish to delete, and click Delete.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
12.4 Modifying the Services Configuration

After a service is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the service
based on the following task sets.
12.4.1 Deleting Cross-Connections

When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.
12.4.2 Modifying SDH Services
When a network changes or services are adjusted, you can modify an SDH service by using the
modification function of the Web LCT. Alternatively, you can modify the SDH service by
deleting it and then creating a cross-connection again.
12.4.3 Deleting SDH Services
You can delete an existing SDH when it is no longer applicable or is adjusted.
12.4.4 Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service
The SNCP service has the dual fed and selective receiving function and is applicable to the
protection for the cross-subnet service. When configuring WDM services on a per-NE basis,
you can use this method to convert a Non-Protection service that are already configured to an
SNCP service.
12.4.5 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service
you can use this method to convert SNCP services that are already configured to non-protection
services.
12.4.9 Modifying a VLAN Group
You can modify the configuration of a VLAN group to meet service requirements. Modifying
a VLAN group is to modify the number of VLAN members.
12.4.10 Deleting a VLAN Group
You can delete VLAN groups according to service requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12.4.1 Deleting Cross-Connections

When you need to modify or re-configure cross-connections, you need to first delete them.
Precaution
CAUTION
Deleting cross-connections may interrupt services.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click Query to query the
information about the existing cross-connections.
Step 3 Select the cross-connections to be deleted and click Delete.
----End
12.4.2 Modifying SDH Services

When a network changes or services are adjusted, you can modify an SDH service by using the
modification function of the Web LCT. Alternatively, you can modify the SDH service by
deleting it and then creating a cross-connection again.
Precautions
CAUTION
Performing this operation interrupts the service that you modify.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Cross Connection
Step 2 Select a cross-connection and choose Display > Expand to Unidirectional.
Step 3 You can modify the SDH service by using the method described in Step Step 4 or Step 5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l By using the method described in Step Step 4, you can modify the source or sink of a service, but the
source and sink must be on the same board before and after the modification.
l If the modification requirement cannot be met in the method described in Step Step 4 (for example, a
pass-through service needs to be configured to the local through modification), you can delete the
original service and create the cross-connection again in the method described in Step Step 5, to achieve
the modification.
Step 4 Optional: To modify the SDH service, choose Modify from the shortcut menu.
1. Select the service that you want to modify, right click the service and choose Modify from
the shortcut menu. The Modify SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
2. Modify Source VC4 or Sink VC4, Source Timeslot Range (e.g.1,3-6), and Sink Timeslot
Range (e.g.1,3-6). For details of the parameters, see 9.7.1 Parameter: SDH Service
Configuration.
NOTE
In this method, you can modify only Source VC4 or Sink VC4 at a time. The source VC4 and sink
VC4 cannot be modified at the same time.
3. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation
was successful.
4. Click Close.
5. Select the service that is modified, and click Activate.
6. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
7. Click Close.
Step 5 Optional: To modify the SDH service, delete the service and then create the service again.
1. Select the service that you want to modify, and click Delete.
2. Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation
was successful.
3. Click Close. The service is deleted.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4. Create the service again as required. For details, see 13.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-
Connections.
----End
12.4.3 Deleting SDH Services

You can delete an existing SDH when it is no longer applicable or is adjusted.
Procedure
Step 2 Click Query to query existing services. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.
Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
Step 4 Optional: If the service to be deleted is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the
service that you want to delete and click Deactivate.
CAUTION
Deactivation will interrupt services.
Step 5 Select the desired service and click Delete.

Step 6 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK.
Step 7 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
----End
12.4.4 Converting a Normal WDM Service to an SNCP Service

you can use this method to convert a Non-Protection service that are already configured to an
SNCP service.
Prerequisite
l The normal service must be created.
l When you convert a normal cross-connection service to an SNCP service, the protection
path must be idle.
Procedure
Step 2 Select the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query the services
on the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Right-click the normal cross-connection service to be converted and choose To SNCP from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE
Only unidirectional services can be converted to SNCP Service.
Step 4 In the To SNCP dialog box displayed, configure the protection service. Enter the attributes for
the protection service and click OK to convert the normal service to an SNCP protection service,
and thus the protection service route is created.
NOTE
You need to perform the operation on the source and sink NEs of the service or the NE that is set as a dual
fed or selective receiving node that crosses protection subnets.
Step 5 Click New. In the Create Cross-Connection Service dialog box, create a unidirectional cross-
connection from the sink board to the protection board.
NOTE
You need to perform the operation on the source and sink NEs of the service or the NE that is set as a dual
fed or selective receiving node that crosses protection subnets.
Step 6 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, configure bidirectional pass-
through services between line boards.
NOTE
You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuration Example
As shown in Figure 12-1, project L is a ring network that consists of four optical NEs named
A, B, C and D. All optical NEs are OADM stations.
Figure 12-1 Project L networking design
B D
OADM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 12-2 SNCP service after conversion

NE A
WEST NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
TQS
3(RX/TX)-1
NE B 4(RX/TX)-1 NE D
5(RX/TX)-1
6(RX/TX)-1
WEST NS2 EAST NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1 EAST NS2 1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2 1(IN/OUT)-1 1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-4
TQS TQS
3(RX/TX)-1 3(RX/TX)-1
4(RX/TX)-1 4(RX/TX)-1
5(RX/TX)-1 NE C 5(RX/TX)-1
6(RX/TX)-1 6(RX/TX)-1
EAST NS2 WEST NS2 WEST NS2
TQS
3(RX/TX)-1
4(RX/TX)-1
5(RX/TX)-1
6(RX/TX)-1
EAST NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
: client-side signal
: WDM-side protection service
: working electrical signal
: protection electrical signal
As shown in Figure 12-2, in project L, an ODU1 service is transmitted on station A and dropped
on station B. In addition, the SNCP protection is provided on station B. Services are added and
dropped through the TQS and NS2 boards on each station.
Before the conversion, the flow of the ODU1 service is as follows: ODU1←→tributary board
on station A←→east line board on station A←→west line board on station B←→tributary board
on station B←→ODU1.
Through the conversion, the protection service is generated and the flow is as follows: ODU1
←→tributary board on station A←→west line board on station A←→east line board on station
D←→west line board on station D←→east line board on station C←→west line board on station
C←→east line board on station B←→tributary board on station B←→ODU1.
After the conversion on station B, you need to perform the configuration as follows:
l On station A, configure unidirectional services from the tributary board to the west line
board.
l On station C and station D, configure pass-through services between the east and west line
boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12.4.5 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal WDM Service

you can use this method to convert SNCP services that are already configured to non-protection
services.
Prerequisite
The SNCP service must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION
Converting an SNCP service to a non-protection service may interrupt the service.
Procedure
Step 2 Select the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab, click Query to query services of
the NE.
Step 3 Right-click on the desired SNCP service and choose SNCP Working Service Convert to Non-
Protection Service from the shortcut menu. In the prompt dialog box, click OK. The protection
service is deleted automatically, but you need to manually delete the cross-connection from the
sink board to the protection board.
NOTE
You can also choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut
menu. In this case, the working service is deleted automatically, but you need to manually delete the
unidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the working board.
Only unidirectional SNCP protection services can be converted to non-protection services.
Step 4 Right-click the unidirectional cross-connection from the sink board to the protection board, and
choose Delete from the shortcut menu. In the Confirm dialog box , click OK.
Step 5 On the intermediate NE that protection services pass through, delete bidirectional pass-through
services between line boards.
NOTE
You need to perform this operation on all the intermediate NEs that protection services pass through.
When choose SNCP Protection Service Convert to Non-Protection Service, you need to perform this
operation on all the intermediate NEs that normal services pass through.
----End
Configuration Example
As shown in Figure 12-3, project J is a ring network that consists of four optical NEs named A,
B, C and D. All optical NEs are OADM stations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 12-3 Project J networking design
B D
OADM
Figure 12-4 SNCP service before conversion

NE A
WEST NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
TQS
3(RX/TX)-1
NE B 4(RX/TX)-1 NE D
5(RX/TX)-1
6(RX/TX)-1
WEST NS2 EAST NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1 EAST NS2 1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-4
TQS TQS
3(RX/TX)-1 3(RX/TX)-1
4(RX/TX)-1 4(RX/TX)-1
5(RX/TX)-1 NE C 5(RX/TX)-1
6(RX/TX)-1 6(RX/TX)-1
EAST NS2 WEST NS2 WEST NS2
TQS
3(RX/TX)-1
4(RX/TX)-1
5(RX/TX)-1
6(RX/TX)-1
EAST NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
: client-side signal
: WDM-side protection service
: working electrical signal
: protection electrical signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
As shown in Figure 12-4, in project J, an ODU1 service is transmitted on station A and dropped
on station B. In addition, the SNCP protection is provided on station B. Services are added and
dropped through the TQS and NS2 boards on each station.
Before the conversion, the flow of the ODU1 service is as follows: ODU1←→tributary board
on station A←→east line board on station A←→west line board on station B←→tributary board
on station B←→ODU1. The protection service flow for the ODU1 service is as follows:
ODU1←→tributary board on station A←→west line board on station A←→east line board on
station D←→west line board on station D←→east line board on station C←→west line board
on station C←→east line board on station B←→tributary board on station B←→ODU1.
Through the SNCP Working Service Change to Normal Service, the protection service whose
flow is as follows: ODU1←→tributary board on station A←→west line board on station A←
→east line board on station D←→west line board on station D←→east line board on station
C←→west line board on station C←→east line board on station B←→tributary board on station
B←→ODU1 is deleted.
After the conversion on station B, you need to perform the configuration as follows:
l On station A, delete unidirectional services from the tributary board to the west line board.
l On station C and station D, delete pass-through services between the east and west line
boards.

Prerequisite
EPL services must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 2 Click the EPL Service tab and click Query to view the created EPL services.
Step 3 Select the desired EPL service and click Delete. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK to
delete the service.
----End


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Precaution
CAUTION
Procedure
----End

Prerequisite
Precaution
CAUTION
Procedure
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
----End
12.4.9 Modifying a VLAN Group

You can modify the configuration of a VLAN group to meet service requirements. Modifying
a VLAN group is to modify the number of VLAN members.
Prerequisite
The VLAN group must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION
Modifying a VLAN group may affect the services.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Step 3 Select a VLAN group that you want to modify, and double-click the VLAN Group Member
Count to modify the number of VLANs. Then, click Apply.
NOTE
The modified VLAN Group Member Count is restricted as follows:
l The value of Initial VLAN is in the range of 1 to 4095. The formula is as follows: Initial VLAN = p
x 2n. n is an integer from 0 to 12. p is an integer from 1 to 2m. m + n <= 12.
l The formula of VLAN Group Member Count depends on the value of the Initial VLAN. If the value
of Initial VLAN is 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n - 1. If the value of Initial VLAN is an
integer other than 1, VLAN Group Member Count = 2n. The value of n is the same as that in the
formula of the Initial VLAN.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see 10.26.9 Parameters: VLAN Group.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The configuration is complete.
----End
12.4.10 Deleting a VLAN Group

You can delete VLAN groups according to service requirements.
Prerequisite
The VLAN group must be created.
Precaution
CAUTION
Deleting a VLAN group may interrupt the services in the VLAN group.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet
Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select a VLAN group that you want to delete, and click Delete.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The configuration is complete.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide 13 Tasks
13 Tasks
About This Chapter
This topic describes basic operations that may be used when you configure services. For
example, configure the service type and WDM interface attributes of the board. You can refer
to this topic if required.

You can configure the ROADM by following the instructions below.
13.2 Configuring Common Cross-Connections
This section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections.
13.3 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections
This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.
13.4 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services
The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to
maintain the network.
13.5 Configuring Service Timeslots
For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be
configured during service creation.
13.6 Configuring the Service Type
The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface
of the board is the same as the actual service type.
13.7 Testing Ethernet Service Paths
If network cables are connected improperly or are faulty, the Ethernet service paths may be
faulty. Services are then affected. Hence, the Ethernet service paths must be normal.
13.8 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes
Interface attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every
board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interface
parameters can be queried.
13.9 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
13 Tasks Web LCT Operation Guide
Configure the interface attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every
13.10 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the MCA Board
If the system requires the multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA) board, you need to enable
the MCA board to monitor wavelengths. The station that is configured with the MCA boards
usually uses the MCA boards to check the OSNR of a single wavelength and check whether
certain wavelengths are dropped.
13.11 Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board
You can turn on or off a laser by setting the laser status.
13.12 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board
You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port does not carry
services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing
permanent eye damage. You can turn on the laser when the optical port needs to carry services.
13.13 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters
In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also
need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition,
you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission
fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board
Before using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port working
mode for the 52TOM board.
13.15 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs
The board supports different functions in different working modes. Set the working mode of the
board properly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is used
as a regenerator board, set the working mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.
13.16 Configuring the Service Mode
If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.
13.17 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)
The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber
is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than
remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output
optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
13.18 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board
Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is
no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface
board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost,
the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service
life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye
damage.
13.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
damage.
13.20 Configuring Protection Trigger Conditions
You can set the signal degrade (SD) as the trigger condition of automatic protection switching
for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
13.21 Configuring Path Binding
By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to
multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order
signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical interface decreases.
13.22 Configuring the FEC Function
When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable
the function and set the FEC type of the current optical interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

You can configure the ROADM by following the instructions below.
13.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is
to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
13.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
13.1.3 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection
The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that
performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the
creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
13.1.1 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is
to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
NOTE
l The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default, such a port is
a Fixed Edge Ports.
l If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically becomes the edge
port of NEs.
l If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port, the port cannot be
configured as the edge port of NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the NE on the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Select the Edge Port tab.
Step 2 Select the desired port in the Available Edge Ports field. Click to add the port to
Selected Edge Ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Click Apply.

NOTE
If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the Selected Edge
Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge Ports.
----End
13.1.2 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
Prerequisite
The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the Web LCT.
The edge port must be configured.
When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-
connection of the single station uses.
When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically
or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing board automatically
adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you
need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical
add/drop multiplexing board. The Auto option is available for the several types of optical cross-
connection trails. For details, see Feature Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The WSMD4 can be used to replace the WSD9 or the WSM9.

OA indicates the optical amplifier boards such as OAU1 and OBU1.
The FIU can be added before or after the OA.
In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards such as D40, D40V and MR2 can be added between the
WSD9 and OTU.
In add networking, the multiplexer boards such as M40, M40V and MR2 can be added between the OTU
and WSM9.
NOTE
The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be configured
in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a single
station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab in
the right-hand interface.
Step 2 Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
l Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths
list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click OK.

l The cross-connect service created in this step is not one of the three conditions described in the
background information. Hence, you can only select Manual for OPA Mode.
Step 3 Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the interface.
----End
13.1.3 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection

The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that
performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the
creation of single-board optical cross-connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
When creating an optical cross-connection of a board, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of the single station where this board resides does not occupy the wavelength that
the optical cross-connection of the board uses.
Single-board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection are
independent from each other. The user can create single-board optical cross-connection and
configure services based on the planning to realize grooming at the optical layer. However, as
for the single-station optical cross-connection, grooming is realized after automatic computation
of the equipment. The configuration of single-board optical cross-connection and that of single-
station optical cross-connection are mutually exclusive in terms of resources. When the user
configures an optical-layer grooming board with the single-board optical cross-connection of
one wavelength, this wavelength can no longer be configured for single-station optical cross-
connection.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the NE icon in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click Board Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-
hand interface.
Step 2 Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
Step 3 Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the
right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.

Step 4 Click OK. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Click OK. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the interface.
----End
13.2 Configuring Common Cross-Connections

This section describes how to configure common electrical cross-connections.
13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections

By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a
single service.
13.2.1 Creating Cross-Connections

By creating a normal cross-connection, you can create the intra-board or inter-board route for a
single service.
Context
For cross-connect slot limitations, see 6.1 Overview.
Procedure
Step 1 When configuring the cross-connection services, first configure the service type of the WDM
interface of the OTU. For detailed configuration method, see 13.6 Configuring the Service
Type.
Step 3 Click the Electrical Cross-Connection Configuration tab. Click New and the Create Cross-
Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select corresponding values for Service Level and Service Type and set other parameters for
the service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Click OK and the created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.
----End
13.3 Configuring SDH Cross-Connections

This topic describes how to configure SDH cross-connections.
13.3.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity

The lower order cross-connection capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 determines the lower order
access capability of the equipment. Therefore, when configuring an SDH service, consider
whether the lower order cross-connection capacity of the equipment is sufficient.
13.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections
To groom SDH services, the SDH service cross-connections between line boards must be
created.
13.3.1 Querying the Lower Order Cross-Connection Capacity

The lower order cross-connection capacity of the OptiX OSN 8800 determines the lower order
access capability of the equipment. Therefore, when configuring an SDH service, consider
whether the lower order cross-connection capacity of the equipment is sufficient.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Query Low Crossing
Capacity from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Click Query.
----End
13.3.2 Creating SDH Cross-Connections

To groom SDH services, the SDH service cross-connections between line boards must be
created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The cross-connect board and the clock board must be configured.
Procedure
Step 2 Click Query to query SDH services from the NE.
Step 3 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
Step 4 Click Create and set the required parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed. For the meaning of parameters, refer to 9.7.1 Parameter: SDH Service
Configuration.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End
13.4 Configuring Path Overhead for SDH Services

The path overhead is configured for services, which helps network maintenance personnel to
maintain the network.
13.4.1 Configuring Trace Byte

The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the
transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same
vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters
previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.
13.4.2 Configuring C2 Byte
The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained
in the VC frame.
13.4.1 Configuring Trace Byte

The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the
transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same
vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters
previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.
Prerequisite
When the cross-connections of the VC12, VC3 or VC4 levels are created, you can query or set
the trace byte of the VC12, VC3 or VC4.
For details, see 9.2.1 Trace Byte.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The settings of J0 and J1 bytes must be consistent on the transmit and receive sides; otherwise, J0_MM
and HP_TIM are generated at the receive equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the type of the trace byte.
If you need to configure Perform the following operations
J0 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >

Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead
J1 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >

Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the
Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.
Step 2 Right-click the trace byte and choose the input mode.
If you choose Perform the following operations
Copy All Form Received Click Copy All Form Received.
Manual Input Click Manual Input and the Please input the overhead byte
dialog box is displayed. Choose Byte Mode and Input Mode and
enter the value of the trace byte. Click OK.
NOTE
l Choose Copy All Form Received and the contents of the trace byte received are automatically copied
to the table.
l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the trace byte.
Step 3 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.
----End
13.4.2 Configuring C2 Byte

The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained
in the VC frame.
Prerequisite
The cross-connection must be created on the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The C2 byte settings on the transmit and receive ends must be consistent. Otherwise, higher order path
signal label mismatch (HP_SLM) alarm may occur on the receive-end equipment.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the service level of the C2 byte.
If the service level of the C2 byte is Perform the following operations
VC4 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4
Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the
Signal Flag C2 tab.
Step 2 Set the values of C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received.

Step 3 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click OK and a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.
----End
13.5 Configuring Service Timeslots

For some boards the transmit and receive timeslots of the client-end services should be
configured during service creation.
Prerequisite
Applies to the TQM, TOM, LQM, LQMD, LOM, LQMS, LDMD, LDM, LDMS.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Step 2 Click Query to query the status of configured services for each port on the board.
Step 3 Choose the port, double-click Timeslot Configuration Mode and select Automatically
Assign.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Automatically Assign, Timeslot Configuration Mode of
the receive end and transmit end in the same direction of the service must be set as Automatically
Assign, and Send Timeslots and Receive Timeslots need not be set.
When Timeslot Configuration Mode is set as Manual, you can set parameters, such as Send
Timeslots and Receive Timeslots.
l The format of timeslots can be one of the following two:
l 1, 2, 3, 4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used.
l 1-4: Indicates that four (1-4) timeslots are used.
l Please obey the following rules during service configuration:
l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board.
l For each board, the same timeslot in the same direction cannot be shared by multiple services.
l In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the
transmit end.
l Timeslots must be set again after the service type is changed.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query. The configured timeslots of the board are displayed in the interface.
----End
13.6 Configuring the Service Type

The services can be transmitted normally only when the type of the services at the WDM interface
of the board is the same as the actual service type.
Precautions
CAUTION
l Modifying the service type will lead to service interruption.
l When configuring a GE service, make sure that the service types specified for the transmitter
and receiver in one direction are the same.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical interface. Double-click the Service
Type field and select the required service type.
Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of
Service Type is the same as the one set previously.
----End
13.7 Testing Ethernet Service Paths

If network cables are connected improperly or are faulty, the Ethernet service paths may be
faulty. Services are then affected. Hence, the Ethernet service paths must be normal.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet service must be created and activated.
Tools and Instruments

Two laptop computers on which the Windows operating system is installed, two network cables
Connection Test Diagram

Figure 13-1 shows the connection diagram for testing the Ethernet service paths.
If an Ethernet service is configured between B and D, you can connect two laptop computers to
the Ethernet board through network cables and perform a ping test.
Figure 13-1 Connection for testing Ethernet service paths
Web LCT A
B D
Laptop1 C Laptop2
NG WDM Equipment
Procedure
Step 1 See the connection diagram and connect the external ports on the Ethernet board to the network
ports of the laptop computers at the source and sink ends of the service.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop 1 and laptop 2. The two IP addresses must be set in the same
network segment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Set the IP address for laptop 1 as follows:

– IP address: 192.168.0.100
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
l Set the IP address for laptop 2 as follows:
– IP address: 192.168.0.101
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
NOTE
The IP address must not be set to a loopback address within the 127.0.0.0 network segment.
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop 1. Then a command line interface is displayed. Run the ping
command ping 192.168.0.101
l The prompt "Lost = 0 (0% loss)" is displayed. This message indicates that the Ethernet paths
are normal.
l If the prompted message is "Request timed out", it indicates that the Ethernet paths are
abnormal. In this case, check the network cable connection and the configuration of the
Ethernet services. Rectify the fault and then continue the test.
----End
13.8 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes

Interface attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. Click Query. The
parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the interface.
NOTE
When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from the
perspective of function.
Step 3 Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click corresponding parameter
fields and refer to WDM Interface to enter or select parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The attributes
values of the board are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
13.9 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes

Configure the interface attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the drop-down list. Click Query. Click
OK in the Confirm dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. The parameter
list of each optical port or channel is listed in the interface.
NOTE
When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from the
perspective of function.
Step 3 Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.
Step 4 Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.
----End
13.10 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the MCA Board

If the system requires the multi-channel spectrum analyzer (MCA) board, you need to enable
the MCA board to monitor wavelengths. The station that is configured with the MCA boards
usually uses the MCA boards to check the OSNR of a single wavelength and check whether
certain wavelengths are dropped.
Prerequisite
The MCA boards must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an MCA board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Monitor Wavelength from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the wavelength to be monitored on the board and set Wavelength Monitor Status to
Monitor. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Select the board that is enabled for wavelength monitoring and choose Configuration > Laser
Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Set Port Number and select the port to be analyzed.
Step 6 See Laser Spectrum Analysis. In Compensation Power(dBm), enter the optical power
compensation value. Then, click Refresh.
NOTE
The default value is 20 dBm and the range is -10 dBm to 30 dBm.
Step 7 Click Query to start the spectrum analysis. The Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform, and
Profile are displayed in the user interface.
NOTE
l Click X-Axis Frequency to specify that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform,
and Profile represents the frequency.
l Click X-Axis Wavelength to specify that the X-axis for the Spectrum Data, Spectrum Waveform,
and Profile represents the wavelength.
----End
13.11 Open and Close the Laser on the WDM Board

You can turn on or off a laser by setting the laser status.
Prerequisite
The relevant board must be created.
To forcibly turn on the laser, you must first disable the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
To turn off the laser, you must first enable the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. For
details of procedure, refer to Enabling/Disabling the ALS Function.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the By Board/Port(Channel) option button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the Laser Status field to modify or set the laser status
of the optical interface to Open or Close according to the requirement.
l Set Laser Status to Close, and click Apply. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. The
displayed Prompt indicating that the operation may cause service interruption or NE login
failure. You can confirm the settings according to actual service requirement.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When you turn off the laser of the ROPboard, another Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating
that you can turn off the laser only when the board belongs to an IPA protection pair. Confirm this
and click OK.
l Set Laser Status to Open, and click Apply.
Laser Status is the same as the one set previously.
----End
13.12 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board

You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port does not carry
services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing
permanent eye damage. You can turn on the laser when the optical port needs to carry services.
Prerequisite
The related board must be created.
Precautions
CAUTION
If you turn off a laser, services may be interrupted or you may fail to log in to certain NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port (channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Double-click Laser Switch and set the laser status of each port to Open or Close as required.
Step 4 Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.
----End
13.13 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters

In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also
need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition,
you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission
fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
Applicable to the LSXL, LSXLR, TDC, NS3 boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
8800.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be
established correctly.
Precaution
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt services.
Procedure
l Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion
Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation
parameter.
3. Select the port, click Start Search. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. The search
status changes to Searching. After successful search, the search status changes to The
search is successful.
NOTE
l After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other parameters do not
change until you query them.
l If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation value.
4. Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion compensation
value.
5. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
NOTE
After you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query result of the
dispersion compensation value may change.
6. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
l Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the baord.
1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion
Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation
parameter.
3. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion compensation range.
l The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value can be fine tuned
only if they are in the fine tune range.
4. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
----End
13.14 Configuring the Working Mode of the 52TOM Board

Before using the 52TOM board, you need to configure the board working mode and port working
mode for the 52TOM board.
Prerequisite
The 52TOM board must be created.
No cross-connection exists on the board when the board-level mode switching occurs on the
board.
No logical fiber exists on the optical interface when the board-level mode switching occurs on
the board.
Context
You can set the Cascading or Non-Cascading mode for the 11TOM and 52TOM boards.
l When the Cascading mode is selected, a maximum of eight channels of Any services of
multiple rates (<2.5 Gbit/s) are accessed through the SFP module from the client side of
the board. Then, the multiple channels of client-side signals are multiplexed to different
timeslots of the one-channel or two-channel ODU0 or the one-channel ODU1.
l When the Non-Cascading mode is selected, a maximum of eight channels of Any services
of multiple rates (<2.5 Gbit/s) are accessed through the SFP module from the client side of
the board. Then, the multiple channels of client-side signals are multiplexed to different
timeslots of the one-channel (maximumly eight-channel) ODU0 or the one-channel
(maximumly four-channel) ODU1.
NOTE
In the case of a 52TOM board, you need to set the cascading or non-cascading mode for the board, and the
application mode, such as the ODU0 mapping, ODU1 mapping, tributary mode, and tributary-line mode, for
each port. In this way, different signal flows can be realized. There are 14 types of working modes for the 52TOM
boards.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a 52TOM board, and choose Configuration > Working Mode from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 In the Board Working Mode pane, set Board Working Mode to Cascading or Non-
Cascading.
Step 3 In the Port Working Mode pane, select the desired optical interface. Click the Port Working
Mode field and select the corresponding mode from the drop-down list.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
13.15 Configuring the Working Modes of Ordinary OTUs

The board supports different functions in different working modes. Set the working mode of the
board properly according to the actual requirements. For example, when the ND2 board is used
as a regenerator board, set the working mode of the ND2 board to the regeneration mode.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The necessary OTU boards must be created.
Procedure
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), Select Board from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the desired port on the board, and then double-click Board Mode to choose the desired
port working mode from the drop-down list. For details on parameter values, refer to Board
Mode (WDM Interface).
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
13.16 Configuring the Service Mode

If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l Applicable boards: 11TOM, 12LQMD, 12LQMS, 12TQM, 13LQM, and 52TOM.
Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.
Procedure
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical interface. Double-click the
Service Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
13.17 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber
is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than
remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output
optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
Prerequisite
Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G, ISC2G, InfiniBand 2.5G
or InfiniBand 5G.
Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM and TN13LQM board.
Precautions
CAUTION
l Set the LPT Enabled and Automatic Laser Shoutdown functions to Disabled before the
OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab. Double-click the OFC Enabled field, and select Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
13.18 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM

Board
damage.
Prerequisite
The OTU board must be created.
Procedure
Function Tree. Select the By Function option button.
Step 2 Select Automatic Laser Shutdown from the drop-down list. Click Query and the attribute of
Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or channel are shown in the window.
Step 3 Select an optical interface and set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
Automatic Laser Shutdown is the same as the one set previously. When this parameter is set
to Enabled, the relevant laser on the client side of the board is shut down automatically when
an R_LOS alarm is reported from the WDM side of the board.
----End
13.19 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board

damage.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The optical interface board must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown
Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) and
Continuously On-test Period (ms).
Step 3 When you click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End
13.20 Configuring Protection Trigger Conditions

You can set the signal degrade (SD) as the trigger condition of automatic protection switching
for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
Prerequisite
l The OTU board must be applicable to the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
l The following OTU boards are not supported: 11LSXLR, 11TBE, 11ECOM, 11LSXR,
11ND2, 11NS3, 51NQ2, 12LSXLR, 12NS2, 12TMX and 12ND2.
Context
The following protection trigger conditions are supported: B1_SD, OTUk_DEG and
ODUk_PM_DEG.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board and then choose Configuration > WDM
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 4 Double-click the SD Trigger Condition cell that you want to set. In the SD Trigger
Condition dialog box, select one or more options and then click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
After the configuration of the parameters for the SD trigger condition of automatic protection switching,
the switching will enable when a selected alarm happens.
l The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that regenerator section B1 signals in the received signals are
degraded. This alarm occurs, when the processing board detects the B1 byte, indicating that the bit
error rate of the regenerator section signals exceeds the specified threshold value.
l The OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that OTUk signal degraded. This alarm occurs when bit errors
are of burst distribution and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold. When bit
errors are of Poisson distribution, if signals degrade this alarm occurs; if the bit error count crosses the
threshold, an OTUk_EXC alarm occurs.
l The ODUk_PM_DEG is an alarm indicating that ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm occurs when
the BIP8 detection mode is bursty mode and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the
threshold.
Step 5 Click Apply in the lower right corner.
Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the value of SD Trigger Condition is the same as the value that is
set.
----End
13.21 Configuring Path Binding

By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to
multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order
signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical interface decreases.
Prerequisite
Applies to the TSXL, TDX board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and
Direction.
NOTE
For the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound path, you must
select paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual service situation.
Step 4 Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End
13.22 Configuring the FEC Function

When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable
the function and set the FEC type of the current optical interface.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU units must be created.
Procedure
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button and select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click FEC Working State and FEC Type fields,
and select an appropriate value.
NOTE
After changing the service type on the board, you need to check whether FEC Type is correct on the Web
LCT.
Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The values of
FEC Working State and FEC Type are the same as the ones set previously.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide A Glossary
A Glossary
A
Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an
emergency has occurred. See also Event.
B
Back up A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original is
damaged or corrupted.
Broadcast The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the network
C
Channel The trail at the channel layer.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections"
capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their
respective inputs and outputs.
Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms
parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a
probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals at
multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between optical
channels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
A Glossary Web LCT Operation Guide
E
ESC Electric Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes the communication among all the
nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The
monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with
service signals.
Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcast
networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted
pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly
used with Ethernet networks.
Extended ID The serial number of a subnet where an NE resides, which is usually used to distinguish
different network segments in a WAN. An extended ID and an ID form the physical ID
of an NE.
F
Fault A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This does not include
an inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of external resources, or planned actions.
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE
software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that
have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:
port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is
based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.
Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of each time slot can
be identified.
G
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
I
IP address The only address in the TCP/IP protocol that is used to identify the communication port.
The IP address consists of four bytes in the decimal format, for example, 129.9.161.55.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
L
Laser The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths.
Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used
light source in fiber-optic system.
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
M
Main Topology The default T2000 client interface, a basic component of the human-machine interactive
interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different
NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network
operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
Main Topology The default T2000 client interface, a basic component of the human-machine interactive
interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different
NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network
operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
MAN Metropolitan Area Network. A network where the computer resources in a geographic
region are connected. The coverage of a MAN is larger than the coverage of a local area
network (LAN) but smaller than the coverage of a wide area network (WAN).
Mapping The process by which tributary signals are adapted into the corresponding virtual
container at the PDH/SDH edge.
N
NE A network unit, including the hardware and software. Normally a network unit has at
least one SCC board, which manages and monitors the entire network unit. NE software
runs on the SCC board.
O
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the optical signals of
various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths
from one channel.
Orderwire The link that provides voice communication between stations for operators or
maintenance engineers.
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication among nodes in
optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the
wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding
protection one is 1625 nm).
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals
into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Q
Quality of service Quality of service represents the overall performance of the service and determines the
satisfaction of customers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
A Glossary Web LCT Operation Guide
R
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can
communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19. 2 kbit/s.
S
S1 byte The byte defined in ITU-T to transmit the network synchronization status information.
SAN Storage Area Network. A dedicated high-speed data storage network which
interconnects multiple independent storage systems with multiple servers through fibre
path switch or other switch equipment.
SD Signal Degrade. A signal that indicates the associated data has degraded in the sense that
a degraded defect condition is active.
Settings Attribute of an operation or configuration that can be selected by the user.
Subnet The logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network
management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets. A subnet planning
can enhance the organization of a network view.
Support The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor.
T
T2000 A network management system that Huawei provides to manage transmission networks.
The T2000 is located between the NE level and the network level in the
telecommunication management network structure. That is, the T2000 is a subnetwork
management system. The T2000 provides all management functions at the NE layer and
some of the management functions at the network layer.
TCP/IP One of the key protocols in the Internal protocol suite. The hosts that connect to each
other through the TCP protocol can create connection between each other and exchange
data. The TCP protocol ensures that the data can be transmitted from the transmitter to
the receiver in a reliable and orderly manner. The TCP can also distinguish data for the
concurrent applications on the same host.
Timeslot Single timeslot on a E1 digital interface-that is, a 64-kbps, synchronous, full-duplex data
channel, typically used for a single voice connection.
Trail A type of end to end transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signal from the
input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of
the transferred signal.
U
Upload To report all or part of the configuration data of the NE to the T2000 and overwrite the
configuration data saved in the NE layer on the T2000.
User The user of the T2000 client, and the user and password define the corresponding
authority of operation and management of the T2000.
A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
W
WTR Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet the restoral
threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain the state during the WTR
period unless it is pre-empted by a higher priority bridge request.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations
B Acronyms and Abbreviations
ADM Add and Drop Multiplexer
AFEC Advanced Forward Error Correction
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ASON Automatic Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
CAR Committed Access Rate
CoS Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSES Continuous Severely Errored Second
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexer
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
B Acronyms and Abbreviations Web LCT Operation Guide
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
FEC Forward error correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FOADM Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer
GE Gigabit Ethernet
HDTV High Definition TV
ID Identity
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Sector
LAN Local Area Network
LCN Local Communication Network
LCT Local Craft Terminal
MIB Management Information Base
NE Network Element
NM Network Management
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Web LCT Operation Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
ODUk Optical Channel Data Unit-k
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OLP Optical Line Protection
OMS Optical multiplex section
OPU Optical Channel Payload Unit
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSNR Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio
OTM Optical Transport Module
OTN Optical Transmission Network
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
QoS Quality of Service
RDI Remote Defect Indication
ROADM Reconfiguration Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
RS Reed-Solomon
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
B Acronyms and Abbreviations Web LCT Operation Guide
SAN Storage Area Network
SCC System Control & Communication
SD Signal Degrade
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SF Signal Fail
SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SM Section Monitoring
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
UAT Unavailable Time
UNI User to Network Interface
VC Virtual Container
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex
WSS Wavelength Selective Switch
B-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)


Manual Dslan

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Manual Dslan

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Web LCT Operation Guide

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

3.10 Configuring the NE Time............................................................................................................................3-30

5 Configuring Wavelength Grooming......................................................................................5-1

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

5.4.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection..........................................................................5-14

6 Configuring WDM Services.....................................................................................................6-1

7 Configuring the 11TOM Board...............................................................................................7-1

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

7.4.2 Service Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................7-15

8 Configuring the 52TOM Board...............................................................................................8-1

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

8.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................8-42

9 Configuring SDH Services....................................................................................................... 9-1

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

9.6 Configuring the SNCP Tangent Ring Services.............................................................................................9-27

10 Configuring Ethernet Services............................................................................................10-1

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

10.6.8 Verifying Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................10-33

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

10.16.1 Networking Diagram......................................................................................................................10-68

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

10.26.1 Parameters: Basic Attributes (External Port)...............................................................................10-182

11 Configuring PRBS Test.........................................................................................................11-1

12 Modifying the Configuration Data.....................................................................................12-1

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

13.1 Configuring the ROADM............................................................................................................................13-4

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 6800 equipment management process............................................................................1-1

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Figure 7-6 Bidirectional service on station A....................................................................................................7-12

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

Figure 9-2 Networking diagram of a non-protection...........................................................................................9-5

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

Table 3-1 Configuration procedure......................................................................................................................3-3

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Table 10-19 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards.............................................................10-111

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 31 (2010-04-08)

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04

OptiX iManager T2000 Web V200R008C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R001C00

This document is intended for:

l Installation and Commissioning Engineer

Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Changes in Issue 31 (2010-04-08) Based on Product Version